EP2065757B1 - Electrophotographic image forming method - Google Patents
Electrophotographic image forming method Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- EP2065757B1 EP2065757B1 EP20070121966 EP07121966A EP2065757B1 EP 2065757 B1 EP2065757 B1 EP 2065757B1 EP 20070121966 EP20070121966 EP 20070121966 EP 07121966 A EP07121966 A EP 07121966A EP 2065757 B1 EP2065757 B1 EP 2065757B1
- Authority
- EP
- European Patent Office
- Prior art keywords
- toner
- image
- oil
- image forming
- roller
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Ceased
Links
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 title claims description 169
- 229920005989 resin Polymers 0.000 claims description 159
- 239000011347 resin Substances 0.000 claims description 159
- 239000000463 material Substances 0.000 claims description 153
- 238000012546 transfer Methods 0.000 claims description 129
- 239000008188 pellet Substances 0.000 claims description 51
- 239000004645 polyester resin Substances 0.000 claims description 48
- 229920001225 polyester resin Polymers 0.000 claims description 47
- 239000011230 binding agent Substances 0.000 claims description 43
- 238000010438 heat treatment Methods 0.000 claims description 38
- VTYYLEPIZMXCLO-UHFFFAOYSA-L Calcium carbonate Chemical compound [Ca+2].[O-]C([O-])=O VTYYLEPIZMXCLO-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 claims description 34
- 239000003086 colorant Substances 0.000 claims description 34
- 229920002545 silicone oil Polymers 0.000 claims description 34
- 150000001408 amides Chemical class 0.000 claims description 25
- 229910000019 calcium carbonate Inorganic materials 0.000 claims description 17
- 125000004433 nitrogen atom Chemical group N* 0.000 claims description 13
- 230000007480 spreading Effects 0.000 claims description 13
- 238000003892 spreading Methods 0.000 claims description 13
- 230000007613 environmental effect Effects 0.000 claims description 12
- 238000004833 X-ray photoelectron spectroscopy Methods 0.000 claims description 11
- 238000002844 melting Methods 0.000 claims description 11
- 230000008018 melting Effects 0.000 claims description 11
- 238000001816 cooling Methods 0.000 claims description 10
- 230000009477 glass transition Effects 0.000 claims description 10
- 238000003825 pressing Methods 0.000 claims description 8
- 238000004483 ATR-FTIR spectroscopy Methods 0.000 claims description 3
- 125000004429 atom Chemical group 0.000 claims description 3
- 239000001913 cellulose Substances 0.000 claims description 2
- 229920002678 cellulose Polymers 0.000 claims description 2
- 238000004611 spectroscopical analysis Methods 0.000 claims description 2
- 239000010410 layer Substances 0.000 description 106
- 239000003921 oil Substances 0.000 description 106
- 239000002245 particle Substances 0.000 description 86
- 108091008695 photoreceptors Proteins 0.000 description 77
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 description 66
- -1 polyethylene Polymers 0.000 description 57
- 239000001993 wax Substances 0.000 description 45
- 239000002253 acid Substances 0.000 description 43
- 239000002609 medium Substances 0.000 description 43
- 238000004140 cleaning Methods 0.000 description 42
- 239000003795 chemical substances by application Substances 0.000 description 37
- 229920001577 copolymer Polymers 0.000 description 37
- 230000001276 controlling effect Effects 0.000 description 36
- PPBRXRYQALVLMV-UHFFFAOYSA-N Styrene Natural products C=CC1=CC=CC=C1 PPBRXRYQALVLMV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 32
- MFGZXPGKKJMZIY-UHFFFAOYSA-N ethyl 5-amino-1-(4-sulfamoylphenyl)pyrazole-4-carboxylate Chemical compound NC1=C(C(=O)OCC)C=NN1C1=CC=C(S(N)(=O)=O)C=C1 MFGZXPGKKJMZIY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 32
- 239000000203 mixture Substances 0.000 description 30
- 238000007599 discharging Methods 0.000 description 29
- 229920001971 elastomer Polymers 0.000 description 29
- 229910052751 metal Inorganic materials 0.000 description 29
- 239000002184 metal Substances 0.000 description 29
- 239000000654 additive Substances 0.000 description 28
- 239000000178 monomer Substances 0.000 description 27
- 239000005060 rubber Substances 0.000 description 27
- 238000000576 coating method Methods 0.000 description 25
- 238000011161 development Methods 0.000 description 25
- 230000005291 magnetic effect Effects 0.000 description 25
- 239000006229 carbon black Substances 0.000 description 22
- 235000019241 carbon black Nutrition 0.000 description 22
- 239000011248 coating agent Substances 0.000 description 22
- 230000015572 biosynthetic process Effects 0.000 description 20
- 230000000996 additive effect Effects 0.000 description 19
- VYPSYNLAJGMNEJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Silicium dioxide Chemical compound O=[Si]=O VYPSYNLAJGMNEJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 18
- NIXOWILDQLNWCW-UHFFFAOYSA-M Acrylate Chemical compound [O-]C(=O)C=C NIXOWILDQLNWCW-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 17
- 150000007513 acids Chemical class 0.000 description 17
- 239000000049 pigment Substances 0.000 description 17
- LYCAIKOWRPUZTN-UHFFFAOYSA-N Ethylene glycol Chemical compound OCCO LYCAIKOWRPUZTN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 16
- YXFVVABEGXRONW-UHFFFAOYSA-N Toluene Chemical compound CC1=CC=CC=C1 YXFVVABEGXRONW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 15
- 230000005674 electromagnetic induction Effects 0.000 description 15
- 239000000835 fiber Substances 0.000 description 15
- 229910052731 fluorine Inorganic materials 0.000 description 15
- 229910010272 inorganic material Inorganic materials 0.000 description 15
- 239000011147 inorganic material Substances 0.000 description 15
- 230000001678 irradiating effect Effects 0.000 description 15
- 230000003287 optical effect Effects 0.000 description 15
- 230000003405 preventing effect Effects 0.000 description 15
- YCKRFDGAMUMZLT-UHFFFAOYSA-N Fluorine atom Chemical compound [F] YCKRFDGAMUMZLT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 14
- 239000004203 carnauba wax Substances 0.000 description 14
- 235000013869 carnauba wax Nutrition 0.000 description 14
- 239000011737 fluorine Substances 0.000 description 14
- LFQSCWFLJHTTHZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Ethanol Chemical compound CCO LFQSCWFLJHTTHZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 13
- 238000009826 distribution Methods 0.000 description 13
- OGIDPMRJRNCKJF-UHFFFAOYSA-N titanium oxide Inorganic materials [Ti]=O OGIDPMRJRNCKJF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 13
- XEEYBQQBJWHFJM-UHFFFAOYSA-N Iron Chemical compound [Fe] XEEYBQQBJWHFJM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 12
- GWEVSGVZZGPLCZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Titan oxide Chemical compound O=[Ti]=O GWEVSGVZZGPLCZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 12
- 229910052782 aluminium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 12
- XAGFODPZIPBFFR-UHFFFAOYSA-N aluminium Chemical compound [Al] XAGFODPZIPBFFR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 12
- 239000000843 powder Substances 0.000 description 12
- 239000011241 protective layer Substances 0.000 description 12
- 238000004898 kneading Methods 0.000 description 11
- 239000007788 liquid Substances 0.000 description 11
- 229920002050 silicone resin Polymers 0.000 description 11
- 229920002554 vinyl polymer Polymers 0.000 description 11
- KWYUFKZDYYNOTN-UHFFFAOYSA-M Potassium hydroxide Chemical compound [OH-].[K+] KWYUFKZDYYNOTN-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 10
- OFOBLEOULBTSOW-UHFFFAOYSA-N Propanedioic acid Natural products OC(=O)CC(O)=O OFOBLEOULBTSOW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 10
- 150000001412 amines Chemical class 0.000 description 10
- 239000011162 core material Substances 0.000 description 10
- RKISUIUJZGSLEV-UHFFFAOYSA-N n-[2-(octadecanoylamino)ethyl]octadecanamide Chemical compound CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC(=O)NCCNC(=O)CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC RKISUIUJZGSLEV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 10
- 229920000728 polyester Polymers 0.000 description 10
- 229920001228 polyisocyanate Polymers 0.000 description 10
- 239000005056 polyisocyanate Substances 0.000 description 10
- 239000000758 substrate Substances 0.000 description 10
- 125000000391 vinyl group Chemical group [H]C([*])=C([H])[H] 0.000 description 10
- 150000008064 anhydrides Chemical class 0.000 description 9
- 150000001875 compounds Chemical class 0.000 description 9
- 230000007423 decrease Effects 0.000 description 9
- 239000007787 solid Substances 0.000 description 9
- OKTJSMMVPCPJKN-UHFFFAOYSA-N Carbon Chemical compound [C] OKTJSMMVPCPJKN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 8
- VZCYOOQTPOCHFL-OWOJBTEDSA-N Fumaric acid Chemical compound OC(=O)\C=C\C(O)=O VZCYOOQTPOCHFL-OWOJBTEDSA-N 0.000 description 8
- PXHVJJICTQNCMI-UHFFFAOYSA-N Nickel Chemical compound [Ni] PXHVJJICTQNCMI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 8
- XLOMVQKBTHCTTD-UHFFFAOYSA-N Zinc monoxide Chemical compound [Zn]=O XLOMVQKBTHCTTD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 8
- ARCGXLSVLAOJQL-UHFFFAOYSA-N anhydrous trimellitic acid Natural products OC(=O)C1=CC=C(C(O)=O)C(C(O)=O)=C1 ARCGXLSVLAOJQL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 8
- WERYXYBDKMZEQL-UHFFFAOYSA-N butane-1,4-diol Chemical compound OCCCCO WERYXYBDKMZEQL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 8
- 150000002148 esters Chemical class 0.000 description 8
- 238000002156 mixing Methods 0.000 description 8
- 239000012188 paraffin wax Substances 0.000 description 8
- 229920005668 polycarbonate resin Polymers 0.000 description 8
- 239000004431 polycarbonate resin Substances 0.000 description 8
- 229920000642 polymer Polymers 0.000 description 8
- 150000003242 quaternary ammonium salts Chemical group 0.000 description 8
- 239000000377 silicon dioxide Substances 0.000 description 8
- 239000000243 solution Substances 0.000 description 8
- 239000002904 solvent Substances 0.000 description 8
- 125000006850 spacer group Chemical group 0.000 description 8
- 229920002725 thermoplastic elastomer Polymers 0.000 description 8
- VZCYOOQTPOCHFL-UHFFFAOYSA-N trans-butenedioic acid Natural products OC(=O)C=CC(O)=O VZCYOOQTPOCHFL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 8
- RTAQQCXQSZGOHL-UHFFFAOYSA-N Titanium Chemical compound [Ti] RTAQQCXQSZGOHL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 7
- NIXOWILDQLNWCW-UHFFFAOYSA-N acrylic acid group Chemical group C(C=C)(=O)O NIXOWILDQLNWCW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 7
- 230000008901 benefit Effects 0.000 description 7
- IISBACLAFKSPIT-UHFFFAOYSA-N bisphenol A Chemical class C=1C=C(O)C=CC=1C(C)(C)C1=CC=C(O)C=C1 IISBACLAFKSPIT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 7
- 239000007795 chemical reaction product Substances 0.000 description 7
- 239000003431 cross linking reagent Substances 0.000 description 7
- 150000004985 diamines Chemical class 0.000 description 7
- RTZKZFJDLAIYFH-UHFFFAOYSA-N ether Substances CCOCC RTZKZFJDLAIYFH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 7
- 150000002500 ions Chemical class 0.000 description 7
- FTQWRYSLUYAIRQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N n-[(octadecanoylamino)methyl]octadecanamide Chemical compound CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC(=O)NCNC(=O)CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC FTQWRYSLUYAIRQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 7
- 235000019809 paraffin wax Nutrition 0.000 description 7
- 235000019271 petrolatum Nutrition 0.000 description 7
- XNGIFLGASWRNHJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N phthalic acid Chemical class OC(=O)C1=CC=CC=C1C(O)=O XNGIFLGASWRNHJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 7
- 238000010298 pulverizing process Methods 0.000 description 7
- 238000004064 recycling Methods 0.000 description 7
- ZWEHNKRNPOVVGH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-Butanone Chemical compound CCC(C)=O ZWEHNKRNPOVVGH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- IJGRMHOSHXDMSA-UHFFFAOYSA-N Atomic nitrogen Chemical compound N#N IJGRMHOSHXDMSA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- 239000004129 EU approved improving agent Substances 0.000 description 6
- KKEYFWRCBNTPAC-UHFFFAOYSA-N Terephthalic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)C1=CC=C(C(O)=O)C=C1 KKEYFWRCBNTPAC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- 150000001252 acrylic acid derivatives Chemical class 0.000 description 6
- 125000003118 aryl group Chemical group 0.000 description 6
- 125000003178 carboxy group Chemical group [H]OC(*)=O 0.000 description 6
- 235000014113 dietary fatty acids Nutrition 0.000 description 6
- MTHSVFCYNBDYFN-UHFFFAOYSA-N diethylene glycol Chemical compound OCCOCCO MTHSVFCYNBDYFN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- 239000000194 fatty acid Substances 0.000 description 6
- 229930195729 fatty acid Natural products 0.000 description 6
- 150000004665 fatty acids Chemical class 0.000 description 6
- 229910052742 iron Inorganic materials 0.000 description 6
- VNWKTOKETHGBQD-UHFFFAOYSA-N methane Chemical compound C VNWKTOKETHGBQD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- 229920000098 polyolefin Polymers 0.000 description 6
- 229920001296 polysiloxane Polymers 0.000 description 6
- 239000011164 primary particle Substances 0.000 description 6
- 150000003839 salts Chemical class 0.000 description 6
- 229920002379 silicone rubber Polymers 0.000 description 6
- 229910001220 stainless steel Inorganic materials 0.000 description 6
- 238000003786 synthesis reaction Methods 0.000 description 6
- PUPZLCDOIYMWBV-UHFFFAOYSA-N (+/-)-1,3-Butanediol Chemical compound CC(O)CCO PUPZLCDOIYMWBV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- MFYSUUPKMDJYPF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-[(4-methyl-2-nitrophenyl)diazenyl]-3-oxo-n-phenylbutanamide Chemical compound C=1C=CC=CC=1NC(=O)C(C(=O)C)N=NC1=CC=C(C)C=C1[N+]([O-])=O MFYSUUPKMDJYPF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- CSCPPACGZOOCGX-UHFFFAOYSA-N Acetone Chemical compound CC(C)=O CSCPPACGZOOCGX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- PEDCQBHIVMGVHV-UHFFFAOYSA-N Glycerine Chemical compound OCC(O)CO PEDCQBHIVMGVHV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- 239000004698 Polyethylene Substances 0.000 description 5
- 239000004743 Polypropylene Substances 0.000 description 5
- 150000001298 alcohols Chemical class 0.000 description 5
- 239000000470 constituent Substances 0.000 description 5
- 230000003247 decreasing effect Effects 0.000 description 5
- 230000006866 deterioration Effects 0.000 description 5
- 239000006185 dispersion Substances 0.000 description 5
- 239000000975 dye Substances 0.000 description 5
- 239000013013 elastic material Substances 0.000 description 5
- 239000000696 magnetic material Substances 0.000 description 5
- 230000005415 magnetization Effects 0.000 description 5
- 239000003960 organic solvent Substances 0.000 description 5
- 230000035515 penetration Effects 0.000 description 5
- 229920000573 polyethylene Polymers 0.000 description 5
- 238000006116 polymerization reaction Methods 0.000 description 5
- 229920001155 polypropylene Polymers 0.000 description 5
- 238000002360 preparation method Methods 0.000 description 5
- 239000010935 stainless steel Substances 0.000 description 5
- 229920005992 thermoplastic resin Polymers 0.000 description 5
- SRPWOOOHEPICQU-UHFFFAOYSA-N trimellitic anhydride Chemical compound OC(=O)C1=CC=C2C(=O)OC(=O)C2=C1 SRPWOOOHEPICQU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- 238000004804 winding Methods 0.000 description 5
- MYRTYDVEIRVNKP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1,2-Divinylbenzene Chemical compound C=CC1=CC=CC=C1C=C MYRTYDVEIRVNKP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 229920000178 Acrylic resin Polymers 0.000 description 4
- 239000004925 Acrylic resin Substances 0.000 description 4
- 229910002012 Aerosil® Inorganic materials 0.000 description 4
- SOGAXMICEFXMKE-UHFFFAOYSA-N Butylmethacrylate Chemical compound CCCCOC(=O)C(C)=C SOGAXMICEFXMKE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- UQSXHKLRYXJYBZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Iron oxide Chemical compound [Fe]=O UQSXHKLRYXJYBZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- CERQOIWHTDAKMF-UHFFFAOYSA-N Methacrylic acid Chemical compound CC(=C)C(O)=O CERQOIWHTDAKMF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 239000002033 PVDF binder Substances 0.000 description 4
- 239000004793 Polystyrene Substances 0.000 description 4
- 239000006087 Silane Coupling Agent Substances 0.000 description 4
- 229920000122 acrylonitrile butadiene styrene Polymers 0.000 description 4
- WNLRTRBMVRJNCN-UHFFFAOYSA-N adipic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)CCCCC(O)=O WNLRTRBMVRJNCN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 125000001931 aliphatic group Chemical group 0.000 description 4
- 150000001413 amino acids Chemical class 0.000 description 4
- 229910021417 amorphous silicon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 4
- TZCXTZWJZNENPQ-UHFFFAOYSA-L barium sulfate Chemical compound [Ba+2].[O-]S([O-])(=O)=O TZCXTZWJZNENPQ-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 4
- 238000010009 beating Methods 0.000 description 4
- 238000006243 chemical reaction Methods 0.000 description 4
- HNEGQIOMVPPMNR-IHWYPQMZSA-N citraconic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)C(/C)=C\C(O)=O HNEGQIOMVPPMNR-IHWYPQMZSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 229940018557 citraconic acid Drugs 0.000 description 4
- 239000007822 coupling agent Substances 0.000 description 4
- 230000000694 effects Effects 0.000 description 4
- 239000003792 electrolyte Substances 0.000 description 4
- 239000003822 epoxy resin Substances 0.000 description 4
- 239000011888 foil Substances 0.000 description 4
- 239000001530 fumaric acid Substances 0.000 description 4
- 238000005227 gel permeation chromatography Methods 0.000 description 4
- LNEPOXFFQSENCJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N haloperidol Chemical compound C1CC(O)(C=2C=CC(Cl)=CC=2)CCN1CCCC(=O)C1=CC=C(F)C=C1 LNEPOXFFQSENCJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 230000020169 heat generation Effects 0.000 description 4
- 125000002887 hydroxy group Chemical group [H]O* 0.000 description 4
- 230000006698 induction Effects 0.000 description 4
- QQVIHTHCMHWDBS-UHFFFAOYSA-N isophthalic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)C1=CC=CC(C(O)=O)=C1 QQVIHTHCMHWDBS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- VZCYOOQTPOCHFL-UPHRSURJSA-N maleic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)\C=C/C(O)=O VZCYOOQTPOCHFL-UPHRSURJSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 239000011976 maleic acid Substances 0.000 description 4
- 238000005259 measurement Methods 0.000 description 4
- 239000000155 melt Substances 0.000 description 4
- 150000002739 metals Chemical class 0.000 description 4
- 229910052759 nickel Inorganic materials 0.000 description 4
- 229920003229 poly(methyl methacrylate) Polymers 0.000 description 4
- 229920006122 polyamide resin Polymers 0.000 description 4
- 229920002857 polybutadiene Polymers 0.000 description 4
- 229920000647 polyepoxide Polymers 0.000 description 4
- 229920002223 polystyrene Polymers 0.000 description 4
- 229920005749 polyurethane resin Polymers 0.000 description 4
- 239000004800 polyvinyl chloride Substances 0.000 description 4
- 229920000915 polyvinyl chloride Polymers 0.000 description 4
- 229920002981 polyvinylidene fluoride Polymers 0.000 description 4
- YGSDEFSMJLZEOE-UHFFFAOYSA-N salicylic acid Chemical class OC(=O)C1=CC=CC=C1O YGSDEFSMJLZEOE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- CXMXRPHRNRROMY-UHFFFAOYSA-N sebacic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)CCCCCCCCC(O)=O CXMXRPHRNRROMY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 229920005792 styrene-acrylic resin Polymers 0.000 description 4
- 150000005846 sugar alcohols Polymers 0.000 description 4
- XOLBLPGZBRYERU-UHFFFAOYSA-N tin dioxide Chemical compound O=[Sn]=O XOLBLPGZBRYERU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 229910001887 tin oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 4
- 239000011787 zinc oxide Substances 0.000 description 4
- 229910000859 α-Fe Inorganic materials 0.000 description 4
- XDOFQFKRPWOURC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 16-methylheptadecanoic acid Chemical compound CC(C)CCCCCCCCCCCCCCC(O)=O XDOFQFKRPWOURC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- RYGMFSIKBFXOCR-UHFFFAOYSA-N Copper Chemical compound [Cu] RYGMFSIKBFXOCR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 229920000459 Nitrile rubber Polymers 0.000 description 3
- CTQNGGLPUBDAKN-UHFFFAOYSA-N O-Xylene Chemical compound CC1=CC=CC=C1C CTQNGGLPUBDAKN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- DNIAPMSPPWPWGF-UHFFFAOYSA-N Propylene glycol Chemical compound CC(O)CO DNIAPMSPPWPWGF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 238000005299 abrasion Methods 0.000 description 3
- XECAHXYUAAWDEL-UHFFFAOYSA-N acrylonitrile butadiene styrene Chemical compound C=CC=C.C=CC#N.C=CC1=CC=CC=C1 XECAHXYUAAWDEL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 239000004676 acrylonitrile butadiene styrene Substances 0.000 description 3
- 125000000217 alkyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 3
- 150000001414 amino alcohols Chemical class 0.000 description 3
- 125000003277 amino group Chemical group 0.000 description 3
- CQEYYJKEWSMYFG-UHFFFAOYSA-N butyl acrylate Chemical compound CCCCOC(=O)C=C CQEYYJKEWSMYFG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 229910052799 carbon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- 230000008859 change Effects 0.000 description 3
- 229940018560 citraconate Drugs 0.000 description 3
- 230000000052 comparative effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 239000010949 copper Substances 0.000 description 3
- 229910052802 copper Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- 239000012792 core layer Substances 0.000 description 3
- 239000013078 crystal Substances 0.000 description 3
- 238000001938 differential scanning calorimetry curve Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000006870 function Effects 0.000 description 3
- 239000011521 glass Substances 0.000 description 3
- XXMIOPMDWAUFGU-UHFFFAOYSA-N hexane-1,6-diol Chemical compound OCCCCCCO XXMIOPMDWAUFGU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- SZVJSHCCFOBDDC-UHFFFAOYSA-N iron(II,III) oxide Inorganic materials O=[Fe]O[Fe]O[Fe]=O SZVJSHCCFOBDDC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- JEIPFZHSYJVQDO-UHFFFAOYSA-N iron(III) oxide Inorganic materials O=[Fe]O[Fe]=O JEIPFZHSYJVQDO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- IQPQWNKOIGAROB-UHFFFAOYSA-N isocyanate group Chemical group [N-]=C=O IQPQWNKOIGAROB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 150000002576 ketones Chemical class 0.000 description 3
- CPLXHLVBOLITMK-UHFFFAOYSA-N magnesium oxide Inorganic materials [Mg]=O CPLXHLVBOLITMK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 229910044991 metal oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- 150000004706 metal oxides Chemical class 0.000 description 3
- 125000005395 methacrylic acid group Chemical group 0.000 description 3
- 229910052757 nitrogen Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- QIQXTHQIDYTFRH-UHFFFAOYSA-N octadecanoic acid Chemical compound CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC(O)=O QIQXTHQIDYTFRH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- TWNQGVIAIRXVLR-UHFFFAOYSA-N oxo(oxoalumanyloxy)alumane Chemical compound O=[Al]O[Al]=O TWNQGVIAIRXVLR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 229920000768 polyamine Polymers 0.000 description 3
- 229920013716 polyethylene resin Polymers 0.000 description 3
- 239000004926 polymethyl methacrylate Substances 0.000 description 3
- 229920006324 polyoxymethylene Polymers 0.000 description 3
- 229920005990 polystyrene resin Polymers 0.000 description 3
- 229920001343 polytetrafluoroethylene Polymers 0.000 description 3
- 239000004810 polytetrafluoroethylene Substances 0.000 description 3
- 230000002265 prevention Effects 0.000 description 3
- 150000004756 silanes Chemical class 0.000 description 3
- BFKJFAAPBSQJPD-UHFFFAOYSA-N tetrafluoroethene Chemical group FC(F)=C(F)F BFKJFAAPBSQJPD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 229910052716 thallium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- BKVIYDNLLOSFOA-UHFFFAOYSA-N thallium Chemical compound [Tl] BKVIYDNLLOSFOA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- RSPCKAHMRANGJZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N thiohydroxylamine Chemical class SN RSPCKAHMRANGJZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 238000004448 titration Methods 0.000 description 3
- 239000008096 xylene Substances 0.000 description 3
- ARXKVVRQIIOZGF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1,2,4-butanetriol Chemical compound OCCC(O)CO ARXKVVRQIIOZGF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- OSNILPMOSNGHLC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1-[4-methoxy-3-(piperidin-1-ylmethyl)phenyl]ethanone Chemical compound COC1=CC=C(C(C)=O)C=C1CN1CCCCC1 OSNILPMOSNGHLC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- KTZVZZJJVJQZHV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1-chloro-4-ethenylbenzene Chemical compound ClC1=CC=C(C=C)C=C1 KTZVZZJJVJQZHV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- UAJRSHJHFRVGMG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1-ethenyl-4-methoxybenzene Chemical compound COC1=CC=C(C=C)C=C1 UAJRSHJHFRVGMG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- JAHNSTQSQJOJLO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-(3-fluorophenyl)-1h-imidazole Chemical compound FC1=CC=CC(C=2NC=CN=2)=C1 JAHNSTQSQJOJLO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- HZAXFHJVJLSVMW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-Aminoethan-1-ol Chemical compound NCCO HZAXFHJVJLSVMW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- ZGHFDIIVVIFNPS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3-Methyl-3-buten-2-one Chemical compound CC(=C)C(C)=O ZGHFDIIVVIFNPS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- SYIDJAUAPDQFRN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 4-[(2,5-dichlorophenyl)diazenyl]-5-methyl-2-phenyl-4h-pyrazol-3-one Chemical compound CC1=NN(C=2C=CC=CC=2)C(=O)C1N=NC1=CC(Cl)=CC=C1Cl SYIDJAUAPDQFRN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- ZOXJGFHDIHLPTG-UHFFFAOYSA-N Boron Chemical compound [B] ZOXJGFHDIHLPTG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229910001369 Brass Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- KAKZBPTYRLMSJV-UHFFFAOYSA-N Butadiene Chemical compound C=CC=C KAKZBPTYRLMSJV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229920002943 EPDM rubber Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 239000004593 Epoxy Substances 0.000 description 2
- JIGUQPWFLRLWPJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Ethyl acrylate Chemical compound CCOC(=O)C=C JIGUQPWFLRLWPJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- IAYPIBMASNFSPL-UHFFFAOYSA-N Ethylene oxide Chemical compound C1CO1 IAYPIBMASNFSPL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- QIGBRXMKCJKVMJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Hydroquinone Chemical compound OC1=CC=C(O)C=C1 QIGBRXMKCJKVMJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- RRHGJUQNOFWUDK-UHFFFAOYSA-N Isoprene Chemical compound CC(=C)C=C RRHGJUQNOFWUDK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- FYYHWMGAXLPEAU-UHFFFAOYSA-N Magnesium Chemical compound [Mg] FYYHWMGAXLPEAU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- BAPJBEWLBFYGME-UHFFFAOYSA-N Methyl acrylate Chemical compound COC(=O)C=C BAPJBEWLBFYGME-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- NTIZESTWPVYFNL-UHFFFAOYSA-N Methyl isobutyl ketone Chemical compound CC(C)CC(C)=O NTIZESTWPVYFNL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- UIHCLUNTQKBZGK-UHFFFAOYSA-N Methyl isobutyl ketone Natural products CCC(C)C(C)=O UIHCLUNTQKBZGK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- ALQSHHUCVQOPAS-UHFFFAOYSA-N Pentane-1,5-diol Chemical compound OCCCCCO ALQSHHUCVQOPAS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229930182556 Polyacetal Natural products 0.000 description 2
- GOOHAUXETOMSMM-UHFFFAOYSA-N Propylene oxide Chemical compound CC1CO1 GOOHAUXETOMSMM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- NRCMAYZCPIVABH-UHFFFAOYSA-N Quinacridone Chemical compound N1C2=CC=CC=C2C(=O)C2=C1C=C1C(=O)C3=CC=CC=C3NC1=C2 NRCMAYZCPIVABH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- KDYFGRWQOYBRFD-UHFFFAOYSA-N Succinic acid Natural products OC(=O)CCC(O)=O KDYFGRWQOYBRFD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- WGLPBDUCMAPZCE-UHFFFAOYSA-N Trioxochromium Chemical compound O=[Cr](=O)=O WGLPBDUCMAPZCE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- XSQUKJJJFZCRTK-UHFFFAOYSA-N Urea Chemical compound NC(N)=O XSQUKJJJFZCRTK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229920006311 Urethane elastomer Polymers 0.000 description 2
- BZHJMEDXRYGGRV-UHFFFAOYSA-N Vinyl chloride Chemical compound ClC=C BZHJMEDXRYGGRV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 235000010724 Wisteria floribunda Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- 150000008065 acid anhydrides Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 239000001361 adipic acid Substances 0.000 description 2
- 235000011037 adipic acid Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- 238000013019 agitation Methods 0.000 description 2
- 125000002723 alicyclic group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- 150000007933 aliphatic carboxylic acids Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- PNEYBMLMFCGWSK-UHFFFAOYSA-N aluminium oxide Inorganic materials [O-2].[O-2].[O-2].[Al+3].[Al+3] PNEYBMLMFCGWSK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- CEGOLXSVJUTHNZ-UHFFFAOYSA-K aluminium tristearate Chemical compound [Al+3].CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O.CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O.CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O CEGOLXSVJUTHNZ-UHFFFAOYSA-K 0.000 description 2
- 229940063655 aluminum stearate Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 229910000410 antimony oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- ADCOVFLJGNWWNZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N antimony trioxide Chemical compound O=[Sb]O[Sb]=O ADCOVFLJGNWWNZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229910052796 boron Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 239000010951 brass Substances 0.000 description 2
- 235000019437 butane-1,3-diol Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- KDYFGRWQOYBRFD-NUQCWPJISA-N butanedioic acid Chemical compound O[14C](=O)CC[14C](O)=O KDYFGRWQOYBRFD-NUQCWPJISA-N 0.000 description 2
- CJZGTCYPCWQAJB-UHFFFAOYSA-L calcium stearate Chemical compound [Ca+2].CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O.CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O CJZGTCYPCWQAJB-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 2
- 235000013539 calcium stearate Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- 239000008116 calcium stearate Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000004202 carbamide Substances 0.000 description 2
- 125000004432 carbon atom Chemical group C* 0.000 description 2
- 125000002915 carbonyl group Chemical group [*:2]C([*:1])=O 0.000 description 2
- 239000000969 carrier Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000003054 catalyst Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000005229 chemical vapour deposition Methods 0.000 description 2
- 229910000423 chromium oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 229910017052 cobalt Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 239000010941 cobalt Substances 0.000 description 2
- GUTLYIVDDKVIGB-UHFFFAOYSA-N cobalt atom Chemical compound [Co] GUTLYIVDDKVIGB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 238000011109 contamination Methods 0.000 description 2
- 150000004696 coordination complex Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- TVZPLCNGKSPOJA-UHFFFAOYSA-N copper zinc Chemical compound [Cu].[Zn] TVZPLCNGKSPOJA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- XCJYREBRNVKWGJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N copper(II) phthalocyanine Chemical compound [Cu+2].C12=CC=CC=C2C(N=C2[N-]C(C3=CC=CC=C32)=N2)=NC1=NC([C]1C=CC=CC1=1)=NC=1N=C1[C]3C=CC=CC3=C2[N-]1 XCJYREBRNVKWGJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- LSXWFXONGKSEMY-UHFFFAOYSA-N di-tert-butyl peroxide Chemical compound CC(C)(C)OOC(C)(C)C LSXWFXONGKSEMY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 125000004386 diacrylate group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- 150000001991 dicarboxylic acids Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 229910001873 dinitrogen Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 239000002270 dispersing agent Substances 0.000 description 2
- ILRSCQWREDREME-UHFFFAOYSA-N dodecanamide Chemical compound CCCCCCCCCCCC(N)=O ILRSCQWREDREME-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 238000001035 drying Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000000806 elastomer Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000005684 electric field Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000010556 emulsion polymerization method Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000032050 esterification Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000005886 esterification reaction Methods 0.000 description 2
- FJKIXWOMBXYWOQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N ethenoxyethane Chemical compound CCOC=C FJKIXWOMBXYWOQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229920000840 ethylene tetrafluoroethylene copolymer Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 238000011156 evaluation Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000004744 fabric Substances 0.000 description 2
- 125000001153 fluoro group Chemical group F* 0.000 description 2
- 125000003709 fluoroalkyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- NKHAVTQWNUWKEO-UHFFFAOYSA-N fumaric acid monomethyl ester Natural products COC(=O)C=CC(O)=O NKHAVTQWNUWKEO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 235000011187 glycerol Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- 229910052736 halogen Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 150000002367 halogens Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- HSEMFIZWXHQJAE-UHFFFAOYSA-N hexadecanamide Chemical compound CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC(N)=O HSEMFIZWXHQJAE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- GWCHPNKHMFKKIQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N hexane-1,2,5-tricarboxylic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)C(C)CCC(C(O)=O)CC(O)=O GWCHPNKHMFKKIQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- NAQMVNRVTILPCV-UHFFFAOYSA-N hexane-1,6-diamine Chemical compound NCCCCCCN NAQMVNRVTILPCV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229930195733 hydrocarbon Natural products 0.000 description 2
- 150000002430 hydrocarbons Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- WGCNASOHLSPBMP-UHFFFAOYSA-N hydroxyacetaldehyde Natural products OCC=O WGCNASOHLSPBMP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- UHOKSCJSTAHBSO-UHFFFAOYSA-N indanthrone blue Chemical compound C1=CC=C2C(=O)C3=CC=C4NC5=C6C(=O)C7=CC=CC=C7C(=O)C6=CC=C5NC4=C3C(=O)C2=C1 UHOKSCJSTAHBSO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 239000001023 inorganic pigment Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000012212 insulator Substances 0.000 description 2
- 235000010187 litholrubine BK Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- 229910052749 magnesium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 239000011777 magnesium Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000000395 magnesium oxide Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229940063002 magnesium palmitate Drugs 0.000 description 2
- HQKMJHAJHXVSDF-UHFFFAOYSA-L magnesium stearate Chemical compound [Mg+2].CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O.CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O HQKMJHAJHXVSDF-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 2
- ABSWXCXMXIZDSN-UHFFFAOYSA-L magnesium;hexadecanoate Chemical compound [Mg+2].CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O.CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O ABSWXCXMXIZDSN-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 2
- 239000011572 manganese Substances 0.000 description 2
- HNEGQIOMVPPMNR-NSCUHMNNSA-N mesaconic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)C(/C)=C/C(O)=O HNEGQIOMVPPMNR-NSCUHMNNSA-N 0.000 description 2
- NUKZAGXMHTUAFE-UHFFFAOYSA-N methyl hexanoate Chemical compound CCCCCC(=O)OC NUKZAGXMHTUAFE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- LVHBHZANLOWSRM-UHFFFAOYSA-N methylenebutanedioic acid Natural products OC(=O)CC(=C)C(O)=O LVHBHZANLOWSRM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- HNEGQIOMVPPMNR-UHFFFAOYSA-N methylfumaric acid Natural products OC(=O)C(C)=CC(O)=O HNEGQIOMVPPMNR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 238000000465 moulding Methods 0.000 description 2
- KYMPOPAPQCIHEG-UHFFFAOYSA-N n-[2-(decanoylamino)ethyl]decanamide Chemical compound CCCCCCCCCC(=O)NCCNC(=O)CCCCCCCCC KYMPOPAPQCIHEG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- DJWFNQUDPJTSAD-UHFFFAOYSA-N n-octadecyloctadecanamide Chemical compound CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCNC(=O)CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC DJWFNQUDPJTSAD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- WRYWBRATLBWSSG-UHFFFAOYSA-N naphthalene-1,2,4-tricarboxylic acid Chemical compound C1=CC=CC2=C(C(O)=O)C(C(=O)O)=CC(C(O)=O)=C21 WRYWBRATLBWSSG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- SLCVBVWXLSEKPL-UHFFFAOYSA-N neopentyl glycol Chemical compound OCC(C)(C)CO SLCVBVWXLSEKPL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229940117969 neopentyl glycol Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 238000006386 neutralization reaction Methods 0.000 description 2
- BDJRBEYXGGNYIS-UHFFFAOYSA-N nonanedioic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)CCCCCCCC(O)=O BDJRBEYXGGNYIS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229920001778 nylon Polymers 0.000 description 2
- LYRFLYHAGKPMFH-UHFFFAOYSA-N octadecanamide Chemical compound CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC(N)=O LYRFLYHAGKPMFH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- WDAISVDZHKFVQP-UHFFFAOYSA-N octane-1,2,7,8-tetracarboxylic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)CC(C(O)=O)CCCCC(C(O)=O)CC(O)=O WDAISVDZHKFVQP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229940049964 oleate Drugs 0.000 description 2
- ZQPPMHVWECSIRJ-KTKRTIGZSA-N oleic acid Chemical compound CCCCCCCC\C=C/CCCCCCCC(O)=O ZQPPMHVWECSIRJ-KTKRTIGZSA-N 0.000 description 2
- VTRUBDSFZJNXHI-UHFFFAOYSA-N oxoantimony Chemical compound [Sb]=O VTRUBDSFZJNXHI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- FJKROLUGYXJWQN-UHFFFAOYSA-N papa-hydroxy-benzoic acid Natural products OC(=O)C1=CC=C(O)C=C1 FJKROLUGYXJWQN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 238000005453 pelletization Methods 0.000 description 2
- 229940059574 pentaerithrityl Drugs 0.000 description 2
- WXZMFSXDPGVJKK-UHFFFAOYSA-N pentaerythritol Chemical compound OCC(CO)(CO)CO WXZMFSXDPGVJKK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- PNJWIWWMYCMZRO-UHFFFAOYSA-N pent‐4‐en‐2‐one Natural products CC(=O)CC=C PNJWIWWMYCMZRO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 239000003208 petroleum Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229920001568 phenolic resin Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 239000005011 phenolic resin Substances 0.000 description 2
- IEQIEDJGQAUEQZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N phthalocyanine Chemical compound N1C(N=C2C3=CC=CC=C3C(N=C3C4=CC=CC=C4C(=N4)N3)=N2)=C(C=CC=C2)C2=C1N=C1C2=CC=CC=C2C4=N1 IEQIEDJGQAUEQZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 238000005268 plasma chemical vapour deposition Methods 0.000 description 2
- 229920001084 poly(chloroprene) Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 229920002037 poly(vinyl butyral) polymer Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 238000006068 polycondensation reaction Methods 0.000 description 2
- 229920001223 polyethylene glycol Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 229920001721 polyimide Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 229920005862 polyol Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 150000003077 polyols Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 229920002635 polyurethane Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 239000004814 polyurethane Substances 0.000 description 2
- YPFDHNVEDLHUCE-UHFFFAOYSA-N propane-1,3-diol Chemical compound OCCCO YPFDHNVEDLHUCE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- KIDHWZJUCRJVML-UHFFFAOYSA-N putrescine Chemical compound NCCCCN KIDHWZJUCRJVML-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- CYIDZMCFTVVTJO-UHFFFAOYSA-N pyromellitic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)C1=CC(C(O)=O)=C(C(O)=O)C=C1C(O)=O CYIDZMCFTVVTJO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 230000002829 reductive effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000001105 regulatory effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- PYWVYCXTNDRMGF-UHFFFAOYSA-N rhodamine B Chemical compound [Cl-].C=12C=CC(=[N+](CC)CC)C=C2OC2=CC(N(CC)CC)=CC=C2C=1C1=CC=CC=C1C(O)=O PYWVYCXTNDRMGF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229960004889 salicylic acid Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 238000000926 separation method Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000010008 shearing Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000002210 silicon-based material Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000006884 silylation reaction Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000005507 spraying Methods 0.000 description 2
- 229920003048 styrene butadiene rubber Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 150000003440 styrenes Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- TYFQFVWCELRYAO-UHFFFAOYSA-N suberic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)CCCCCCC(O)=O TYFQFVWCELRYAO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 239000000126 substance Substances 0.000 description 2
- 150000003505 terpenes Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 235000007586 terpenes Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- CIHOLLKRGTVIJN-UHFFFAOYSA-N tert‐butyl hydroperoxide Chemical compound CC(C)(C)OO CIHOLLKRGTVIJN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- JOUDBUYBGJYFFP-FOCLMDBBSA-N thioindigo Chemical compound S\1C2=CC=CC=C2C(=O)C/1=C1/C(=O)C2=CC=CC=C2S1 JOUDBUYBGJYFFP-FOCLMDBBSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 239000010936 titanium Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229910052719 titanium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- ZIBGPFATKBEMQZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N triethylene glycol Chemical compound OCCOCCOCCO ZIBGPFATKBEMQZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- QXJQHYBHAIHNGG-UHFFFAOYSA-N trimethylolethane Chemical compound OCC(C)(CO)CO QXJQHYBHAIHNGG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- AAAQKTZKLRYKHR-UHFFFAOYSA-N triphenylmethane Chemical compound C1=CC=CC=C1C(C=1C=CC=CC=1)C1=CC=CC=C1 AAAQKTZKLRYKHR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- UGCDBQWJXSAYIL-UHFFFAOYSA-N vat blue 6 Chemical compound O=C1C2=CC=CC=C2C(=O)C(C=C2Cl)=C1C1=C2NC2=C(C(=O)C=3C(=CC=CC=3)C3=O)C3=CC(Cl)=C2N1 UGCDBQWJXSAYIL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- XLYOFNOQVPJJNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N water Substances O XLYOFNOQVPJJNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- XOOUIPVCVHRTMJ-UHFFFAOYSA-L zinc stearate Chemical compound [Zn+2].CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O.CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O XOOUIPVCVHRTMJ-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 2
- FGWLXBPNONTBPX-UHFFFAOYSA-N (2-methylpropan-2-yl)oxy dodecaneperoxoate Chemical compound CCCCCCCCCCCC(=O)OOOC(C)(C)C FGWLXBPNONTBPX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- KDGNCLDCOVTOCS-UHFFFAOYSA-N (2-methylpropan-2-yl)oxy propan-2-yl carbonate Chemical compound CC(C)OC(=O)OOC(C)(C)C KDGNCLDCOVTOCS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- NDDLLTAIKYHPOD-ISLYRVAYSA-N (2e)-6-chloro-2-(6-chloro-4-methyl-3-oxo-1-benzothiophen-2-ylidene)-4-methyl-1-benzothiophen-3-one Chemical compound S/1C2=CC(Cl)=CC(C)=C2C(=O)C\1=C1/SC(C=C(Cl)C=C2C)=C2C1=O NDDLLTAIKYHPOD-ISLYRVAYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- KAKVFSYQVNHFBS-UHFFFAOYSA-N (5-hydroxycyclopenten-1-yl)-phenylmethanone Chemical compound OC1CCC=C1C(=O)C1=CC=CC=C1 KAKVFSYQVNHFBS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- QBZIEGUIYWGBMY-FUZXWUMZSA-N (5Z)-5-hydroxyimino-6-oxonaphthalene-2-sulfonic acid iron Chemical compound [Fe].O\N=C1/C(=O)C=Cc2cc(ccc12)S(O)(=O)=O.O\N=C1/C(=O)C=Cc2cc(ccc12)S(O)(=O)=O.O\N=C1/C(=O)C=Cc2cc(ccc12)S(O)(=O)=O QBZIEGUIYWGBMY-FUZXWUMZSA-N 0.000 description 1
- CPUBMKFFRRFXIP-YPAXQUSRSA-N (9z,33z)-dotetraconta-9,33-dienediamide Chemical compound NC(=O)CCCCCCC\C=C/CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC\C=C/CCCCCCCC(N)=O CPUBMKFFRRFXIP-YPAXQUSRSA-N 0.000 description 1
- DNIAPMSPPWPWGF-GSVOUGTGSA-N (R)-(-)-Propylene glycol Chemical compound C[C@@H](O)CO DNIAPMSPPWPWGF-GSVOUGTGSA-N 0.000 description 1
- WBYWAXJHAXSJNI-VOTSOKGWSA-M .beta-Phenylacrylic acid Natural products [O-]C(=O)\C=C\C1=CC=CC=C1 WBYWAXJHAXSJNI-VOTSOKGWSA-M 0.000 description 1
- BQCIDUSAKPWEOX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1,1-Difluoroethene Chemical compound FC(F)=C BQCIDUSAKPWEOX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- QLLUAUADIMPKIH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1,2-bis(ethenyl)naphthalene Chemical compound C1=CC=CC2=C(C=C)C(C=C)=CC=C21 QLLUAUADIMPKIH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- BJQFWAQRPATHTR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1,2-dichloro-4-ethenylbenzene Chemical compound ClC1=CC=C(C=C)C=C1Cl BJQFWAQRPATHTR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- VZXTWGWHSMCWGA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1,3,5-triazine-2,4-diamine Chemical compound NC1=NC=NC(N)=N1 VZXTWGWHSMCWGA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- DMBUODUULYCPAK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1,3-bis(docosanoyloxy)propan-2-yl docosanoate Chemical compound CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC(=O)OCC(OC(=O)CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC)COC(=O)CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC DMBUODUULYCPAK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229940058015 1,3-butylene glycol Drugs 0.000 description 1
- AOZVWUCYHOWWPH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1,3-dioctadecylurea Chemical compound CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCNC(=O)NCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC AOZVWUCYHOWWPH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- RYHBNJHYFVUHQT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1,4-Dioxane Chemical compound C1COCCO1 RYHBNJHYFVUHQT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- OVBFMUAFNIIQAL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1,4-diisocyanatobutane Chemical compound O=C=NCCCCN=C=O OVBFMUAFNIIQAL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- VONLGCPCDIYHIE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1-(3-methylbutylperoxy)ethyl hexanoate Chemical compound CCCCCC(=O)OC(C)OOCCC(C)C VONLGCPCDIYHIE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- KPAPHODVWOVUJL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1-benzofuran;1h-indene Chemical compound C1=CC=C2CC=CC2=C1.C1=CC=C2OC=CC2=C1 KPAPHODVWOVUJL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- DJQAMASGWPHRSZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1-butyl-3-octadecylurea Chemical compound CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCNC(=O)NCCCC DJQAMASGWPHRSZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- CDDDRVNOHLVEED-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1-cyclohexyl-3-[1-[[1-(cyclohexylcarbamoylamino)cyclohexyl]diazenyl]cyclohexyl]urea Chemical compound C1CCCCC1(N=NC1(CCCCC1)NC(=O)NC1CCCCC1)NC(=O)NC1CCCCC1 CDDDRVNOHLVEED-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- DMADTXMQLFQQII-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1-decyl-4-ethenylbenzene Chemical compound CCCCCCCCCCC1=CC=C(C=C)C=C1 DMADTXMQLFQQII-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- WJNKJKGZKFOLOJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1-dodecyl-4-ethenylbenzene Chemical compound CCCCCCCCCCCCC1=CC=C(C=C)C=C1 WJNKJKGZKFOLOJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- OZCMOJQQLBXBKI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1-ethenoxy-2-methylpropane Chemical compound CC(C)COC=C OZCMOJQQLBXBKI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- OEVVKKAVYQFQNV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1-ethenyl-2,4-dimethylbenzene Chemical compound CC1=CC=C(C=C)C(C)=C1 OEVVKKAVYQFQNV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- NVZWEEGUWXZOKI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1-ethenyl-2-methylbenzene Chemical compound CC1=CC=CC=C1C=C NVZWEEGUWXZOKI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- VKVLTUQLNXVANB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1-ethenyl-2-nitrobenzene Chemical compound [O-][N+](=O)C1=CC=CC=C1C=C VKVLTUQLNXVANB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- JZHGRUMIRATHIU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1-ethenyl-3-methylbenzene Chemical compound CC1=CC=CC(C=C)=C1 JZHGRUMIRATHIU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- SYZVQXIUVGKCBJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1-ethenyl-3-nitrobenzene Chemical compound [O-][N+](=O)C1=CC=CC(C=C)=C1 SYZVQXIUVGKCBJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- WHFHDVDXYKOSKI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1-ethenyl-4-ethylbenzene Chemical compound CCC1=CC=C(C=C)C=C1 WHFHDVDXYKOSKI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- LCNAQVGAHQVWIN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1-ethenyl-4-hexylbenzene Chemical compound CCCCCCC1=CC=C(C=C)C=C1 LCNAQVGAHQVWIN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- YFZHODLXYNDBSM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1-ethenyl-4-nitrobenzene Chemical compound [O-][N+](=O)C1=CC=C(C=C)C=C1 YFZHODLXYNDBSM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- LUWBJDCKJAZYKZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1-ethenyl-4-nonylbenzene Chemical compound CCCCCCCCCC1=CC=C(C=C)C=C1 LUWBJDCKJAZYKZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- HLRQDIVVLOCZPH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1-ethenyl-4-octylbenzene Chemical compound CCCCCCCCC1=CC=C(C=C)C=C1 HLRQDIVVLOCZPH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- RCSKFKICHQAKEZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1-ethenylindole Chemical compound C1=CC=C2N(C=C)C=CC2=C1 RCSKFKICHQAKEZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- CTXUTPWZJZHRJC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1-ethenylpyrrole Chemical compound C=CN1C=CC=C1 CTXUTPWZJZHRJC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- QZYOLNVEVYIPHV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1-methyl-3-(3-methylphenyl)peroxybenzene Chemical compound CC1=CC=CC(OOC=2C=C(C)C=CC=2)=C1 QZYOLNVEVYIPHV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- RTBFRGCFXZNCOE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1-methylsulfonylpiperidin-4-one Chemical compound CS(=O)(=O)N1CCC(=O)CC1 RTBFRGCFXZNCOE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- LIOYMLBYICWSGH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1-n,3-n-dioctadecylbenzene-1,3-dicarboxamide Chemical compound CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCNC(=O)C1=CC=CC(C(=O)NCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC)=C1 LIOYMLBYICWSGH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- CNABGUCENSPUMG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1-n,4-n-dioctadecylbenzene-1,4-dicarboxamide Chemical compound CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCNC(=O)C1=CC=C(C(=O)NCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC)C=C1 CNABGUCENSPUMG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- GMYXSVHKLQQCEH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1-octadecyl-3-propylurea Chemical compound CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCNC(=O)NCCC GMYXSVHKLQQCEH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- QEDJMOONZLUIMC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1-tert-butyl-4-ethenylbenzene Chemical compound CC(C)(C)C1=CC=C(C=C)C=C1 QEDJMOONZLUIMC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- IGGDKDTUCAWDAN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1-vinylnaphthalene Chemical compound C1=CC=C2C(C=C)=CC=CC2=C1 IGGDKDTUCAWDAN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000001644 13C nuclear magnetic resonance spectroscopy Methods 0.000 description 1
- PWQBMPPTYBJUJE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 18-octadecanoyloxyoctadecyl octadecanoate Chemical compound CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC(=O)OCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCOC(=O)CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC PWQBMPPTYBJUJE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- XHSVWKJCURCWFU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 19-[3-(19-amino-19-oxononadecyl)phenyl]nonadecanamide Chemical compound NC(=O)CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC1=CC=CC(CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC(N)=O)=C1 XHSVWKJCURCWFU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- VILCJCGEZXAXTO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2,2,2-tetramine Chemical compound NCCNCCNCCN VILCJCGEZXAXTO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- GZBSIABKXVPBFY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2,2-bis(hydroxymethyl)propane-1,3-diol;prop-2-enoic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)C=C.OC(=O)C=C.OC(=O)C=C.OC(=O)C=C.OCC(CO)(CO)CO GZBSIABKXVPBFY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- HQOVXPHOJANJBR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2,2-bis(tert-butylperoxy)butane Chemical compound CC(C)(C)OOC(C)(CC)OOC(C)(C)C HQOVXPHOJANJBR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- PCLXYPMMZJNFEE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2,2-dimethyloctadecanamide Chemical compound CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC(C)(C)C(N)=O PCLXYPMMZJNFEE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- PISLZQACAJMAIO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2,4-diethyl-6-methylbenzene-1,3-diamine Chemical compound CCC1=CC(C)=C(N)C(CC)=C1N PISLZQACAJMAIO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- YKTNISGZEGZHIS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-$l^{1}-oxidanyloxy-2-methylpropane Chemical group CC(C)(C)O[O] YKTNISGZEGZHIS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- AVTLBBWTUPQRAY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-(2-cyanobutan-2-yldiazenyl)-2-methylbutanenitrile Chemical compound CCC(C)(C#N)N=NC(C)(CC)C#N AVTLBBWTUPQRAY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- SMZOUWXMTYCWNB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-(2-methoxy-5-methylphenyl)ethanamine Chemical compound COC1=CC=C(C)C=C1CCN SMZOUWXMTYCWNB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- XMNIXWIUMCBBBL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-(2-phenylpropan-2-ylperoxy)propan-2-ylbenzene Chemical compound C=1C=CC=CC=1C(C)(C)OOC(C)(C)C1=CC=CC=C1 XMNIXWIUMCBBBL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- OEPOKWHJYJXUGD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-(3-phenylmethoxyphenyl)-1,3-thiazole-4-carbaldehyde Chemical compound O=CC1=CSC(C=2C=C(OCC=3C=CC=CC=3)C=CC=2)=N1 OEPOKWHJYJXUGD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- GDLCYFXQFNHNHY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-(4-ethenylphenyl)heptan-2-ol Chemical compound CCCCCC(C)(O)C1=CC=C(C=C)C=C1 GDLCYFXQFNHNHY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- JIECLXPVBFNBAE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-(4-ethenylphenyl)pentan-2-ol Chemical compound CCCC(C)(O)C1=CC=C(C=C)C=C1 JIECLXPVBFNBAE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- SJIXRGNQPBQWMK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-(diethylamino)ethyl 2-methylprop-2-enoate Chemical compound CCN(CC)CCOC(=O)C(C)=C SJIXRGNQPBQWMK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- NODRXLWVBKZXOO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-(hydroxymethyl)docosanamide Chemical compound CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC(CO)C(N)=O NODRXLWVBKZXOO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- RWLALWYNXFYRGW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-Ethyl-1,3-hexanediol Chemical compound CCCC(O)C(CC)CO RWLALWYNXFYRGW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- JFMYRCRXYIIGBB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-[(2,4-dichlorophenyl)diazenyl]-n-[4-[4-[[2-[(2,4-dichlorophenyl)diazenyl]-3-oxobutanoyl]amino]-3-methylphenyl]-2-methylphenyl]-3-oxobutanamide Chemical compound C=1C=C(C=2C=C(C)C(NC(=O)C(N=NC=3C(=CC(Cl)=CC=3)Cl)C(C)=O)=CC=2)C=C(C)C=1NC(=O)C(C(=O)C)N=NC1=CC=C(Cl)C=C1Cl JFMYRCRXYIIGBB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- WYGWHHGCAGTUCH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-[(2-cyano-4-methylpentan-2-yl)diazenyl]-2,4-dimethylpentanenitrile Chemical compound CC(C)CC(C)(C#N)N=NC(C)(C#N)CC(C)C WYGWHHGCAGTUCH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- QTSNFLIDNYOATQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-[(4-chloro-2-nitrophenyl)diazenyl]-n-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-oxobutanamide Chemical compound C=1C=CC=C(Cl)C=1NC(=O)C(C(=O)C)N=NC1=CC=C(Cl)C=C1[N+]([O-])=O QTSNFLIDNYOATQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- TXBCBTDQIULDIA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-[[3-hydroxy-2,2-bis(hydroxymethyl)propoxy]methyl]-2-(hydroxymethyl)propane-1,3-diol Chemical compound OCC(CO)(CO)COCC(CO)(CO)CO TXBCBTDQIULDIA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- PTJWCLYPVFJWMP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-[[3-hydroxy-2-[[3-hydroxy-2,2-bis(hydroxymethyl)propoxy]methyl]-2-(hydroxymethyl)propoxy]methyl]-2-(hydroxymethyl)propane-1,3-diol Chemical compound OCC(CO)(CO)COCC(CO)(CO)COCC(CO)(CO)CO PTJWCLYPVFJWMP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- MWGATWIBSKHFMR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-anilinoethanol Chemical compound OCCNC1=CC=CC=C1 MWGATWIBSKHFMR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- POAOYUHQDCAZBD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-butoxyethanol Chemical compound CCCCOCCO POAOYUHQDCAZBD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- WHBAYNMEIXUTJV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-chloroethyl prop-2-enoate Chemical compound ClCCOC(=O)C=C WHBAYNMEIXUTJV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- KRDXTHSSNCTAGY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-cyclohexylpyrrolidine Chemical compound C1CCNC1C1CCCCC1 KRDXTHSSNCTAGY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- ZNQVEEAIQZEUHB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-ethoxyethanol Chemical compound CCOCCO ZNQVEEAIQZEUHB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- VGZZAZYCLRYTNQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-ethoxyethoxycarbonyloxy 2-ethoxyethyl carbonate Chemical compound CCOCCOC(=O)OOC(=O)OCCOCC VGZZAZYCLRYTNQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- HSBSUGYTMJWPAX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-hexenedioic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)CCC=CC(O)=O HSBSUGYTMJWPAX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- MIRQGKQPLPBZQM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-hydroperoxy-2,4,4-trimethylpentane Chemical compound CC(C)(C)CC(C)(C)OO MIRQGKQPLPBZQM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- WFUGQJXVXHBTEM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-hydroperoxy-2-(2-hydroperoxybutan-2-ylperoxy)butane Chemical compound CCC(C)(OO)OOC(C)(CC)OO WFUGQJXVXHBTEM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000000954 2-hydroxyethyl group Chemical group [H]C([*])([H])C([H])([H])O[H] 0.000 description 1
- VHSHLMUCYSAUQU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-hydroxypropyl methacrylate Chemical compound CC(O)COC(=O)C(C)=C VHSHLMUCYSAUQU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- TVWBTVJBDFTVOW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-methyl-1-(2-methylpropylperoxy)propane Chemical compound CC(C)COOCC(C)C TVWBTVJBDFTVOW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- XYHGSPUTABMVOC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-methylbutane-1,2,4-triol Chemical compound OCC(O)(C)CCO XYHGSPUTABMVOC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- DNAXUCQVDOCWRS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-methylidenepropane-1,1,3-tricarboxylic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)CC(=C)C(C(O)=O)C(O)=O DNAXUCQVDOCWRS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- SZJXEIBPJWMWQR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-methylpropane-1,1,1-triol Chemical compound CC(C)C(O)(O)O SZJXEIBPJWMWQR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- RUMACXVDVNRZJZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-methylpropyl 2-methylprop-2-enoate Chemical compound CC(C)COC(=O)C(C)=C RUMACXVDVNRZJZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- CFVWNXQPGQOHRJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-methylpropyl prop-2-enoate Chemical compound CC(C)COC(=O)C=C CFVWNXQPGQOHRJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000003504 2-oxazolinyl group Chemical class O1C(=NCC1)* 0.000 description 1
- BIISIZOQPWZPPS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-tert-butylperoxypropan-2-ylbenzene Chemical compound CC(C)(C)OOC(C)(C)C1=CC=CC=C1 BIISIZOQPWZPPS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- KFGFVPMRLOQXNB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3,5,5-trimethylhexanoyl 3,5,5-trimethylhexaneperoxoate Chemical compound CC(C)(C)CC(C)CC(=O)OOC(=O)CC(C)CC(C)(C)C KFGFVPMRLOQXNB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- FRIBMENBGGCKPD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3-(2,3-dimethoxyphenyl)prop-2-enal Chemical compound COC1=CC=CC(C=CC=O)=C1OC FRIBMENBGGCKPD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- XYFRHHAYSXIKGH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3-(5-methoxy-2-methoxycarbonyl-1h-indol-3-yl)prop-2-enoic acid Chemical compound C1=C(OC)C=C2C(C=CC(O)=O)=C(C(=O)OC)NC2=C1 XYFRHHAYSXIKGH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- RNLHGQLZWXBQNY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3-(aminomethyl)-3,5,5-trimethylcyclohexan-1-amine Chemical compound CC1(C)CC(N)CC(C)(CN)C1 RNLHGQLZWXBQNY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- IYGAMTQMILRCCI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3-aminopropane-1-thiol Chemical compound NCCCS IYGAMTQMILRCCI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- YAXXOCZAXKLLCV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3-dodecyloxolane-2,5-dione Chemical class CCCCCCCCCCCCC1CC(=O)OC1=O YAXXOCZAXKLLCV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- VKTGGNKPUDNPQI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3-methoxy-1-(3-methoxy-3-methylbutyl)peroxy-3-methylbutane Chemical group COC(C)(C)CCOOCCC(C)(C)OC VKTGGNKPUDNPQI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- OFNISBHGPNMTMS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3-methylideneoxolane-2,5-dione Chemical compound C=C1CC(=O)OC1=O OFNISBHGPNMTMS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- UPMLOUAZCHDJJD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 4,4'-Diphenylmethane Diisocyanate Chemical compound C1=CC(N=C=O)=CC=C1CC1=CC=C(N=C=O)C=C1 UPMLOUAZCHDJJD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- WZSFTHVIIGGDOI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 4,5,6,7-tetrachloro-3-[2-methyl-3-[(4,5,6,7-tetrachloro-3-oxoisoindol-1-yl)amino]anilino]isoindol-1-one Chemical compound ClC1=C(Cl)C(Cl)=C(Cl)C2=C1C(NC1=CC=CC(NC=3C4=C(C(=C(Cl)C(Cl)=C4Cl)Cl)C(=O)N=3)=C1C)=NC2=O WZSFTHVIIGGDOI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- JLBJTVDPSNHSKJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 4-Methylstyrene Chemical compound CC1=CC=C(C=C)C=C1 JLBJTVDPSNHSKJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- IGSBHTZEJMPDSZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 4-[(4-amino-3-methylcyclohexyl)methyl]-2-methylcyclohexan-1-amine Chemical compound C1CC(N)C(C)CC1CC1CC(C)C(N)CC1 IGSBHTZEJMPDSZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- DWDURZSYQTXVIN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 4-[(4-aminophenyl)-(4-methyliminocyclohexa-2,5-dien-1-ylidene)methyl]aniline Chemical compound C1=CC(=NC)C=CC1=C(C=1C=CC(N)=CC=1)C1=CC=C(N)C=C1 DWDURZSYQTXVIN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- LVOJOIBIVGEQBP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 4-[[2-chloro-4-[3-chloro-4-[(5-hydroxy-3-methyl-1-phenylpyrazol-4-yl)diazenyl]phenyl]phenyl]diazenyl]-5-methyl-2-phenylpyrazol-3-ol Chemical compound CC1=NN(C(O)=C1N=NC1=CC=C(C=C1Cl)C1=CC(Cl)=C(C=C1)N=NC1=C(O)N(N=C1C)C1=CC=CC=C1)C1=CC=CC=C1 LVOJOIBIVGEQBP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- PBGKNXWGYQPUJK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 4-chloro-2-nitroaniline Chemical compound NC1=CC=C(Cl)C=C1[N+]([O-])=O PBGKNXWGYQPUJK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- OIYTYGOUZOARSH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 4-methoxy-2-methylidene-4-oxobutanoic acid Chemical compound COC(=O)CC(=C)C(O)=O OIYTYGOUZOARSH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- DSBIJCMXAIKKKI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 5-nitro-o-toluidine Chemical compound CC1=CC=C([N+]([O-])=O)C=C1N DSBIJCMXAIKKKI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- SLXKOJJOQWFEFD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 6-aminohexanoic acid Chemical compound NCCCCCC(O)=O SLXKOJJOQWFEFD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- JTHZUSWLNCPZLX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 6-fluoro-3-methyl-2h-indazole Chemical compound FC1=CC=C2C(C)=NNC2=C1 JTHZUSWLNCPZLX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- GZVHEAJQGPRDLQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 6-phenyl-1,3,5-triazine-2,4-diamine Chemical compound NC1=NC(N)=NC(C=2C=CC=CC=2)=N1 GZVHEAJQGPRDLQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- RSWGJHLUYNHPMX-UHFFFAOYSA-N Abietic-Saeure Natural products C12CCC(C(C)C)=CC2=CCC2C1(C)CCCC2(C)C(O)=O RSWGJHLUYNHPMX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- HRPVXLWXLXDGHG-UHFFFAOYSA-N Acrylamide Chemical compound NC(=O)C=C HRPVXLWXLXDGHG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229920002972 Acrylic fiber Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000004342 Benzoyl peroxide Substances 0.000 description 1
- OMPJBNCRMGITSC-UHFFFAOYSA-N Benzoylperoxide Chemical compound C=1C=CC=CC=1C(=O)OOC(=O)C1=CC=CC=C1 OMPJBNCRMGITSC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- VVAVKBBTPWYADW-UHFFFAOYSA-L Biebrich scarlet Chemical compound [Na+].[Na+].OC1=CC=C2C=CC=CC2=C1N=NC(C(=C1)S([O-])(=O)=O)=CC=C1N=NC1=CC=C(S([O-])(=O)=O)C=C1 VVAVKBBTPWYADW-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- DKPFZGUDAPQIHT-UHFFFAOYSA-N Butyl acetate Natural products CCCCOC(C)=O DKPFZGUDAPQIHT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229920000049 Carbon (fiber) Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 108091005944 Cerulean Proteins 0.000 description 1
- WBYWAXJHAXSJNI-SREVYHEPSA-N Cinnamic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)\C=C/C1=CC=CC=C1 WBYWAXJHAXSJNI-SREVYHEPSA-N 0.000 description 1
- QPLDLSVMHZLSFG-UHFFFAOYSA-N Copper oxide Chemical compound [Cu]=O QPLDLSVMHZLSFG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000005751 Copper oxide Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920000742 Cotton Polymers 0.000 description 1
- FBPFZTCFMRRESA-FSIIMWSLSA-N D-Glucitol Natural products OC[C@H](O)[C@H](O)[C@@H](O)[C@H](O)CO FBPFZTCFMRRESA-FSIIMWSLSA-N 0.000 description 1
- FBPFZTCFMRRESA-JGWLITMVSA-N D-glucitol Chemical group OC[C@H](O)[C@@H](O)[C@H](O)[C@H](O)CO FBPFZTCFMRRESA-JGWLITMVSA-N 0.000 description 1
- RPNUMPOLZDHAAY-UHFFFAOYSA-N Diethylenetriamine Chemical compound NCCNCCN RPNUMPOLZDHAAY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- ORAWFNKFUWGRJG-UHFFFAOYSA-N Docosanamide Chemical compound CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC(N)=O ORAWFNKFUWGRJG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- XLYMOEINVGRTEX-ARJAWSKDSA-N Ethyl hydrogen fumarate Chemical compound CCOC(=O)\C=C/C(O)=O XLYMOEINVGRTEX-ARJAWSKDSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229920000181 Ethylene propylene rubber Polymers 0.000 description 1
- PIICEJLVQHRZGT-UHFFFAOYSA-N Ethylenediamine Chemical compound NCCN PIICEJLVQHRZGT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000005033 Fourier transform infrared spectroscopy Methods 0.000 description 1
- 244000043261 Hevea brasiliensis Species 0.000 description 1
- 239000005057 Hexamethylene diisocyanate Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000013032 Hydrocarbon resin Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000004233 Indanthrene blue RS Substances 0.000 description 1
- 235000000177 Indigofera tinctoria Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- VQTUBCCKSQIDNK-UHFFFAOYSA-N Isobutene Chemical group CC(C)=C VQTUBCCKSQIDNK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000005058 Isophorone diisocyanate Substances 0.000 description 1
- YIVJZNGAASQVEM-UHFFFAOYSA-N Lauroyl peroxide Chemical compound CCCCCCCCCCCC(=O)OOC(=O)CCCCCCCCCCC YIVJZNGAASQVEM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- VPWFPZBFBFHIIL-UHFFFAOYSA-L Lithol Rubine Chemical compound OC=1C(=CC2=CC=CC=C2C1N=NC1=C(C=C(C=C1)C)S(=O)(=O)[O-])C(=O)[O-].[Na+].[Na+] VPWFPZBFBFHIIL-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- 239000004594 Masterbatch (MB) Substances 0.000 description 1
- CERQOIWHTDAKMF-UHFFFAOYSA-M Methacrylate Chemical compound CC(=C)C([O-])=O CERQOIWHTDAKMF-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- VVQNEPGJFQJSBK-UHFFFAOYSA-N Methyl methacrylate Chemical compound COC(=O)C(C)=C VVQNEPGJFQJSBK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- GYCMBHHDWRMZGG-UHFFFAOYSA-N Methylacrylonitrile Chemical compound CC(=C)C#N GYCMBHHDWRMZGG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- ZOKXTWBITQBERF-UHFFFAOYSA-N Molybdenum Chemical compound [Mo] ZOKXTWBITQBERF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- WHNWPMSKXPGLAX-UHFFFAOYSA-N N-Vinyl-2-pyrrolidone Chemical compound C=CN1CCCC1=O WHNWPMSKXPGLAX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000004677 Nylon Substances 0.000 description 1
- CBENFWSGALASAD-UHFFFAOYSA-N Ozone Chemical compound [O-][O+]=O CBENFWSGALASAD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229920006282 Phenolic fiber Polymers 0.000 description 1
- JPYHHZQJCSQRJY-UHFFFAOYSA-N Phloroglucinol Natural products CCC=CCC=CCC=CCC=CCCCCC(=O)C1=C(O)C=C(O)C=C1O JPYHHZQJCSQRJY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- OAICVXFJPJFONN-UHFFFAOYSA-N Phosphorus Chemical compound [P] OAICVXFJPJFONN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229920003171 Poly (ethylene oxide) Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000005062 Polybutadiene Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000002202 Polyethylene glycol Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000004642 Polyimide Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000004721 Polyphenylene oxide Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920002396 Polyurea Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000004372 Polyvinyl alcohol Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920001328 Polyvinylidene chloride Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000006004 Quartz sand Substances 0.000 description 1
- KHPCPRHQVVSZAH-HUOMCSJISA-N Rosin Natural products O(C/C=C/c1ccccc1)[C@H]1[C@H](O)[C@@H](O)[C@@H](O)[C@@H](CO)O1 KHPCPRHQVVSZAH-HUOMCSJISA-N 0.000 description 1
- BUGBHKTXTAQXES-UHFFFAOYSA-N Selenium Chemical compound [Se] BUGBHKTXTAQXES-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910052581 Si3N4 Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- BCKXLBQYZLBQEK-KVVVOXFISA-M Sodium oleate Chemical compound [Na+].CCCCCCCC\C=C/CCCCCCCC([O-])=O BCKXLBQYZLBQEK-KVVVOXFISA-M 0.000 description 1
- 229920002125 Sokalan® Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 235000021355 Stearic acid Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 229910000831 Steel Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229920007962 Styrene Methyl Methacrylate Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000004809 Teflon Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920006362 Teflon® Polymers 0.000 description 1
- ZJCCRDAZUWHFQH-UHFFFAOYSA-N Trimethylolpropane Chemical compound CCC(CO)(CO)CO ZJCCRDAZUWHFQH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- DAKWPKUUDNSNPN-UHFFFAOYSA-N Trimethylolpropane triacrylate Chemical compound C=CC(=O)OCC(CC)(COC(=O)C=C)COC(=O)C=C DAKWPKUUDNSNPN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- XTXRWKRVRITETP-UHFFFAOYSA-N Vinyl acetate Chemical compound CC(=O)OC=C XTXRWKRVRITETP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229920002433 Vinyl chloride-vinyl acetate copolymer Polymers 0.000 description 1
- QYKIQEUNHZKYBP-UHFFFAOYSA-N Vinyl ether Chemical compound C=COC=C QYKIQEUNHZKYBP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- HCHKCACWOHOZIP-UHFFFAOYSA-N Zinc Chemical compound [Zn] HCHKCACWOHOZIP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910007565 Zn—Cu Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- FXEDRSGUZBCDMO-PHEQNACWSA-N [(e)-3-phenylprop-2-enoyl] (e)-3-phenylprop-2-enoate Chemical compound C=1C=CC=CC=1/C=C/C(=O)OC(=O)\C=C\C1=CC=CC=C1 FXEDRSGUZBCDMO-PHEQNACWSA-N 0.000 description 1
- VJDDQSBNUHLBTD-GGWOSOGESA-N [(e)-but-2-enoyl] (e)-but-2-enoate Chemical compound C\C=C\C(=O)OC(=O)\C=C\C VJDDQSBNUHLBTD-GGWOSOGESA-N 0.000 description 1
- RXQSOCRPNINZCJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N [2,2-bis(acetyloxymethyl)-3-docosanoyloxypropyl] docosanoate Chemical compound CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC(=O)OCC(COC(C)=O)(COC(C)=O)COC(=O)CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC RXQSOCRPNINZCJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- SMLXTTLNOGQHHB-UHFFFAOYSA-N [3-docosanoyloxy-2,2-bis(docosanoyloxymethyl)propyl] docosanoate Chemical compound CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC(=O)OCC(COC(=O)CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC)(COC(=O)CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC)COC(=O)CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC SMLXTTLNOGQHHB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- YIMQCDZDWXUDCA-UHFFFAOYSA-N [4-(hydroxymethyl)cyclohexyl]methanol Chemical compound OCC1CCC(CO)CC1 YIMQCDZDWXUDCA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- YZKBALIHPXZPKY-UHFFFAOYSA-N [Mn].[Sr] Chemical compound [Mn].[Sr] YZKBALIHPXZPKY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- DATUMZHMQJGLMH-UHFFFAOYSA-L [Ni++].CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O.CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O Chemical compound [Ni++].CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O.CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O DATUMZHMQJGLMH-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- AUNAPVYQLLNFOI-UHFFFAOYSA-L [Pb++].[Pb++].[Pb++].[O-]S([O-])(=O)=O.[O-][Cr]([O-])(=O)=O.[O-][Mo]([O-])(=O)=O Chemical compound [Pb++].[Pb++].[Pb++].[O-]S([O-])(=O)=O.[O-][Cr]([O-])(=O)=O.[O-][Mo]([O-])(=O)=O AUNAPVYQLLNFOI-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- AZWHFTKIBIQKCA-UHFFFAOYSA-N [Sn+2]=O.[O-2].[In+3] Chemical class [Sn+2]=O.[O-2].[In+3] AZWHFTKIBIQKCA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- MWKGOHCHXBLCSH-UHFFFAOYSA-L [Zn+2].CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O.CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O Chemical compound [Zn+2].CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O.CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O MWKGOHCHXBLCSH-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- 230000002159 abnormal effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000011354 acetal resin Substances 0.000 description 1
- YRKCREAYFQTBPV-UHFFFAOYSA-N acetylacetone Natural products CC(=O)CC(C)=O YRKCREAYFQTBPV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000006230 acetylene black Substances 0.000 description 1
- DGOBMKYRQHEFGQ-UHFFFAOYSA-L acid green 5 Chemical compound [Na+].[Na+].C=1C=C(C(=C2C=CC(C=C2)=[N+](CC)CC=2C=C(C=CC=2)S([O-])(=O)=O)C=2C=CC(=CC=2)S([O-])(=O)=O)C=CC=1N(CC)CC1=CC=CC(S([O-])(=O)=O)=C1 DGOBMKYRQHEFGQ-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- 229920000800 acrylic rubber Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920001893 acrylonitrile styrene Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 230000009471 action Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000012190 activator Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000001154 acute effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000012644 addition polymerization Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000000853 adhesive Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000001070 adhesive effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229920003232 aliphatic polyester Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 125000005262 alkoxyamine group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 125000005907 alkyl ester group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 229910045601 alloy Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000000956 alloy Substances 0.000 description 1
- XYLMUPLGERFSHI-UHFFFAOYSA-N alpha-Methylstyrene Chemical compound CC(=C)C1=CC=CC=C1 XYLMUPLGERFSHI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- VCZQCLHBLSUGML-UHFFFAOYSA-K aluminum octacosanoate Chemical compound [Al+3].CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O.CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O.CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O VCZQCLHBLSUGML-UHFFFAOYSA-K 0.000 description 1
- JECUDTNJDOAEOR-UHFFFAOYSA-K aluminum;16-methylheptadecanoate Chemical compound [Al+3].CC(C)CCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O.CC(C)CCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O.CC(C)CCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O JECUDTNJDOAEOR-UHFFFAOYSA-K 0.000 description 1
- BBMXVTPBLPQMAE-UHFFFAOYSA-K aluminum;docosanoate Chemical compound [Al+3].CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O.CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O.CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O BBMXVTPBLPQMAE-UHFFFAOYSA-K 0.000 description 1
- 229920003180 amino resin Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229960002684 aminocaproic acid Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 238000004458 analytical method Methods 0.000 description 1
- JFCQEDHGNNZCLN-UHFFFAOYSA-N anhydrous glutaric acid Natural products OC(=O)CCCC(O)=O JFCQEDHGNNZCLN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- PYKYMHQGRFAEBM-UHFFFAOYSA-N anthraquinone Natural products CCC(=O)c1c(O)c2C(=O)C3C(C=CC=C3O)C(=O)c2cc1CC(=O)OC PYKYMHQGRFAEBM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 150000004056 anthraquinones Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- GHPGOEFPKIHBNM-UHFFFAOYSA-N antimony(3+);oxygen(2-) Chemical compound [O-2].[O-2].[O-2].[Sb+3].[Sb+3] GHPGOEFPKIHBNM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000012736 aqueous medium Substances 0.000 description 1
- 150000004984 aromatic diamines Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 238000003491 array Methods 0.000 description 1
- UHHXUPJJDHEMGX-UHFFFAOYSA-K azanium;manganese(3+);phosphonato phosphate Chemical compound [NH4+].[Mn+3].[O-]P([O-])(=O)OP([O-])([O-])=O UHHXUPJJDHEMGX-UHFFFAOYSA-K 0.000 description 1
- 229940067597 azelate Drugs 0.000 description 1
- IRERQBUNZFJFGC-UHFFFAOYSA-L azure blue Chemical compound [Na+].[Na+].[Na+].[Na+].[Na+].[Na+].[Na+].[Na+].[Al+3].[Al+3].[Al+3].[Al+3].[Al+3].[Al+3].[S-]S[S-].[O-][Si]([O-])([O-])[O-].[O-][Si]([O-])([O-])[O-].[O-][Si]([O-])([O-])[O-].[O-][Si]([O-])([O-])[O-].[O-][Si]([O-])([O-])[O-].[O-][Si]([O-])([O-])[O-] IRERQBUNZFJFGC-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- 229910052788 barium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- DSAJWYNOEDNPEQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N barium atom Chemical compound [Ba] DSAJWYNOEDNPEQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- JRPBQTZRNDNNOP-UHFFFAOYSA-N barium titanate Chemical compound [Ba+2].[Ba+2].[O-][Ti]([O-])([O-])[O-] JRPBQTZRNDNNOP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910002113 barium titanate Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- VNVSDJFEFZTZJH-UHFFFAOYSA-L barium(2+) octacosanoate Chemical compound [Ba++].CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O.CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O VNVSDJFEFZTZJH-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- HKYBCZMGCVOGCR-UHFFFAOYSA-L barium(2+);docosanoate Chemical compound [Ba+2].CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O.CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O HKYBCZMGCVOGCR-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- AGXUVMPSUKZYDT-UHFFFAOYSA-L barium(2+);octadecanoate Chemical compound [Ba+2].CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O.CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O AGXUVMPSUKZYDT-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- AYJRCSIUFZENHW-DEQYMQKBSA-L barium(2+);oxomethanediolate Chemical compound [Ba+2].[O-][14C]([O-])=O AYJRCSIUFZENHW-DEQYMQKBSA-L 0.000 description 1
- 239000002585 base Substances 0.000 description 1
- 235000019400 benzoyl peroxide Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 229910052790 beryllium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- ATBAMAFKBVZNFJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N beryllium atom Chemical compound [Be] ATBAMAFKBVZNFJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- UCMIRNVEIXFBKS-UHFFFAOYSA-N beta-alanine Chemical compound NCCC(O)=O UCMIRNVEIXFBKS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- WPKWPKDNOPEODE-UHFFFAOYSA-N bis(2,4,4-trimethylpentan-2-yl)diazene Chemical compound CC(C)(C)CC(C)(C)N=NC(C)(C)CC(C)(C)C WPKWPKDNOPEODE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000000903 blocking effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- NNBFNNNWANBMTI-UHFFFAOYSA-M brilliant green Chemical compound OS([O-])(=O)=O.C1=CC(N(CC)CC)=CC=C1C(C=1C=CC=CC=1)=C1C=CC(=[N+](CC)CC)C=C1 NNBFNNNWANBMTI-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- INLLPKCGLOXCIV-UHFFFAOYSA-N bromoethene Chemical compound BrC=C INLLPKCGLOXCIV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- LOGBRYZYTBQBTB-UHFFFAOYSA-N butane-1,2,4-tricarboxylic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)CCC(C(O)=O)CC(O)=O LOGBRYZYTBQBTB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- OWBTYPJTUOEWEK-UHFFFAOYSA-N butane-2,3-diol Chemical compound CC(O)C(C)O OWBTYPJTUOEWEK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- UTOVMEACOLCUCK-PLNGDYQASA-N butyl maleate Chemical compound CCCCOC(=O)\C=C/C(O)=O UTOVMEACOLCUCK-PLNGDYQASA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229920005549 butyl rubber Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229910052793 cadmium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- BDOSMKKIYDKNTQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N cadmium atom Chemical compound [Cd] BDOSMKKIYDKNTQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- CJOBVZJTOIVNNF-UHFFFAOYSA-N cadmium sulfide Chemical compound [Cd]=S CJOBVZJTOIVNNF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910052980 cadmium sulfide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- ZYCAIJWJKAGBLN-UHFFFAOYSA-N cadmium(2+);mercury(2+);disulfide Chemical compound [S-2].[S-2].[Cd+2].[Hg+2] ZYCAIJWJKAGBLN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229940061587 calcium behenate Drugs 0.000 description 1
- AOWKSNWVBZGMTJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N calcium titanate Chemical compound [Ca+2].[O-][Ti]([O-])=O AOWKSNWVBZGMTJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- YFPZYGHCFMOTQL-UHFFFAOYSA-L calcium;16-methylheptadecanoate Chemical compound [Ca+2].CC(C)CCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O.CC(C)CCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O YFPZYGHCFMOTQL-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- SMBKCSPGKDEPFO-UHFFFAOYSA-L calcium;docosanoate Chemical compound [Ca+2].CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O.CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O SMBKCSPGKDEPFO-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- HIAAVKYLDRCDFQ-UHFFFAOYSA-L calcium;dodecanoate Chemical compound [Ca+2].CCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O.CCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O HIAAVKYLDRCDFQ-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- HRBZRZSCMANEHQ-UHFFFAOYSA-L calcium;hexadecanoate Chemical compound [Ca+2].CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O.CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O HRBZRZSCMANEHQ-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- FIASKJZPIYCESA-UHFFFAOYSA-L calcium;octacosanoate Chemical compound [Ca+2].CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O.CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O FIASKJZPIYCESA-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- ZCZLQYAECBEUBH-UHFFFAOYSA-L calcium;octadec-9-enoate Chemical compound [Ca+2].CCCCCCCCC=CCCCCCCCC([O-])=O.CCCCCCCCC=CCCCCCCCC([O-])=O ZCZLQYAECBEUBH-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- LSFBQOPXRBJSSI-UHFFFAOYSA-L calcium;tetradecanoate Chemical compound [Ca+2].CCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O.CCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O LSFBQOPXRBJSSI-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- 239000004917 carbon fiber Substances 0.000 description 1
- ZDCAOOHISQRPLO-UHFFFAOYSA-N carboxy 1,2-diethoxypropan-2-ylperoxy carbonate Chemical compound CCOCC(C)(OCC)OOOC(=O)OC(O)=O ZDCAOOHISQRPLO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 150000001732 carboxylic acid derivatives Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 150000001735 carboxylic acids Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 239000012876 carrier material Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910000420 cerium oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000006231 channel black Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000013522 chelant Substances 0.000 description 1
- PZTQVMXMKVTIRC-UHFFFAOYSA-L chembl2028348 Chemical compound [Ca+2].[O-]S(=O)(=O)C1=CC(C)=CC=C1N=NC1=C(O)C(C([O-])=O)=CC2=CC=CC=C12 PZTQVMXMKVTIRC-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- ZLFVRXUOSPRRKQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N chembl2138372 Chemical compound [O-][N+](=O)C1=CC(C)=CC=C1N=NC1=C(O)C=CC2=CC=CC=C12 ZLFVRXUOSPRRKQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229920006235 chlorinated polyethylene elastomer Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229930016911 cinnamic acid Natural products 0.000 description 1
- 235000013985 cinnamic acid Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- FXEDRSGUZBCDMO-UHFFFAOYSA-N cinnamic acid anhydride Natural products C=1C=CC=CC=1C=CC(=O)OC(=O)C=CC1=CC=CC=C1 FXEDRSGUZBCDMO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000004927 clay Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000011247 coating layer Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910000152 cobalt phosphate Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- SSWSYWBRGQINON-UHFFFAOYSA-L cobalt(2+);hexadecanoate Chemical compound [Co+2].CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O.CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O SSWSYWBRGQINON-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- 238000000748 compression moulding Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000007859 condensation product Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910000431 copper oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- OMZSGWSJDCOLKM-UHFFFAOYSA-N copper(II) sulfide Chemical compound [S-2].[Cu+2] OMZSGWSJDCOLKM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- SVOAENZIOKPANY-CVBJKYQLSA-L copper;(z)-octadec-9-enoate Chemical compound [Cu+2].CCCCCCCC\C=C/CCCCCCCC([O-])=O.CCCCCCCC\C=C/CCCCCCCC([O-])=O SVOAENZIOKPANY-CVBJKYQLSA-L 0.000 description 1
- GYPBUYJSHBFNEJ-UHFFFAOYSA-L copper;hexadecanoate Chemical compound [Cu+2].CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O.CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O GYPBUYJSHBFNEJ-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- 238000004132 cross linking Methods 0.000 description 1
- LDHQCZJRKDOVOX-NSCUHMNNSA-N crotonic acid Chemical compound C\C=C\C(O)=O LDHQCZJRKDOVOX-NSCUHMNNSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000004122 cyclic group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- YMHQVDAATAEZLO-UHFFFAOYSA-N cyclohexane-1,1-diamine Chemical compound NC1(N)CCCCC1 YMHQVDAATAEZLO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- WTNDADANUZETTI-UHFFFAOYSA-N cyclohexane-1,2,4-tricarboxylic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)C1CCC(C(O)=O)C(C(O)=O)C1 WTNDADANUZETTI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- BSVQJWUUZCXSOL-UHFFFAOYSA-N cyclohexylsulfonyl ethaneperoxoate Chemical compound CC(=O)OOS(=O)(=O)C1CCCCC1 BSVQJWUUZCXSOL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- UFULAYFCSOUIOV-UHFFFAOYSA-N cysteamine Chemical compound NCCS UFULAYFCSOUIOV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- XJOBOFWTZOKMOH-UHFFFAOYSA-N decanoyl decaneperoxoate Chemical compound CCCCCCCCCC(=O)OOC(=O)CCCCCCCCC XJOBOFWTZOKMOH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000007547 defect Effects 0.000 description 1
- JQZRVMZHTADUSY-UHFFFAOYSA-L di(octanoyloxy)tin Chemical compound [Sn+2].CCCCCCCC([O-])=O.CCCCCCCC([O-])=O JQZRVMZHTADUSY-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- ZFTFAPZRGNKQPU-UHFFFAOYSA-N dicarbonic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)OC(O)=O ZFTFAPZRGNKQPU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000001142 dicarboxylic acid group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 238000000113 differential scanning calorimetry Methods 0.000 description 1
- GKGXKPRVOZNVPQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N diisocyanatomethylcyclohexane Chemical compound O=C=NC(N=C=O)C1CCCCC1 GKGXKPRVOZNVPQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- LDCRTTXIJACKKU-ONEGZZNKSA-N dimethyl fumarate Chemical compound COC(=O)\C=C\C(=O)OC LDCRTTXIJACKKU-ONEGZZNKSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229960004419 dimethyl fumarate Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 125000000118 dimethyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])* 0.000 description 1
- LDCRTTXIJACKKU-ARJAWSKDSA-N dimethyl maleate Chemical compound COC(=O)\C=C/C(=O)OC LDCRTTXIJACKKU-ARJAWSKDSA-N 0.000 description 1
- XHSDDKAGJYJAQM-ULDVOPSXSA-N dioctadecyl (e)-but-2-enedioate Chemical compound CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCOC(=O)\C=C\C(=O)OCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC XHSDDKAGJYJAQM-ULDVOPSXSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 150000002009 diols Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 238000003618 dip coating Methods 0.000 description 1
- NJLLQSBAHIKGKF-UHFFFAOYSA-N dipotassium dioxido(oxo)titanium Chemical compound [K+].[K+].[O-][Ti]([O-])=O NJLLQSBAHIKGKF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000007598 dipping method Methods 0.000 description 1
- SZXQTJUDPRGNJN-UHFFFAOYSA-N dipropylene glycol Chemical compound OCCCOCCCO SZXQTJUDPRGNJN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229940113120 dipropylene glycol Drugs 0.000 description 1
- WSALIDVQXCHFEG-UHFFFAOYSA-L disodium;4,8-diamino-1,5-dihydroxy-9,10-dioxoanthracene-2,6-disulfonate Chemical compound [Na+].[Na+].O=C1C2=C(N)C=C(S([O-])(=O)=O)C(O)=C2C(=O)C2=C1C(O)=C(S([O-])(=O)=O)C=C2N WSALIDVQXCHFEG-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- FBNCDTLHQPLASV-UHFFFAOYSA-L disodium;5-methyl-2-[[5-(4-methyl-2-sulfonatoanilino)-9,10-dioxoanthracen-1-yl]amino]benzenesulfonate Chemical compound [Na+].[Na+].[O-]S(=O)(=O)C1=CC(C)=CC=C1NC1=CC=CC2=C1C(=O)C1=CC=CC(NC=3C(=CC(C)=CC=3)S([O-])(=O)=O)=C1C2=O FBNCDTLHQPLASV-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- 238000012674 dispersion polymerization Methods 0.000 description 1
- YCWQBZCTYWZZAX-UHFFFAOYSA-N ditert-butyl 7,8-dioxabicyclo[4.2.0]octane-3,6-dicarboxylate Chemical compound C1C(C(=O)OC(C)(C)C)CCC2(C(=O)OC(C)(C)C)OOC21 YCWQBZCTYWZZAX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- GKCPCPKXFGQXGS-UHFFFAOYSA-N ditert-butyldiazene Chemical compound CC(C)(C)N=NC(C)(C)C GKCPCPKXFGQXGS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- ZABPGQXWKVZCMK-UHFFFAOYSA-L docosanoate;nickel(2+) Chemical compound [Ni+2].CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O.CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O ZABPGQXWKVZCMK-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- LFIRBDQBXLXQHY-UHFFFAOYSA-N docosanoic acid;2-ethyl-2-(hydroxymethyl)propane-1,3-diol Chemical compound CCC(CO)(CO)CO.CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC(O)=O.CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC(O)=O.CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC(O)=O LFIRBDQBXLXQHY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- GMSCBRSQMRDRCD-UHFFFAOYSA-N dodecyl 2-methylprop-2-enoate Chemical compound CCCCCCCCCCCCOC(=O)C(C)=C GMSCBRSQMRDRCD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- LJZKUDYOSCNJPU-UHFFFAOYSA-N dotetracontanediamide Chemical compound NC(=O)CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC(N)=O LJZKUDYOSCNJPU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000000428 dust Substances 0.000 description 1
- YQGOJNYOYNNSMM-UHFFFAOYSA-N eosin Chemical compound [Na+].OC(=O)C1=CC=CC=C1C1=C2C=C(Br)C(=O)C(Br)=C2OC2=C(Br)C(O)=C(Br)C=C21 YQGOJNYOYNNSMM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229920005558 epichlorohydrin rubber Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229940031098 ethanolamine Drugs 0.000 description 1
- HQQADJVZYDDRJT-UHFFFAOYSA-N ethene;prop-1-ene Chemical group C=C.CC=C HQQADJVZYDDRJT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- UIWXSTHGICQLQT-UHFFFAOYSA-N ethenyl propanoate Chemical compound CCC(=O)OC=C UIWXSTHGICQLQT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000002573 ethenylidene group Chemical group [*]=C=C([H])[H] 0.000 description 1
- SUPCQIBBMFXVTL-UHFFFAOYSA-N ethyl 2-methylprop-2-enoate Chemical compound CCOC(=O)C(C)=C SUPCQIBBMFXVTL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- PLYDMIIYRWUYBP-UHFFFAOYSA-N ethyl 4-[[2-chloro-4-[3-chloro-4-[(3-ethoxycarbonyl-5-oxo-1-phenyl-4h-pyrazol-4-yl)diazenyl]phenyl]phenyl]diazenyl]-5-oxo-1-phenyl-4h-pyrazole-3-carboxylate Chemical compound CCOC(=O)C1=NN(C=2C=CC=CC=2)C(=O)C1N=NC(C(=C1)Cl)=CC=C1C(C=C1Cl)=CC=C1N=NC(C(=N1)C(=O)OCC)C(=O)N1C1=CC=CC=C1 PLYDMIIYRWUYBP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229920006244 ethylene-ethyl acrylate Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 238000002474 experimental method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000001125 extrusion Methods 0.000 description 1
- FPVGTPBMTFTMRT-NSKUCRDLSA-L fast yellow Chemical compound [Na+].[Na+].C1=C(S([O-])(=O)=O)C(N)=CC=C1\N=N\C1=CC=C(S([O-])(=O)=O)C=C1 FPVGTPBMTFTMRT-NSKUCRDLSA-L 0.000 description 1
- 235000019233 fast yellow AB Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 239000003302 ferromagnetic material Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000010419 fine particle Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000012530 fluid Substances 0.000 description 1
- XUCNUKMRBVNAPB-UHFFFAOYSA-N fluoroethene Chemical compound FC=C XUCNUKMRBVNAPB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229920002313 fluoropolymer Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000004811 fluoropolymer Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000011010 flushing procedure Methods 0.000 description 1
- HDNHWROHHSBKJG-UHFFFAOYSA-N formaldehyde;furan-2-ylmethanol Chemical compound O=C.OCC1=CC=CO1 HDNHWROHHSBKJG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000009472 formulation Methods 0.000 description 1
- XLYMOEINVGRTEX-UHFFFAOYSA-N fumaric acid monoethyl ester Natural products CCOC(=O)C=CC(O)=O XLYMOEINVGRTEX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000000524 functional group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 239000007849 furan resin Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000006232 furnace black Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000003365 glass fiber Substances 0.000 description 1
- XVOUMQNXTGKGMA-UHFFFAOYSA-N glutaconic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)CC=CC(O)=O XVOUMQNXTGKGMA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000005469 granulation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000003179 granulation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000010439 graphite Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910002804 graphite Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 150000004820 halides Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- RBTKNAXYKSUFRK-UHFFFAOYSA-N heliogen blue Chemical compound [Cu].[N-]1C2=C(C=CC=C3)C3=C1N=C([N-]1)C3=CC=CC=C3C1=NC([N-]1)=C(C=CC=C3)C3=C1N=C([N-]1)C3=CC=CC=C3C1=N2 RBTKNAXYKSUFRK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- PBZROIMXDZTJDF-UHFFFAOYSA-N hepta-1,6-dien-4-one Chemical compound C=CCC(=O)CC=C PBZROIMXDZTJDF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- KCNOEZOXGYXXQU-UHFFFAOYSA-N heptatriacontan-19-one Chemical compound CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC(=O)CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC KCNOEZOXGYXXQU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- FEEPBTVZSYQUDP-UHFFFAOYSA-N heptatriacontanediamide Chemical compound NC(=O)CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC(N)=O FEEPBTVZSYQUDP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- RKVQXYMNVZNJHZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N hexacosanediamide Chemical compound NC(=O)CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC(N)=O RKVQXYMNVZNJHZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- IPCSVZSSVZVIGE-UHFFFAOYSA-M hexadecanoate Chemical compound CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O IPCSVZSSVZVIGE-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- QZWHQSRWOYUNFT-UHFFFAOYSA-L hexadecanoate;lead(2+) Chemical compound [Pb+2].CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O.CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O QZWHQSRWOYUNFT-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- RRAMGCGOFNQTLD-UHFFFAOYSA-N hexamethylene diisocyanate Chemical compound O=C=NCCCCCCN=C=O RRAMGCGOFNQTLD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- RLMXGBGAZRVYIX-UHFFFAOYSA-N hexane-1,2,3,6-tetrol Chemical compound OCCCC(O)C(O)CO RLMXGBGAZRVYIX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- FUZZWVXGSFPDMH-UHFFFAOYSA-N hexanoic acid Chemical compound CCCCCC(O)=O FUZZWVXGSFPDMH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229920006270 hydrocarbon resin Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000001257 hydrogen Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910052739 hydrogen Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 125000002768 hydroxyalkyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 229920002681 hypalon Polymers 0.000 description 1
- KQSBZNJFKWOQQK-UHFFFAOYSA-N hystazarin Natural products O=C1C2=CC=CC=C2C(=O)C2=C1C=C(O)C(O)=C2 KQSBZNJFKWOQQK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 235000019239 indanthrene blue RS Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 229940097275 indigo Drugs 0.000 description 1
- COHYTHOBJLSHDF-UHFFFAOYSA-N indigo powder Natural products N1C2=CC=CC=C2C(=O)C1=C1C(=O)C2=CC=CC=C2N1 COHYTHOBJLSHDF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910052738 indium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229910003437 indium oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- PJXISJQVUVHSOJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N indium(iii) oxide Chemical compound [O-2].[O-2].[O-2].[In+3].[In+3] PJXISJQVUVHSOJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000001746 injection moulding Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000007641 inkjet printing Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000011810 insulating material Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000003993 interaction Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000007733 ion plating Methods 0.000 description 1
- DCYOBGZUOMKFPA-UHFFFAOYSA-N iron(2+);iron(3+);octadecacyanide Chemical compound [Fe+2].[Fe+2].[Fe+2].[Fe+3].[Fe+3].[Fe+3].[Fe+3].N#[C-].N#[C-].N#[C-].N#[C-].N#[C-].N#[C-].N#[C-].N#[C-].N#[C-].N#[C-].N#[C-].N#[C-].N#[C-].N#[C-].N#[C-].N#[C-].N#[C-].N#[C-] DCYOBGZUOMKFPA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- WTFXARWRTYJXII-UHFFFAOYSA-N iron(2+);iron(3+);oxygen(2-) Chemical compound [O-2].[O-2].[O-2].[O-2].[Fe+2].[Fe+3].[Fe+3] WTFXARWRTYJXII-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000012948 isocyanate Substances 0.000 description 1
- 150000002513 isocyanates Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- ZFSLODLOARCGLH-UHFFFAOYSA-N isocyanuric acid Chemical compound OC1=NC(O)=NC(O)=N1 ZFSLODLOARCGLH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- NIMLQBUJDJZYEJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N isophorone diisocyanate Chemical compound CC1(C)CC(N=C=O)CC(C)(CN=C=O)C1 NIMLQBUJDJZYEJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229920003049 isoprene rubber Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000006233 lamp black Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229940116335 lauramide Drugs 0.000 description 1
- PBOSTUDLECTMNL-UHFFFAOYSA-N lauryl acrylate Chemical compound CCCCCCCCCCCCOC(=O)C=C PBOSTUDLECTMNL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- MOUPNEIJQCETIW-UHFFFAOYSA-N lead chromate Chemical compound [Pb+2].[O-][Cr]([O-])(=O)=O MOUPNEIJQCETIW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- XMFOQHDPRMAJNU-UHFFFAOYSA-N lead(ii,iv) oxide Chemical compound O1[Pb]O[Pb]11O[Pb]O1 XMFOQHDPRMAJNU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- ONUFRYFLRFLSOM-UHFFFAOYSA-N lead;octadecanoic acid Chemical compound [Pb].CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC(O)=O ONUFRYFLRFLSOM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000031700 light absorption Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000004571 lime Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000000670 limiting effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000004973 liquid crystal related substance Substances 0.000 description 1
- HGPXWXLYXNVULB-UHFFFAOYSA-M lithium stearate Chemical compound [Li+].CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O HGPXWXLYXNVULB-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- BZMIKKVSCNHEFL-UHFFFAOYSA-M lithium;hexadecanoate Chemical compound [Li+].CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O BZMIKKVSCNHEFL-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- KJSPVJJOPONRTK-UHFFFAOYSA-M lithium;tetradecanoate Chemical compound [Li+].CCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O KJSPVJJOPONRTK-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- 231100000053 low toxicity Toxicity 0.000 description 1
- 230000001050 lubricating effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- KBMLJKBBKGNETC-UHFFFAOYSA-N magnesium manganese Chemical compound [Mg].[Mn] KBMLJKBBKGNETC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229940105112 magnesium myristate Drugs 0.000 description 1
- ATYSJAJVVFHRKR-UHFFFAOYSA-L magnesium octacosanoate Chemical compound [Mg+2].CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O.CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O ATYSJAJVVFHRKR-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- HCWCAKKEBCNQJP-UHFFFAOYSA-N magnesium orthosilicate Chemical compound [Mg+2].[Mg+2].[O-][Si]([O-])([O-])[O-] HCWCAKKEBCNQJP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000000391 magnesium silicate Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910052919 magnesium silicate Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 235000019792 magnesium silicate Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 235000019359 magnesium stearate Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- OBQVOBQZMOXRAL-UHFFFAOYSA-L magnesium;docosanoate Chemical compound [Mg+2].CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O.CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O OBQVOBQZMOXRAL-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- BJZBHTNKDCBDNQ-UHFFFAOYSA-L magnesium;dodecanoate Chemical compound [Mg+2].CCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O.CCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O BJZBHTNKDCBDNQ-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- AXZKOIWUVFPNLO-UHFFFAOYSA-N magnesium;oxygen(2-) Chemical compound [O-2].[Mg+2] AXZKOIWUVFPNLO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- DMRBHZWQMKSQGR-UHFFFAOYSA-L magnesium;tetradecanoate Chemical compound [Mg+2].CCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O.CCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O DMRBHZWQMKSQGR-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- 238000012423 maintenance Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229940107698 malachite green Drugs 0.000 description 1
- FDZZZRQASAIRJF-UHFFFAOYSA-M malachite green Chemical compound [Cl-].C1=CC(N(C)C)=CC=C1C(C=1C=CC=CC=1)=C1C=CC(=[N+](C)C)C=C1 FDZZZRQASAIRJF-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- FPYJFEHAWHCUMM-UHFFFAOYSA-N maleic anhydride Chemical compound O=C1OC(=O)C=C1 FPYJFEHAWHCUMM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000000691 measurement method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 150000002736 metal compounds Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 229910001092 metal group alloy Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- AXLHVTKGDPVANO-UHFFFAOYSA-N methyl 2-amino-3-[(2-methylpropan-2-yl)oxycarbonylamino]propanoate Chemical compound COC(=O)C(N)CNC(=O)OC(C)(C)C AXLHVTKGDPVANO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- ADFPJHOAARPYLP-UHFFFAOYSA-N methyl 2-methylprop-2-enoate;styrene Chemical compound COC(=O)C(C)=C.C=CC1=CC=CC=C1 ADFPJHOAARPYLP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000002496 methyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])* 0.000 description 1
- NKHAVTQWNUWKEO-IHWYPQMZSA-N methyl hydrogen fumarate Chemical compound COC(=O)\C=C/C(O)=O NKHAVTQWNUWKEO-IHWYPQMZSA-N 0.000 description 1
- WBYWAXJHAXSJNI-UHFFFAOYSA-N methyl p-hydroxycinnamate Natural products OC(=O)C=CC1=CC=CC=C1 WBYWAXJHAXSJNI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- XJRBAMWJDBPFIM-UHFFFAOYSA-N methyl vinyl ether Chemical compound COC=C XJRBAMWJDBPFIM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- LAQFLZHBVPULPL-UHFFFAOYSA-N methyl(phenyl)silicon Chemical compound C[Si]C1=CC=CC=C1 LAQFLZHBVPULPL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- BFXIKLCIZHOAAZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N methyltrimethoxysilane Chemical compound CO[Si](C)(OC)OC BFXIKLCIZHOAAZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000010445 mica Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910052618 mica group Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229910052750 molybdenum Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000011733 molybdenum Substances 0.000 description 1
- VLAPMBHFAWRUQP-UHFFFAOYSA-L molybdic acid Chemical compound O[Mo](O)(=O)=O VLAPMBHFAWRUQP-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- 150000005673 monoalkenes Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- NKHAVTQWNUWKEO-NSCUHMNNSA-N monomethyl fumarate Chemical compound COC(=O)\C=C\C(O)=O NKHAVTQWNUWKEO-NSCUHMNNSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229940005650 monomethyl fumarate Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 239000012170 montan wax Substances 0.000 description 1
- FOZDUYPQLBGEKB-CLFAGFIQSA-N n,n'-bis[(z)-octadec-9-enyl]hexanediamide Chemical compound CCCCCCCC\C=C/CCCCCCCCNC(=O)CCCCC(=O)NCCCCCCCC\C=C/CCCCCCCC FOZDUYPQLBGEKB-CLFAGFIQSA-N 0.000 description 1
- QIJSQGXDFAYEAF-UHFFFAOYSA-N n,n'-dioctadecylhexanediamide Chemical compound CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCNC(=O)CCCCC(=O)NCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC QIJSQGXDFAYEAF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- VENDXQNWODZJGB-UHFFFAOYSA-N n-(4-amino-5-methoxy-2-methylphenyl)benzamide Chemical compound C1=C(N)C(OC)=CC(NC(=O)C=2C=CC=CC=2)=C1C VENDXQNWODZJGB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- PZNXLZZWWBSQQK-UHFFFAOYSA-N n-(5-benzamido-9,10-dioxoanthracen-1-yl)benzamide Chemical compound C=1C=CC=CC=1C(=O)NC(C=1C(=O)C2=CC=C3)=CC=CC=1C(=O)C2=C3NC(=O)C1=CC=CC=C1 PZNXLZZWWBSQQK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- UCANIZWVDIFCHH-UHFFFAOYSA-N n-(9,10-dioxoanthracen-1-yl)-7-oxobenzo[e]perimidine-4-carboxamide Chemical compound O=C1C2=CC=CC=C2C2=NC=NC3=C2C1=CC=C3C(=O)NC1=CC=CC2=C1C(=O)C1=CC=CC=C1C2=O UCANIZWVDIFCHH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- JHOKTNSTUVKGJC-UHFFFAOYSA-N n-(hydroxymethyl)octadecanamide Chemical compound CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC(=O)NCO JHOKTNSTUVKGJC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- QYZFTMMPKCOTAN-UHFFFAOYSA-N n-[2-(2-hydroxyethylamino)ethyl]-2-[[1-[2-(2-hydroxyethylamino)ethylamino]-2-methyl-1-oxopropan-2-yl]diazenyl]-2-methylpropanamide Chemical compound OCCNCCNC(=O)C(C)(C)N=NC(C)(C)C(=O)NCCNCCO QYZFTMMPKCOTAN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- RZTXRJXISDSZQL-UHFFFAOYSA-N n-hexadecylhexadecanamide Chemical compound CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCNC(=O)CCCCCCCCCCCCCCC RZTXRJXISDSZQL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- KKFHAJHLJHVUDM-UHFFFAOYSA-N n-vinylcarbazole Chemical compound C1=CC=C2N(C=C)C3=CC=CC=C3C2=C1 KKFHAJHLJHVUDM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- LATKICLYWYUXCN-UHFFFAOYSA-N naphthalene-1,3,6-tricarboxylic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)C1=CC(C(O)=O)=CC2=CC(C(=O)O)=CC=C21 LATKICLYWYUXCN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- CTIQLGJVGNGFEW-UHFFFAOYSA-L naphthol yellow S Chemical compound [Na+].[Na+].C1=C(S([O-])(=O)=O)C=C2C([O-])=C([N+]([O-])=O)C=C([N+]([O-])=O)C2=C1 CTIQLGJVGNGFEW-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- 229920003052 natural elastomer Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920001194 natural rubber Polymers 0.000 description 1
- LVBIMKHYBUACBU-CVBJKYQLSA-L nickel(2+);(z)-octadec-9-enoate Chemical compound [Ni+2].CCCCCCCC\C=C/CCCCCCCC([O-])=O.CCCCCCCC\C=C/CCCCCCCC([O-])=O LVBIMKHYBUACBU-CVBJKYQLSA-L 0.000 description 1
- JMWUYEFBFUCSAK-UHFFFAOYSA-L nickel(2+);octadecanoate Chemical compound [Ni+2].CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O.CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O JMWUYEFBFUCSAK-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- HILCQVNWWOARMT-UHFFFAOYSA-N non-1-en-3-one Chemical compound CCCCCCC(=O)C=C HILCQVNWWOARMT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- OQCDKBAXFALNLD-UHFFFAOYSA-N octadecanoic acid Natural products CCCCCCCC(C)CCCCCCCCC(O)=O OQCDKBAXFALNLD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- HMZGPNHSPWNGEP-UHFFFAOYSA-N octadecyl 2-methylprop-2-enoate Chemical compound CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCOC(=O)C(C)=C HMZGPNHSPWNGEP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- SRSFOMHQIATOFV-UHFFFAOYSA-N octanoyl octaneperoxoate Chemical compound CCCCCCCC(=O)OOC(=O)CCCCCCC SRSFOMHQIATOFV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229920002601 oligoester Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000012860 organic pigment Substances 0.000 description 1
- 150000002923 oximes Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- BMMGVYCKOGBVEV-UHFFFAOYSA-N oxo(oxoceriooxy)cerium Chemical compound [Ce]=O.O=[Ce]=O BMMGVYCKOGBVEV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- WMHSAFDEIXKKMV-UHFFFAOYSA-N oxoantimony;oxotin Chemical class [Sn]=O.[Sb]=O WMHSAFDEIXKKMV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- SOQBVABWOPYFQZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N oxygen(2-);titanium(4+) Chemical class [O-2].[O-2].[Ti+4] SOQBVABWOPYFQZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- RVTZCBVAJQQJTK-UHFFFAOYSA-N oxygen(2-);zirconium(4+) Chemical compound [O-2].[O-2].[Zr+4] RVTZCBVAJQQJTK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- HDBWAWNLGGMZRQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N p-Vinylbiphenyl Chemical compound C1=CC(C=C)=CC=C1C1=CC=CC=C1 HDBWAWNLGGMZRQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- WOTPFVNWMLFMFW-ISLYRVAYSA-N para red Chemical compound OC1=CC=C2C=CC=CC2=C1\N=N\C1=CC=C(N(=O)=O)C=C1 WOTPFVNWMLFMFW-ISLYRVAYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- UCUUFSAXZMGPGH-UHFFFAOYSA-N penta-1,4-dien-3-one Chemical compound C=CC(=O)C=C UCUUFSAXZMGPGH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- WEAYWASEBDOLRG-UHFFFAOYSA-N pentane-1,2,5-triol Chemical compound OCCCC(O)CO WEAYWASEBDOLRG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000005191 phase separation Methods 0.000 description 1
- ISWSIDIOOBJBQZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N phenol group Chemical group C1(=CC=CC=C1)O ISWSIDIOOBJBQZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 150000002989 phenols Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- QIWKUEJZZCOPFV-UHFFFAOYSA-N phenyl 2-methylprop-2-enoate Chemical compound CC(=C)C(=O)OC1=CC=CC=C1 QIWKUEJZZCOPFV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- WRAQQYDMVSCOTE-UHFFFAOYSA-N phenyl prop-2-enoate Chemical compound C=CC(=O)OC1=CC=CC=C1 WRAQQYDMVSCOTE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 150000004986 phenylenediamines Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- QCDYQQDYXPDABM-UHFFFAOYSA-N phloroglucinol Chemical compound OC1=CC(O)=CC(O)=C1 QCDYQQDYXPDABM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000005498 polishing Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229920001490 poly(butyl methacrylate) polymer Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920000548 poly(silane) polymer Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920002285 poly(styrene-co-acrylonitrile) Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920002589 poly(vinylethylene) polymer Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920000058 polyacrylate Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000004584 polyacrylic acid Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920001281 polyalkylene Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920002647 polyamide Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 238000012643 polycondensation polymerization Methods 0.000 description 1
- 150000004291 polyenes Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920006146 polyetheresteramide block copolymer Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920000139 polyethylene terephthalate Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000005020 polyethylene terephthalate Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000009719 polyimide resin Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000003505 polymerization initiator Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920005672 polyolefin resin Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920000259 polyoxyethylene lauryl ether Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920006380 polyphenylene oxide Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920001451 polypropylene glycol Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 150000007519 polyprotic acids Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000005077 polysulfide Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920001021 polysulfide Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 150000008117 polysulfides Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920006306 polyurethane fiber Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920002689 polyvinyl acetate Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000011118 polyvinyl acetate Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920002451 polyvinyl alcohol Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920002620 polyvinyl fluoride Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920002102 polyvinyl toluene Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000005033 polyvinylidene chloride Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229940096992 potassium oleate Drugs 0.000 description 1
- MLICVSDCCDDWMD-KVVVOXFISA-M potassium;(z)-octadec-9-enoate Chemical compound [K+].CCCCCCCC\C=C/CCCCCCCC([O-])=O MLICVSDCCDDWMD-KVVVOXFISA-M 0.000 description 1
- NGNZTXNWCGRXKL-UHFFFAOYSA-M potassium;16-methylheptadecanoate Chemical compound [K+].CC(C)CCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O NGNZTXNWCGRXKL-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- FYFUQDOEHQSBFN-UHFFFAOYSA-M potassium;docosanoate Chemical compound [K+].CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O FYFUQDOEHQSBFN-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- MQOCIYICOGDBSG-UHFFFAOYSA-M potassium;hexadecanoate Chemical compound [K+].CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O MQOCIYICOGDBSG-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- BXFXQPLYASVMSV-UHFFFAOYSA-M potassium;octacosanoate Chemical compound [K+].CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O BXFXQPLYASVMSV-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- POXKBECONNAUAP-UHFFFAOYSA-N potassium;tetradecanoic acid Chemical compound [K].CCCCCCCCCCCCCC(O)=O POXKBECONNAUAP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000003918 potentiometric titration Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000000047 product Substances 0.000 description 1
- SCUZVMOVTVSBLE-UHFFFAOYSA-N prop-2-enenitrile;styrene Chemical compound C=CC#N.C=CC1=CC=CC=C1 SCUZVMOVTVSBLE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- BWJUFXUULUEGMA-UHFFFAOYSA-N propan-2-yl propan-2-yloxycarbonyloxy carbonate Chemical compound CC(C)OC(=O)OOC(=O)OC(C)C BWJUFXUULUEGMA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- YPVDWEHVCUBACK-UHFFFAOYSA-N propoxycarbonyloxy propyl carbonate Chemical compound CCCOC(=O)OOC(=O)OCCC YPVDWEHVCUBACK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- NHARPDSAXCBDDR-UHFFFAOYSA-N propyl 2-methylprop-2-enoate Chemical compound CCCOC(=O)C(C)=C NHARPDSAXCBDDR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- PNXMTCDJUBJHQJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N propyl prop-2-enoate Chemical compound CCCOC(=O)C=C PNXMTCDJUBJHQJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229960003351 prussian blue Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 239000013225 prussian blue Substances 0.000 description 1
- 125000001453 quaternary ammonium group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 235000012752 quinoline yellow Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 239000004172 quinoline yellow Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229940051201 quinoline yellow Drugs 0.000 description 1
- IZMJMCDDWKSTTK-UHFFFAOYSA-N quinoline yellow Chemical compound C1=CC=CC2=NC(C3C(C4=CC=CC=C4C3=O)=O)=CC=C21 IZMJMCDDWKSTTK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000009467 reduction Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000002441 reversible effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000001022 rhodamine dye Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000000630 rising effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229920002631 room-temperature vulcanizate silicone Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229940058287 salicylic acid derivative anticestodals Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 150000003872 salicylic acid derivatives Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 229910052711 selenium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000011669 selenium Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000035945 sensitivity Effects 0.000 description 1
- FZHAPNGMFPVSLP-UHFFFAOYSA-N silanamine Chemical compound [SiH3]N FZHAPNGMFPVSLP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- HBMJWWWQQXIZIP-UHFFFAOYSA-N silicon carbide Chemical compound [Si+]#[C-] HBMJWWWQQXIZIP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910010271 silicon carbide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- HQVNEWCFYHHQES-UHFFFAOYSA-N silicon nitride Chemical compound N12[Si]34N5[Si]62N3[Si]51N64 HQVNEWCFYHHQES-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000004945 silicone rubber Substances 0.000 description 1
- MNMYRUHURLPFQW-UHFFFAOYSA-M silver;dodecanoate Chemical compound [Ag+].CCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O MNMYRUHURLPFQW-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- OHGHHPYRRURLHR-UHFFFAOYSA-M silver;tetradecanoate Chemical compound [Ag+].CCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O OHGHHPYRRURLHR-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- 239000000344 soap Substances 0.000 description 1
- IDVNZMQMDGSYNQ-UHFFFAOYSA-M sodium 2-(naphthalen-1-yldiazenyl)-5-sulfonaphthalen-1-olate Chemical compound [Na+].Oc1c(ccc2c(cccc12)S([O-])(=O)=O)N=Nc1cccc2ccccc12 IDVNZMQMDGSYNQ-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- BTURAGWYSMTVOW-UHFFFAOYSA-M sodium dodecanoate Chemical compound [Na+].CCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O BTURAGWYSMTVOW-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- 229940082004 sodium laurate Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 229940045845 sodium myristate Drugs 0.000 description 1
- RYYKJJJTJZKILX-UHFFFAOYSA-M sodium octadecanoate Chemical compound [Na+].CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O RYYKJJJTJZKILX-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- FRHNXUKHAUWMOQ-UHFFFAOYSA-M sodium;16-methylheptadecanoate Chemical compound [Na+].CC(C)CCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O FRHNXUKHAUWMOQ-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- CVYDEWKUJFCYJO-UHFFFAOYSA-M sodium;docosanoate Chemical compound [Na+].CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O CVYDEWKUJFCYJO-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- MXNUCYGENRZCBO-UHFFFAOYSA-M sodium;ethene;2-methylprop-2-enoate Chemical compound [Na+].C=C.CC(=C)C([O-])=O MXNUCYGENRZCBO-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- YKIBJOMJPMLJTB-UHFFFAOYSA-M sodium;octacosanoate Chemical compound [Na+].CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O YKIBJOMJPMLJTB-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- JUQGWKYSEXPRGL-UHFFFAOYSA-M sodium;tetradecanoate Chemical compound [Na+].CCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O JUQGWKYSEXPRGL-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- 239000000600 sorbitol Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000007921 spray Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000004544 sputter deposition Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000003068 static effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229940037312 stearamide Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 239000008117 stearic acid Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000010959 steel Substances 0.000 description 1
- VEALVRVVWBQVSL-UHFFFAOYSA-N strontium titanate Chemical compound [Sr+2].[O-][Ti]([O-])=O VEALVRVVWBQVSL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229920001909 styrene-acrylic polymer Polymers 0.000 description 1
- IHBMMJGTJFPEQY-UHFFFAOYSA-N sulfanylidene(sulfanylidenestibanylsulfanyl)stibane Chemical compound S=[Sb]S[Sb]=S IHBMMJGTJFPEQY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000001273 sulfonato group Chemical group [O-]S(*)(=O)=O 0.000 description 1
- 239000000725 suspension Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000010558 suspension polymerization method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229920002994 synthetic fiber Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000012209 synthetic fiber Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920001897 terpolymer Polymers 0.000 description 1
- PFBLRDXPNUJYJM-UHFFFAOYSA-N tert-butyl 2-methylpropaneperoxoate Chemical compound CC(C)C(=O)OOC(C)(C)C PFBLRDXPNUJYJM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- GJBRNHKUVLOCEB-UHFFFAOYSA-N tert-butyl benzenecarboperoxoate Chemical compound CC(C)(C)OOC(=O)C1=CC=CC=C1 GJBRNHKUVLOCEB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000012360 testing method Methods 0.000 description 1
- UGKIWQRXZAAROZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N tetracontanediamide Chemical compound NC(=O)CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC(N)=O UGKIWQRXZAAROZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- MJUDKYVSUQWNTB-UHFFFAOYSA-N tetradecanediamide Chemical compound NC(=O)CCCCCCCCCCCCC(N)=O MJUDKYVSUQWNTB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- UWHCKJMYHZGTIT-UHFFFAOYSA-N tetraethylene glycol Chemical compound OCCOCCOCCOCCO UWHCKJMYHZGTIT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- TXEYQDLBPFQVAA-UHFFFAOYSA-N tetrafluoromethane Chemical compound FC(F)(F)F TXEYQDLBPFQVAA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000002230 thermal chemical vapour deposition Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229920002803 thermoplastic polyurethane Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920001187 thermosetting polymer Polymers 0.000 description 1
- DVKJHBMWWAPEIU-UHFFFAOYSA-N toluene 2,4-diisocyanate Chemical compound CC1=CC=C(N=C=O)C=C1N=C=O DVKJHBMWWAPEIU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 150000004992 toluidines Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- KHPCPRHQVVSZAH-UHFFFAOYSA-N trans-cinnamyl beta-D-glucopyranoside Natural products OC1C(O)C(O)C(CO)OC1OCC=CC1=CC=CC=C1 KHPCPRHQVVSZAH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- LDHQCZJRKDOVOX-UHFFFAOYSA-N trans-crotonic acid Natural products CC=CC(O)=O LDHQCZJRKDOVOX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- VJDDQSBNUHLBTD-UHFFFAOYSA-N trans-crotonic acid-anhydride Natural products CC=CC(=O)OC(=O)C=CC VJDDQSBNUHLBTD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- VLCQZHSMCYCDJL-UHFFFAOYSA-N tribenuron methyl Chemical compound COC(=O)C1=CC=CC=C1S(=O)(=O)NC(=O)N(C)C1=NC(C)=NC(OC)=N1 VLCQZHSMCYCDJL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229960001124 trientine Drugs 0.000 description 1
- CPUDPFPXCZDNGI-UHFFFAOYSA-N triethoxy(methyl)silane Chemical compound CCO[Si](C)(OCC)OCC CPUDPFPXCZDNGI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000005591 trimellitate group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 125000005590 trimellitic acid group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 239000013638 trimer Substances 0.000 description 1
- NMEPHPOFYLLFTK-UHFFFAOYSA-N trimethoxy(octyl)silane Chemical compound CCCCCCCC[Si](OC)(OC)OC NMEPHPOFYLLFTK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- UCCYOMWTNBHGGY-UHFFFAOYSA-N trioctadecyl benzene-1,2,4-tricarboxylate Chemical compound CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCOC(=O)C1=CC=C(C(=O)OCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC)C(C(=O)OCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC)=C1 UCCYOMWTNBHGGY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- UJMBCXLDXJUMFB-UHFFFAOYSA-K trisodium;5-oxo-1-(4-sulfonatophenyl)-4-[(4-sulfonatophenyl)diazenyl]-4h-pyrazole-3-carboxylate Chemical compound [Na+].[Na+].[Na+].[O-]C(=O)C1=NN(C=2C=CC(=CC=2)S([O-])(=O)=O)C(=O)C1N=NC1=CC=C(S([O-])(=O)=O)C=C1 UJMBCXLDXJUMFB-UHFFFAOYSA-K 0.000 description 1
- WFKWXMTUELFFGS-UHFFFAOYSA-N tungsten Chemical compound [W] WFKWXMTUELFFGS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910052721 tungsten Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000010937 tungsten Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000011144 upstream manufacturing Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000001771 vacuum deposition Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000002966 varnish Substances 0.000 description 1
- KJPJZBYFYBYKPK-UHFFFAOYSA-N vat yellow 1 Chemical compound C12=CC=CC=C2C(=O)C2=CC=C3N=C4C5=CC=CC=C5C(=O)C5=C4C4=C3C2=C1N=C4C=C5 KJPJZBYFYBYKPK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- KOZCZZVUFDCZGG-UHFFFAOYSA-N vinyl benzoate Chemical compound C=COC(=O)C1=CC=CC=C1 KOZCZZVUFDCZGG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229920001567 vinyl ester resin Polymers 0.000 description 1
- FUSUHKVFWTUUBE-UHFFFAOYSA-N vinyl methyl ketone Natural products CC(=O)C=C FUSUHKVFWTUUBE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000004073 vulcanization Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000005406 washing Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000001060 yellow colorant Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910052725 zinc Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000011701 zinc Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229940098697 zinc laurate Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 229940105125 zinc myristate Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 229940012185 zinc palmitate Drugs 0.000 description 1
- LPEBYPDZMWMCLZ-CVBJKYQLSA-L zinc;(z)-octadec-9-enoate Chemical compound [Zn+2].CCCCCCCC\C=C/CCCCCCCC([O-])=O.CCCCCCCC\C=C/CCCCCCCC([O-])=O LPEBYPDZMWMCLZ-CVBJKYQLSA-L 0.000 description 1
- MPLUJWVUQCBCBX-UHFFFAOYSA-L zinc;16-methylheptadecanoate Chemical compound [Zn+2].CC(C)CCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O.CC(C)CCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O MPLUJWVUQCBCBX-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- IJQXGKBNDNQWAT-UHFFFAOYSA-L zinc;docosanoate Chemical compound [Zn+2].CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O.CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O IJQXGKBNDNQWAT-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- GPYYEEJOMCKTPR-UHFFFAOYSA-L zinc;dodecanoate Chemical compound [Zn+2].CCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O.CCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O GPYYEEJOMCKTPR-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- GJAPSKMAVXDBIU-UHFFFAOYSA-L zinc;hexadecanoate Chemical compound [Zn+2].CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O.CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O GJAPSKMAVXDBIU-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- GBFLQPIIIRJQLU-UHFFFAOYSA-L zinc;tetradecanoate Chemical compound [Zn+2].CCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O.CCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O GBFLQPIIIRJQLU-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- 229910001928 zirconium oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
Images
Classifications
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G03—PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
- G03G—ELECTROGRAPHY; ELECTROPHOTOGRAPHY; MAGNETOGRAPHY
- G03G9/00—Developers
- G03G9/08—Developers with toner particles
- G03G9/087—Binders for toner particles
- G03G9/08775—Natural macromolecular compounds or derivatives thereof
- G03G9/08782—Waxes
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G03—PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
- G03G—ELECTROGRAPHY; ELECTROPHOTOGRAPHY; MAGNETOGRAPHY
- G03G11/00—Selection of substances for use as fixing agents
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G03—PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
- G03G—ELECTROGRAPHY; ELECTROPHOTOGRAPHY; MAGNETOGRAPHY
- G03G15/00—Apparatus for electrographic processes using a charge pattern
- G03G15/20—Apparatus for electrographic processes using a charge pattern for fixing, e.g. by using heat
- G03G15/2003—Apparatus for electrographic processes using a charge pattern for fixing, e.g. by using heat using heat
- G03G15/2014—Apparatus for electrographic processes using a charge pattern for fixing, e.g. by using heat using heat using contact heat
- G03G15/2017—Structural details of the fixing unit in general, e.g. cooling means, heat shielding means
- G03G15/2025—Structural details of the fixing unit in general, e.g. cooling means, heat shielding means with special means for lubricating and/or cleaning the fixing unit, e.g. applying offset preventing fluid
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G03—PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
- G03G—ELECTROGRAPHY; ELECTROPHOTOGRAPHY; MAGNETOGRAPHY
- G03G9/00—Developers
- G03G9/08—Developers with toner particles
- G03G9/087—Binders for toner particles
- G03G9/08742—Binders for toner particles comprising macromolecular compounds obtained otherwise than by reactions only involving carbon-to-carbon unsaturated bonds
- G03G9/08755—Polyesters
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G03—PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
- G03G—ELECTROGRAPHY; ELECTROPHOTOGRAPHY; MAGNETOGRAPHY
- G03G9/00—Developers
- G03G9/08—Developers with toner particles
- G03G9/087—Binders for toner particles
- G03G9/08784—Macromolecular material not specially provided for in a single one of groups G03G9/08702 - G03G9/08775
- G03G9/08795—Macromolecular material not specially provided for in a single one of groups G03G9/08702 - G03G9/08775 characterised by their chemical properties, e.g. acidity, molecular weight, sensitivity to reactants
Definitions
- the present invention relates to an electrophotographic image forming method.
- the technique causes other problems such that the inner temperature of the image forming apparatus increases, resulting in deterioration of the image forming materials such as toners, and photoreceptors; the life of the fixing members shortens; and a large amount of energy is consumed. Namely, the technique is not satisfactory Therefore, a need exists for a toner which can be well fixed in a small amount of energy even when high speed image formation is performed.
- JP-As Japanese patent applications Nos. 60-90344 , 64-15755 , 02-82267 , 03-229264 , 03-41470 , and 11-305486 have disclosed to use polyester resins as binder resins instead of styrene - acrylic resins which have been conventionally used as binder resins. This is because polyester resins are superior to styrene - acrylic resins with respect to low temperature fixability and high temperature preservability.
- JP-A 62-63940 discloses a toner including a specific crystalline non-olefin polymer, which can be sharply melted at the glass transition temperature thereof, as one of binder resins.
- JP-As 11-249339 and 2001-222138 have disclosed to use a crystalline polyester resin having a sharp melting property as one of binder resins.
- JP-A 2002-214833 discloses to use a combination of a crystalline polyester resin and a non-crystalline polyester resin as binder resins, which form a phase separation structure (i.e.
- island-sea structure and which include tetrahydrofuran-soluble components having a specific differential scanning calorimetry (DSC) curve such that a maximum endothermic peak is observed at a specific temperature to impart good combination of low temperature fixability and high temperature preservability to the tone.
- DSC differential scanning calorimetry
- fixing devices often cause problems in that when image fixation is performed, the surface of a fixing member is contaminated with toner particles, which are transferred from toner images to be fixed on a receiving material sheet, and thereby the toner particles are re-transferred to the sheet or another sheet, thereby soiling images, or a receiving material sheet is wound around the fixing member by being affixed to the melted toner particles on the fixing member, resulting in occurrence of a jamming problem.
- techniques in that a releasing oil is applied to a fixing member have been proposed and used.
- toner including a release agent is used.
- oil applicators have been disclosed.
- oil application devices including an oil application roller having a heat resistant felt or a porous layer on the surface thereof, which is soaked with an oil, is pressed to a fixing member to apply the oil thereto have been proposed and used.
- toner images on a receiving material cannot be well fixed due to insufficient fixation energy although the fixing member has good releasability from the toner images, resulting in prevention of occurrence of an offset problem.
- EP-A-1168089 relates to a toner including mother toner particles including at least two resins A and B and a wax each of which is incompatible with the others; and an external additive including at least one of a particulate inorganic material and a particulate resin.
- EP-A-1111474 relates to an image forming method including the steps of forming an electrostatic latent image on a latent image holding member; developing the electrostatic latent image by using a color toner to form a toner image; transferring the toner image onto a recording material; and fixing the toner image to the recording material by a heat fixing device comprising a fixing film for contacting the toner image on the recording material, a heating member for heating the fixing film, and a pressing member for imparting a pressure to the recording material, wherein the color toner contains at least a binder resin, a colorant and wax.
- an image forming method which includes:
- the oil spreading property (OSP) is determined by a method including:
- fixing devices with an oil applicator are typically used for effectively fixing images of toner including no release agent (such as waxes)
- no release agent such as waxes
- the releasability of the fixing member from toner can be enhanced, but another problem is caused by the applied oil Therefore, recently combinations of toner including a release agent and a fixing device without an oil applicator are typically used In this case, it is impossible to produce high quality images having good fixing property at a high speed.
- the present inventors have been studying to solve the problems mentioned above. As a result of the study, the following knowledge can be attained. Specifically, as a result of experiments in which an oil is dropped on pellets of various toners to determine the oil spreading property thereof, it is found that the smaller oil spreading property a toner has, the better fixability the toner has. Further, it is found that by using a combination of toner having a small oil spreading property (i.e., satisfying the above-mentioned relationship (A)) with a fixing device having an oil applicator, the above-mentioned problems can be solved.
- the image forming apparatus suitable for the present invention includes at least an image bearing member; a latent image forming device (such as combinations of' a charging device and a light irradiating device) configured to form an electrostatic latent image on the image bearing member; a developing device configured to develop the electrostatic latent image with a developer including a toner to form a toner image on the image bearing member; a transfer device configured to transfer the toner image onto a receiving material optionally via an intermediate transfer medium; a fixing device configured to fix the toner image on the receiving material; and an oil applicator configured to apply an oil (such as silicone oils) to a fixing member of the fixing device
- an oil such as silicone oils
- the image forming apparatus can optionally include a cleaning device configured to clean the surface of'the image bearing member; a discharging device configured to discharge charges remaining on the surface of'the image bearing member after the image transfer operation; a toner recycling device configured to recycle the toner particles collected by the cleaning device; a controller configured to control the image forming operations of'the image forming apparatus; etc.
- the image forming method of'the present invention includes at least a latent image forming process (such as combinations of a charging process and a light irradiating process), a developing process, an image transfer process, and a fixing process.
- the image forming method can optionally include a cleaning process, a discharging process, a toner recycling process, a controlling process, etc.
- the image forming method is preferably performed using the image forming apparatus of the present invention, and the latent image forming process, developing process, image transfer process, and fixing process are preferably performed by the latent image forming device (such as combinations of a charging device and a light irradiating device), developing device, transfer device, and fixing device of the present invention.
- the cleaning process, discharging process, toner recycling process and controlling process are performed by the cleaning device, discharging device, toner recycling device, and controller.
- the toner includes at least a binder resin, a colorant, and a wax
- the toner has the following property. Specifically, at first, about 2 g of the toner is subjected to a compression molding at a pressure of 100 kg/cm 2 to form a cylindrical pellet of' the toner having a diameter of' about 40 mm and a thickness of about 2 mm. The pellet is then heated for 5 minutes on a hot plate heated to 180 °C under an environmental condition of 23 °C and 55%RH The pellet is then set on a horizontal plate under the environmental condition so that the flat surface of'the cylindrical pellet faces upward, to be cooled. Nine (9) milligrams of the oil used for the oil applicator is dropped on the flat surface of the pellet from a point 1 cm above the flat surface of the pellet.
- the oil spreading property is less than 200%, preferably not greater than 150%, and more preferably not greater than 125%.
- the oil spreading property is too large, an abrasion problem in that fixed toner images are easily abraded by receiving material sheets and the toner powder formed by the abrasion of the toner images is adhered to the receiving material sheet or image forming members such as rollers, resulting in soiling of the backside of copies and contamination of'the image forming members.
- the toner preferably includes an amide wax, and the amount of nitrogen atoms of the amide wax in a pellet of'the toner determined by the following XPS method is from 0.5 to 3.0 atomic % based on the total of the detected atoms
- the method for determining the amount of nitrogen atoms of the amide wax includes:
- the amount of nitrogen atoms can be determined from the strength of the peak specific to nitrogen atoms.
- the penetration depth of the XPS is generally few nanometers.
- the image forming apparatus used in the present invention has a system linear speed of from 500 to 2000 mm/sec, and preferably from 1000 to 1800 mm/sec When the system linear speed is too low, the effects of'the present invention cannot be well produced. In contrast, when the system linear speed is too high, the developing process, transfer process and fixing process are insufficiently performed.
- the image beating member of the image forming apparatus of the present invention is not particularly limited with respect to the constitutional materials, shape, structure, size, etc
- shape, drum-form, sheet-form, and endless belt -form image bearing members can be used.
- structure single-layered structures and multi-layered structures can be adopted. The size is determined depending on the specification of the image forming apparatus
- the image bearing member is typically a photoreceptor such as inorganic photoreceptors including an inorganic photosensitive material such as amorphous silicon, selenium, CdS, and ZnO; and organic photoreceptors (OPCs) including an organic photosensitive material such as polysilane and phthalopolymethine
- Amorphous silicon photoreceptors for use in the present invention are typically prepared by the following method.
- a substrate is heated to a temperature of from 50 to 400 °C, and an amorphous silicon layer is formed thereon by a method such as vacuum deposition methods, sputtering methods, ion plating methods, thermal CVD (chemical vapor deposition) methods, photo-assisted CVD methods, and plasma CVD methods.
- plasma CVD methods are preferably used.
- raw gaseous materials are decomposed by glow discharge using direct current (DC), high frequency waves, or microwaves to form an amorphous silicon layer on the substrate
- Organic photoreceptors are typically used because of'having:
- the organic photoreceptors are classified into photoreceptors having a single-layered photosensitive layer, and photoreceptors having a multi-layered photosensitive layer
- the single-layered photoreceptors include a single-layered photosensitive layer formed on a substrate, and optionally include one or more other layers such as protective layers, and intermediate layers.
- the multi-layered photoreceptors include a multi-layered photosensitive layer, which is formed on a substrate and which includes plural layers such as charge generation layers and charge transport layers, and optionally include one or more other layers such as protective layers, and intermediate layers.
- the image bearing member is charged with a charging device.
- the charging device is not particularly limited as long as the device can uniformly charge an image bearing member.
- the charging device is broadly classified into (1) contact charging devices which charges an image bearing member by contacting a charging member therewith; and (2) noncontact charging devices which charges an image bearing member using a noncontact charging member.
- the contact charging devices include devices which charge an image bearing member using a charging member such as charging roller s, magnetic brushes, fur brushes, films, and rubber blades.
- a charging member such as charging roller s, magnetic brushes, fur brushes, films, and rubber blades.
- charging rollers are preferably used because the amount of'ozone generated by the charging process can be dramatically decreased. Therefore, an image bearing member can be stably used repeatedly, and thereby high quality images can be repeatedly produced.
- Magnetic brushes for use in contact charging devices typically include a non-magnetic electroconductive sleeve bearing thereon a particulate ferrite such as Zn-Cu ferrites, and a magnet roller arranged inside the sleeve
- Fur brushes for use in contact charging devices typically include a support such as metal shafts and metal wires, and a fur which is wound around or affixed to the support and is subjected to an electroconductive treatment using carbon, copper sulfide, a metal or a metal oxide.
- FIG 1 illustrates the cross section of a charging roller
- a charging roller 310 includes a cylindrical substrate 311, a resistivity controlling layer 312 formed on the substrate, and a protective layer 313 formed on the resistivity controlling layer to protect the layer and to prevent occurrence of a leaking problem in that a large current flows between the charging roller and (a defect of) the photoreceptor.
- the resistivity controlling layer 312 is typically formed on the surface of a substrate by subjecting a thermoplastic resin including a polymeric ion conducting agent to extrusion molding or injection molding
- the volume resistivity of the resistivity controlling layer 312 is preferably from 10 6 to 10 9 ⁇ ⁇ cm.
- the volume resistivity of the resistivity controlling layer 312 is preferably from 10 6 to 10 9 ⁇ ⁇ cm.
- the material of the resistivity controlling layer 312 is not particularly limited. Specific examples of the material include polyethylene, polypropylene, polymethyl methacrylate, polystyrene, styrene copolymers (e.g., acrylonitrile - styrene copolymers (AS), and acrylonitrile - butadiene - styrene copolymers (ABS)).
- AS acrylonitrile - styrene copolymers
- ABS acrylonitrile - butadiene - styrene copolymers
- Suitable polymeric ion conducting agents include materials having a volume resistivity of from 10 6 to 10 9 ⁇ ⁇ cm. Specific examples thereof include compounds including a polyether ester amide component The added amount of such compounds is 30 to 70 parts by weight per 100 parts by weight of the thermoplastic resin used to control the resistivity of'the resistivity controlling layer 312 in the preferable range.
- polymers having a quaternary ammonium salt group such as polyolefins having a quaternary ammonium salt group
- the added amount of such polymers is 10 to 40 parts by weight per 100 parts by weight of the thermoplastic resin used.
- kneaders such as double-axis kneaders are preferably used.
- molecules of the polymeric ion conducting agent are uniformly dispersed in the thermoplastic resin, and therefore the resultant resistivity controlling layer has a less resistivity variation than conventional resistivity controlling layers including an electroconductive pigment therein.
- a bleed-out problem such that an electroconductive material included in a layer bleeds from the layer is hardly caused.
- the protective layer 313 has a higher resistivity than the resistivity controlling layer 312 to prevent occurrence of the leaking problem. However, when the resistivity of the protective layer is too high, the charging efficiency of the charging roller deteriorates.
- the difference in resistivity between the protective layer and the resistivity controlling layer is preferably not greater than 10 3 ⁇ ⁇ cm.
- Resins are typically used for the protective layer 313 because of having a good film formability.
- non-tacky resins such as fluorine-containing resins, polyamide resins, polyester resins, and polyvinyl acetal resins are used for the protective layer to prevent toner particles from adhering thereto.
- resins are typically insulators, and therefore a charging roller having a protective layer made of only such a resin does not fulfill the requirements for the charging roller. Therefore it is preferable to control the resistivity of the protective layer 313 by adding an electroconductive material thereto.
- a reactive crosslinking agent such as isocyanates with the resin used for the protective layer 313 to improve the adhesion of the protective layer to the resistivity controlling layer 312.
- a power source is connected with the charging roller 310 to apply a predetermined voltage such as DC voltages and combinations of DC and AC voltages.
- a predetermined voltage such as DC voltages and combinations of DC and AC voltages.
- FIG. 2 illustrates an image forming apparatus using the contact charging roller 310 as a contact charging member
- the image forming apparatus illustrated in FIG 2 has a photoreceptor drum 321 serving as an image bearing member, and a charging device including the charging roller 310 for charging the photoreceptor drum, a light irradiator 323 configured to irradiate the charged photoreceptor with imagewise light to form an electrostatic latent image on the photoreceptor drum, a developing device 324 configured to develop the electrostatic latent image with a developer including a toner to form a toner image on the photoreceptor drum, a transfer device 325 configured to transfer the toner image on a receiving material sheet 326, a fixing device 327 configured to fix the toner image on the receiving material sheet, a cleaning device 330 configured to remove toner particles remaining on the photoreceptor drum, and a discharging device 331 configured to discharge charges remaining on the photoreceptor drum. These devices are arranged around the photoreceptor drum 321.
- noncontact charging devices include noncontact chargers utilizing corona discharging, chargers having a needle electrode or a solid state discharging element, charges including an electroconductive or semi-conductive charging roller set close to an image bearing member.
- Chargers utilizing corona discharging cause corona discharging in the air to generate positive or negative ions, thereby charging an image bearing member.
- Specific examples thereof include corotron chargers supplying charges with a constant charge quantity, and scorotron chargers supplying charges to form a constant potential on an image bearing member
- Corotron chargers include a discharging wire and a casing set above the wire to surround the upper space of'the discharging wire. Scorotron chargers is the same as the corotron chargers except that a grid is arranged below the wire. The distance between the grid and the surface of'the image bearing member is generally from 1.0 to 2.0 mm
- FIG 3 illustrates an image forming apparatus using the charging roller 310 as a noncontact charging member
- the charging roller is set close to the surface of the photoreceptor drum 321 while a gap of from 10 to 200 ⁇ m (preferably from 10 to 100 ⁇ m) is formed therebetween
- FIG. 4 is a side view of the charging device illustrated in FIG. 3
- the charging roller 310 is set near the photoreceptor drum 321 while a small gap H is formed therebetween by spacers 302.
- the spacers 302 are contacted with non-image-forming areas of the photoreceptor drum 321.
- the spacers are formed by winding a film on both end portions of the charging roller 310
- Numeral 304 denotes a power source for applying a voltage (e g , a DC voltage overlapped with an AC voltage) to the charging roller.
- a voltage e g , a DC voltage overlapped with an AC voltage
- the spacers 302 may be formed by an integral molding method when the charging roller is prepared.
- the surface of the spacers is made of'an insulator to prevent occurrence of discharging at the contact points between the spacers and the photoreceptor drum. By preventing occurrence of discharging, a problem in that discharge products are adhered to the surface of the spacers and thereby the gap H is widened can be avoided.
- a heat shrinkable tube may be used for the spacers 302. Specific examples thereof include SUMIIUBE F105°C from Sumitomo Chemical Co., Ltd., which can be used at 105 °C.
- a light irradiating device irradiates the charged image bearing member with imagewise light to form an electrostatic latent image on the image bearing member
- the light irradiation device is broadly classified into analogue optical devices and digital optical devices.
- analogue optical devices light reflected from an original image is directly projected on an image bearing member (such as photoreceptors) to form an electrostatic image of'the original image.
- digital optical devices an original image is changed to electric signals The digital optical devices irradiate an image bearing member according to the signals to apply optical signals thereto
- the light irradiating device is not particularly limited, and any known devices can be used. Specific examples thereof include optical systems for use in copiers, rod lens arrays, optical systems using a laser, a liquid crystal shutter, a LED, or the like
- Light irradiating methods in which light irradiates an image bearing member from the inside of the image bearing member can also be used.
- an electrostatic latent image formed on an image bearing member is developed with a developer including a toner using a developing device.
- the developing device is not particularly limited, and any developing devices can be used as long as the devices develop an electrostatic image with a developer including a toner.
- devices which contain a developer including a toner and which applies the toner to an electrostatic image by contacting the toner with the electrostatic image or without contacting the toner with the electrostatic image.
- the toner for use in the image forming apparatus includes at least a binder resin, a colorant and a wax, and optionally includes a charge controlling agent, an external additive, etc.
- the binder resin is not particularly limited, and known resins can be used therefor Suitable resins for use as the binder resin include copolymers obtained by two or more kinds of vinyl monomers such as styrene-based monomers, acrylic monomers, and methacrylic monomers; polyester resins, polyol resins, phenolic resins, silicone resins, polyurethane resins, polyamide resins, furan resins, epoxy resins, xylene resins, terpene resins, coumarone-indene resins, polycarbonate resins, petroleum resins.
- vinyl monomers such as styrene-based monomers, acrylic monomers, and methacrylic monomers
- polyester resins polyol resins, phenolic resins, silicone resins, polyurethane resins, polyamide resins, furan resins, epoxy resins, xylene resins, terpene resins, coumarone-indene resins, polycarbonate resins, petroleum resins.
- styrene-based monomers include styrene derivatives such as styrene, o-methylstyrene, m-methylstyrene, p-methylstyrene, p-phenylstyrene, p-ethyl styrene, 2,4-dimethylstyrene, p-n-amylstyrene, p-tert-butylstyrene, p-n-hexylstyrene, p-n-octylstyrene, p-n-nonylstyrene, p-n-decylstyrene, p-n-dodecylstyrene, p-methoxystyrene, p-chlorostyrene, 3,4-dichlorostyrene, m-nitrostyrene, o-nitrostyren
- acrylic monomers include acrylic acid, methyl acrylate, ethyl acrylate, propyl acrylate, n-butyl acrylate, iso-butyl acrylate, n-octyl acryalte, n-dodecyl acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl acryalte, stearyl acrylate, 2-chloroethyl acrylate, phenyl acrylate, esters of these acrylic monomers.
- the methacrylic monomers include methacrylic acid, methyl methacrylate, ethyl methacrylate, propyl methacrylate, n-butyl methacrylate, iso-butyl methacrylate, n-octyl methacryalte, n-dodecyl methacrylate, 2-ethylhexyl methacryalte, stearyl methacrylate, phenyl methacrylate, diethylaminoethyl methacrylate, esters of these methacrylic monomers.
- styrene copolymers and styrene - acrylic copolymers are preferably used as the binder resin.
- the binder resin of the toner can have a crosslinked structure formed by using a crosslinking agent having two or more vinyl groups
- a crosslinking agent having two or more vinyl groups
- a crosslinking agent include aromatic divinyl compounds such as divinyl benzene, and divinyl naphthalene; di(meth)acrylate compounds, in which (meth)acrylate compounds are connected with an alkyl chain, such as ethylene glycol di(meth)acrylate, 1,3-butylene glycol di(meth)acrylate, 1,4-butanediol di(meth)acrylate, 1,5-pentanediol di(meth)acrylate, 1,6-hexanediol di(meth)acrylate, and neopentylglycol di(meth)acrylate; di(meth)acrylate compounds, in which (meth)acrylate compounds are connected with an alkyl chain having an ether bond, such as diethylene glycol di(meth)acryl
- polyfunctional crosslinking agents include pentaerythritol tri(meth)acrylate, trimethylolethane tri(meth)acrylate, trimethylolpropane triacrylate, tetramethylolmethane tetraacrylate, oligoester acrylate, triaryl cyanurate, triaryl trimellitate.
- aromatic divinyl compounds preferably divinyl benzene
- diacrylate compounds having a chain including an aromatic group and an ether bond are preferably used because of imparting a good combination of fixability and offset resistance to the toner
- the added amount of'these crosslinking agents is from 0.01 to 10 parts by weight, and preferably from 0.0.3 to 5 parts by weight, per 100 parts by weight of monomers used for preparing the binder resin.
- the resins When styrene - acrylic resins are used as the binder resin, the resins preferably include tetrahydrofuran-soluble components having a molecular weight distribution (determined by gel permeation chromatography (GPC)) such that at least one peak is present in a number average molecular weight range of from 3,000 to 50,000 and at least one peak is present in a range of not less than 100,000.
- GPC gel permeation chromatography
- resins including tetrahydrofuran-soluble components having a molecular weight of not greater than 100,000 in an amount of from 50 to 90% by weight are preferably used.
- resins including tetrahydrofuran-soluble components having a molecular weight distribution such that a main peak is present in a range of from 5,000 to 30,000 and preferably from 5,000 to 20,000 are more (preferably used.
- the resins when vinyl resins such as styrene - acrylic resins are used as the binder resin, the resins preferably have an acid value of from 0.1 to 100 mgKOH/g, preferably from 0.1 to 70 mgKOH/g, and more preferably from 01 to 50 mgKOH/g
- Suitable polyester resins for use as the binder resin include polyester resins obtained by reacting one or more alcohol components with one or more acid components.
- alcohol components include dihydric alcohols such as ethylene glycol, propylene glycol, 1,3-butanediol, 1,4-butanediol, 2,3-butanediol, diethylene glycol, triethylene glycol, 1,5-pentanediol, 1,6-hexanediol, neopentylglycol, 2-ethyl-1,3-hexanediol, hydrogenated bisphenol A, and diols obtained by reacting a ring ether (e.g., ethylene oxide and propylene oxide) with bisphenol A; and polyhydric alcohols having three or more hydroxyl groups such as sorbitol, 1,2,3,6-hexanetetraol, 1,4-sorbitane, pentaerythritol, dipentaerythritol, tripentaerythritol, 1,2,4-butanetriol, 1,2,5-pentanetriol,
- the acid components include dibasic acids such as benzene dicarboxylic acids such as phthalic acid, isophthalic acid, terephthalic acid, and their anhydrides; alkyldicarboxylic acid such as succinic acid, adipic acid, sebacic acid, azelaic acid, and their anhydrides; and unsaturated dibasic acids such as maleic acid, citraconic acid, itaconic aicd, alkenylsuccinic acid, fumaric acid, mesaconic acid, and their anhydrides; and polybasic acids having three or more carboxyl groups such as trimellitic acid, pyromellitic acid, 1,2,4-benzentricarboxylic acid, 1,2,5-benzentricarboxylic acid, 2,5,7-naphthalenetricarboxylic acid, 1,2,4-naphthalenetricarboxylic acid, 1,2,4-butanetricarboxylic acid, 1,2,5-hexanetricar
- the resins When polyester resins are used as the binder resin, the resins preferably include tetrahydrofuran-soluble components having a molecular weight distribution (determined by GPC) such that at least one peak is present in a molecular weight range of from 3,000 to 50,000. In this case, a good combination of fixabililty, offset resistance and preservability can be imparted to the toner Among these resins, polyester resins including tetrahydrofuran-soluble components having a molecular weight of not greater than 100,000 in an amount of from 60 to 100% by weight are preferably used. Further, polyester resins including tetrahydrofuran-soluble components having a molecular weight distribution such that at least one peak is present in a range of from 5,000 to 20,000 are more preferably used.
- GPC molecular weight distribution
- Polyester resins having an acid value of from 0 1 to 100 mgKOH/g, preferably from 0.1 to 70 mgKOH/g, and more preferably from 0.1 to 50 mgKOH/g, are preferably used as the binder resin.
- At least one of'the polyester resin and vinyl resin can include a unit having a group which is reactive with the other resin.
- the monomers for forming the polyester resin and having a group reactive with vinyl resins include unsaturated dicarboxylic acids such as phthalic acid, maleic acid, citraconic acid, itaconic acid, anhydrides of the acids, etc.
- Specific examples of the monomers for forming the vinyl resin and having a group reactive with polyester resins include monomers having a carboxyl group or a hydroxyl group, esters of (meth)acrylic acid, etc
- the combined binder resin preferably includes resins having an acid value of from 0.1 to 50 mgKOH/g in an amount of not less than 60% by weight.
- the acid value is determined by the method described in JIS K0070, which is as follows.
- the acid value (AV) of the sample is calculated by the following equation (1).
- AV mgKOH / g S - B ⁇ f ⁇ 5 61 ) / W
- S represents the amount of KOH consumed in the titration
- B represents the amount of KOH consumed in the titration when a blank (i.e, a toluene/ethanol mixture solvent) is subjected to the titration
- f represents the factor of N/10 potassium hydroxide
- W represents the precise weight of'the sample.
- Each of the binder resin of'the toner and the toner preferably has a glass transition temperature (Tg) of from 55 to 70 °C, and more preferably from 57 to 70 °C, In this case, the toner has good preservability.
- Tg glass transition temperature
- the toner deteriorates under high temperature conditions, and causes an offset problem in a fixing process.
- the fixability of the toner deteriorates
- the toner of the present invention can include a crystalline polyester resin to improve the low temperature fixability thereof.
- crystalline aliphatic polyester resins having the following formula (1) (i.e., an ester bond) in a main chain in an amount of not less than 60% by mole are preferable -OCO-R-COO-(CH 2 ) n - formula (1)
- R represents the residual group of an unsaturated linear fatty acid (dicarboxylic acid), which has 2 to 20 carbon atoms, and preferably from 2 to 4 carbon atoms; and n is an integer of from 2 to 20 and preferably from 2 to 6.
- Whether or not a resin has the structure having formula (1) can be determined by solid 13 C-NMR.
- unsaturated linear fatty acids having a formula -OCO-R-COO- include maleic acid, fumaric acid, 1,3-n-propenedicarboxylic acid, 1,4-n-butenedicarboxylic acid, etc
- -(CH 2 ) n - represents the residual group of a dihydric linear aliphatic alcohol.
- linear aliphatic alcohols include ethylene glycol, 1,3-propylene glycol, 1,4-butanediol, 1,6-hexanediol, etc.
- Polyester resins prepared by using an unsaturated linear dicarboxylic acid form a crystalline structure more easily than polyester resins prepared by using an unsaturated aromatic dicarboxylic acid.
- the crystalline polyester resins for use in the toner of the present invention can be produced by subjecting the following components (1) and (2) to a polycondensation reaction in a usual manner.
- polycarboxylic acids include:
- polycarboxylic acids (1) to (3) can be included in an amount such that the resultant polyester resin does not lose the crystallinity Specifically, the added amount thereof is generally not greater than 30 % by mole, and preferably not greater than 10 % by mole, based on the total amount of the carboxylic acids used.
- polycarboxylic acids to be optionally used include dicarboxylic acids such as malonic acid, succinic acid, glutaric acid, adipic acid, suberic acid, sebacic acid, citraconic acid, phthalic acid, isophthalic acid, and terephthalic acid; and tri- or more- carboxylic acid units such as trimellitic anhydride, 1,2,4-benzenetricarboxylic acid, 1,2,5-benzenetricarboxylic acid, 1,2,4-cyclohexanetricarboxylic acid, 1,2,4-naphthalenetricarboxylic acid, 1,2,5-hexanetricarboxylic acid, 1,3-dicarboxyl-2-methylenecarboxypropane, and 1,2,7,8-octanetetracarboxylic acid.
- dicarboxylic acids such as malonic acid, succinic acid, glutaric acid, adipic acid, suberic acid, sebacic acid, citraconic acid,
- polyhydric alcohols such as branched dihydric alcohols, cyclic dihydric alcohols, and tri- or more- hydric alcohols can be included in combination with the above-mentioned polyhydric alcohols to an extent such that the resultant polyester resin does not lose the crystallinity
- the added amount is generally not greater than 30 % by mole, and preferably not greater than 10 % by mole, based on the total amount of'the alcohols used.
- polyhydric alcohols to be optionally added include 1,4-bis(hydroxymethyl)cyclohexane, polyethylene glycol, ethylene oxide adduct of' bisphenol A, propylene oxide adduct of bisphenol A, glycerin.
- Crystalline polyester resins included in the toner preferably have a relatively low molecular weight and a sharp molecular weight distribution to impart good low temperature fixability to the toner
- crystalline polyester resins having a weight average molecular weight (Mw) of from 5,500 to 6,500, a number average molecular weight (Mn) of from 1,300 to 1,500 and a Mw/Mn ratio of from 2 to 5, which are determined from the molecular weight distributions of o-dichlorobenzen-soluble components of'the resins determined by GPC, are preferably used
- the molecular weight distribution of a crystalline polyester resin can be determined from a molecular weight distribution graph in which the molecular weight of components in the logarithm unit (log M) is plotted on the horizontal axis and the weight percentage of the components is plotted on the vertical axis.
- Crystalline polyester resins having a peak, which preferably has a half width of not greater than 1.5, in a range of from 3.5 to 4 0 (% by weight) are preferably used as the binder resin of the toner of the present invention.
- the glass transition temperature (Ig) and the softening point [T(F1/2)] of the crystalline polyester resin included in the toner are preferably as low as possible as long as the high temperature preservability of the resultant toner does not deteriorate Specifically, the glass transition temperature of the crystalline polyester resin is generally from 80 to 130 °C and preferably from 80 to 125 °C.
- the softening point [I(F1/2)] thereof is generally from 80 to 130 °C, and preferably from 80 to 125 °C.
- Suitable waxes include waxes having a carbonyl group, polyolefin waxes, amide waxes, long chain hydrocarbons, salts of aliphatic carboxylic acids.
- waxes having a carbonyl group include polyalkane acid esters such as carnauba wax, montan waxes, trimethylolpropane tribehenate, pentaerythritol tetrabehenate, pentaerythritol diacetate dibehenate, glycerin tribehenate, and 1,18-octadecanediol distearate; polyalkanol esters such as tristearyl trimellitate, and distearyl maleate; polyalkylamides such as trimellitic acid tristearylamide; dialkyl ketone such as distearyl ketone, etc. Among these materials, polyalkane acid esters are preferable.
- polyolefin waxes include polyethylene waxes and polypropylene waxes.
- amide waxes include lauramide, palmitamide, stearamide, ercamide, behenamide, N-stearylstearamide, methylolstearamide, methylolbehenamide, dimethytol amide, dimethyllauramide, dimethylstearamide, N-palmitylpalmitamide, ethylenbiscapronamide, methylenbisstearamide, ethylenebislauramide, hexamethylenebisoleamide, hexamethylenebisstearamide, butylenebisstearamide, m-xylylenebisstearamide, m-xylylenebis-12-hydroxystearamide, N,N'-dioleyladipamide, N,N'-distearyladipamide, N,N'-distearylisophthalamide, N,N'-distearylterephthalamide, N-butyl-N'-stearylurea, N-propyl-N'-stearylurea
- long chain hydrocarbons include paraffin waxes, SAZOL waxes, etc.
- salts of aliphatic carboxylic acids include sodium laurate, potassium laurate, hydrogen potassium laurate, magnesium laurate, calcium laurate, zinc laurate, silver laurate, lithium myristate, sodium myristate, potassium hydrogen myristate, magnesium myristate, calcium myristate, zinc myristate, silver myristate, lithium palmitate, potassium palmitate, magnesium palmitate, magnesium palmitate, calcium palmitate, zinc palmitate, copper palmitate, lead palmitate, thallium palmitate, cobalt palmitate, sodium oleate, potassium oleate, magnesium oleate, calcium oleate, zinc oleate, lead oleate, thallium oleate, copper oleate, nickel oleate, sodium stearate, lithium stearate, magnesium stearate, calcium stearate, barium stearate, aluminum stearate, thallium stearate, lead stearate, nickel stearate,
- the power includes an amide waxe.
- a toner including an amide wax is used for image forming apparatus equipped with a fixing device having an oil coating device coating a silicone oil
- the amide wax exuding from a toner image forms a film on the toner image Since the film repels the silicone oil (i e , the silicone oil does not penetrate into the toner image), the toner image has good abrasion resistance.
- the content of the wax in the toner is preferably from 1.5 to 9 parts by weight, and more preferably from 2 to 8 parts by weight, per 100 parts by weight of the binder resin included in the toner.
- the content is too low, the toner has poor releasability from fixing members
- the content is too high, the amount of wax in a surface portion of the toner increases, resulting in decrease of'the charge quantity of the toner.
- the content of the amide wax in the toner is preferably from 0.5 to 5 parts by weight, and more preferably from 1 to 4 parts by weight, per 100 parts by weight of the binder resin included in the toner.
- the fixability improving effect i.e., oil spread preventing effect
- the content is too high, problems in that the charge quantity of the toner decreases and a toner film is formed on carrier particles and image forming members such as developing rollers occur.
- the melting point of the wax included in the toner is preferably from 70 to 165 °C.
- the melting point is too low, the toner has poor high temperature preservability.
- the melting point is too high, the toner causes a cold offset in that when a toner image is fixed by a fixing member at a relatively low temperature, the toner image is transferred to the fixing member
- the melt viscosity of the wax included in the toner is preferably from 0.005 to 1 Pa ⁇ s (5 to 1000 cps), and more preferably from 0.01 to 0.1 Pa ⁇ s (10 to 100 cps)
- the melt viscosity is too low, the toner has poor releasability.
- the melt viscosity is too high, the hot offset resistance and low temperature fixability of the toner is hardly improved.
- the toner for use in the image forming method of the present invention includes a colorant Suitable materials for use as the colorant include known dyes and pigments
- dyes and pigments include carbon black, Nigrosine dyes, black iron oxide, NAPHTHOL YELLOW S, HANSA YELLOW 10G, HANSA YELLOW 5G, HANSA YELLOW G, Cadmium Yellow, yellow iron oxide, loess, chrome yellow, Titan Yellow, polyazo yellow, Oil Yellow, HANSA YELLOW GR, HANSA YELLOW A, HANSA YELLOW RN, HANSA YELLOW R, PIGMENT YELLOW L, BENZIDINE YELLOW G, BENZIDINE YELLOW GR, PERMANENT YELLOW NCG, VULCAN FAST YELLOW 5G, VULCAN FAST YELLOW R, Tartrazine Lake, Quinoline Yellow LAKE, ANTHRAZANE YELLOW BGL, isoindolinone yellow, red iron oxide, red lead, orange lead, cadmium red, cadmium mercury red, antimony orange,
- the color of the colorant is not particularly limited, and black colorants and colorants having other colors can be used. As mentioned above, two or more colorants having different colors can be used in combination.
- black colorants include carbon blacks (C.I. Pigment Black 7) such as furnace black, lamp black, acetylene black, and channel black; metals and metal compounds such as copper, iron (C.I. Pigment Black 11) and titanium oxide; and organic pigments such as Aniline Black.
- carbon blacks C.I. Pigment Black 7
- metals and metal compounds such as copper, iron (C.I. Pigment Black 11) and titanium oxide
- organic pigments such as Aniline Black.
- magenta colorants include C.I. Pigment Red 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 30, 31, 32, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 48, 48:1, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 53:1, 54, 55, 57, 57:1, 58, 60, 63, 64, 68, 81, 83, 87, 88, 89, 90, 112, 114, 122, 123, 163, 177, 179, 202, 206, 207, 209 and 211; C I. Pigment Violet 19; C I. Vat Red 1, 2, 10, 13, 15, 23, 29 and 35.
- cyan colorants include C.I. Pigment Blue 2, 3, 15, 15:1, 15:2, 15:3, 15:4, 15:6, 16, 17 and 60; C.I. Vat Blue 6; C.I. Acid Blue 45; copper phthalocyanine pigments having one to five phthalimidemethyl groups connected with the phthalocyanine body; C.I. Pigment Green 7 and 36.
- yellow colorants include C.I. Pigment Yellow 0-16, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 23, 55, 65, 73, 74, 83, 97, 110, 151, 154 and 180; C.I. Vat Yellow 1, 3 and 20; C.I. Pigment Orange 36.
- the content of the colorants in the toner for use in the present invention is preferably from 1 to 15% by weight, and more preferably from 3 to 10% by weight.
- the content is too low, the resultant toner has low tinting power.
- the content is too high, the colorants cannot be well dispersed in the toner, resulting in deterioration of the tinting power and electric properties of'the toner.
- Master batches which are complexes of a colorant with a resin, can be used as the colorant of the toner of the present invention.
- the resins for use as the binder resin of'the master batches include styrene polymers and substituted styrene polymers such as polystyrene, poly-p-chlorostyrene and polyvinyltoluene; styrene copolymers such as styrene - p-chlorostyrene copolymers, styrene - propylene copolymers, styrene - vinyltoluene copolymers, styrene - vinylnaphthalene copolymers, styrene - methyl acrylate copolymers, styrene - ethyl acrylate copolymers, styrene - butyl acrylate copolymers, styrene - octyl acrylate copolymers, styrene - methyl methacrylate copolymers,
- the master batches can be prepared by mixing one or more of the resins as mentioned above and one or more of the colorants as mentioned above and kneading the mixture while applying a high shearing force thereto.
- an organic solvent can be added to increase the interaction between the colorant and the resin.
- a flushing method in which an aqueous paste including a colorant and water is mixed with a resin dissolved in an organic solvent and kneaded so that the colorant is transferred to the resin side (i.e., the oil phase), and then the organic solvent and water, if desired are removed from the mixture can be preferably used because the resultant wet cake can be used as it is without being dried
- dispersing devices capable of' applying a high shearing force such as three roll mills can be preferably used
- the toner for use in the present invention can include a charge controlling agent, if desired Any known charge controlling agents can be used for the toner. It is preferable to use colorless or white charge controlling agents to prevent change of the color tone of the resultant toner
- Suitable examples of the charge controlling agents include Nigrosine dyes, triphenyl methane dyes, molybdic acid chelate pigments, Rhodamine dyes, alkoxyamines, quaternary ammonium salts, fluorine-containing quaternary ammonium salts, alkylamides, phosphor and its compounds, tungsten and its compounds, fluorine-containing activators, metal salts of salicylic acid, metal salts of salicylic acid derivatives, etc These materials can be used alone or in combination.
- charge controlling agents include BONTRON P-51 (quaternary ammonium salt), BONTRON E-82 (metal complex of oxynaphthoic acid), BONTRON E-84 (metal complex of salicylic acid), and BONTRON E-89 (phenolic condensation product), which are manufactured by Orient Chemical Industries Co., Ltd.; TP-302 and TP-415 (molybdenum complex of quaternary ammonium salt), which are manufactured by Hodogaya Chemical Co , Ltd.; COPY CHARGE PSY VP2038 (quaternary ammonium salt), COPY BLUE (triphenyl methane derivative), COPY CHARGE NEG VP2036 and COPY CHARGE® NX VP434 (quaternary ammonium salt), which are manufactured by Hoechst AG; LRA-901, and LR-147 (boron complex), which are manufactured by Japan Carlit Co., Ltd.; quinacridone, azo pigments, and polymers
- the charge controlling agent is kneaded together with a masterbatch, and the mixture is used for preparing toner particles.
- the charge controlling agent is dissolved or dispersed in an organic solvent together with other toner constituents when toner particles are prepared by a wet method. It is also possible to adhere and fix a charge controlling agent to a surface of toner particles which are previously prepared
- the content of the charge controlling agent in the toner for use in the present invention is determined depending on the variables such as choice of binder resin, presence of additives, and dispersion method.
- the content the charge controlling agent is preferably from 0.1 to 10 parts by weight, and more preferably from 0.2 to 5 parts by weight, per 100 parts by weight of the binder resin included in the toner.
- the content is too low, a good charge property cannot be imparted to the toner.
- the content is too high, the charge quantity of the toner excessively increases, and thereby the electrostatic attraction between the developing roller and the toner increases, resulting in deterioration of fluidity and decrease of' image density.
- the toner for use in the present invention can include an external additive, which is typically present on the surface of toner particles.
- an external additive typically present on the surface of toner particles.
- Known materials for use as the external additives for toner can be used.
- Suitable materials for use as the external additive of the toner include silica, hydrophobized silica, fatty acid metal salts such as zinc stearate and aluminum stearate, metal oxides such as titanium oxide, aluminum oxide, tin oxide and antimony oxide, which may be hydrophobized, fluoropolymers.
- hydrophobized silica, titanium oxide, and hydrophobized titanium oxide are preferably used.
- silica examples include HDK H 2000, HDK H 2000/4, HDK H 2050EP, HVK21 and HDK H 1303, which are manufactured by Hoechst AG; and R972, R974, RX200, RY200, R202, R805 and R812, which are manufactured by Nippon Aerosil Co.
- titanium oxide examples include P-25 manufactured by Nippon Aerosil Co,; STT-30 and STT-65C-S, which are manufactured by Titan Kogyo K.K.; TAF-140 manufactured by Fuji Titanium Industry Co., Ltd.; MT-150W, MT-500B, MT-600B and MT-150A, which are manufactured by Tayca Corp.; etc.
- hydrophobized titanium oxides include T-805 manufactured by Nippon Aerosil Co.; STT-30A and STT-65S-S, which are manufactured by Titan Kogyo K.K.; TAF-500T and TAF-1500T, which are manufactured by Fuji Titanium Industry Co., Ltd.; MT-100S and MT-100T, which are manufactured by Tayca Corp.; IT-S manufactured by Ishihara Sangyo Kaisha K.K.;
- Suitable hydrophobizing agents for use in the hydrophobizing treatment of' inorganic materials include silane coupling agents such as methyl trimethoxy silane, methyl triethoxy silane, octyl trimethoxy silane, dialkyldihalogenated silane, trialkylhalogenated silane, alkyltrihalogenated silane, hexaalkyldisilazane, silylation agents, silane coupling agents having a fluoroalkyl group; organic titanate coupling agents, aluminum coupling agents, silicone oils and silicone varnishes.
- silane coupling agents such as methyl trimethoxy silane, methyl triethoxy silane, octyl trimethoxy silane, dialkyldihalogenated silane, trialkylhalogenated silane, alkyltrihalogenated silane, hexaalkyldisilazane, silylation agents, silane coupling agents having a fluoroalkyl group; organic titanate
- silicone oils include dimethyl silicone oils, methylphenyl silicone oils, chrolophenyl silicone oils, methylhydrodiene silicone oils, alkyl-modified silicone oils, fluorine-modified silicone oils, polyether-modified silicone oils, alcohol-modified silicone oils, amino-modified silicone oils, epoxy-modified silicone oils, epoxy/polyether-modified silicone oils, phenol-modified silicone oils, carboxyl-modified silicone oils, mercapto-modified silicone oils, (meth)acrylic-modified silicone oils, ⁇ -methylstyrene-modified silicone oils, etc.
- Inorganic materials which are treated with a silicone oil upon application of heat if desired, can also be preferably used as the external additive.
- the particulate inorganic materials to be treated include silica, aluminum oxide, titanium oxide, barium titanate, magnesium titanate, calcium titanate, strontium titanate, iron oxide, copper oxide, zinc oxide, tin oxide, quartz sand, clay, mica, sand-lime, diatom earth, chromium oxide, cerium oxide, red iron oxide, antimony trioxide, magnesium oxide, zirconium oxide, barium sulfate, barium carbonate, calcium carbonate, silicon carbide, silicon nitride.
- silica and titanium oxide are preferably used
- the average primary particle diameter of the inorganic materials for use as the external additive is from 1 to 100 nm, and preferably from 3 to 70 nm.
- the average primary particle diameter is too small, the inorganic materials tend to be embedded into toner particles, and thereby the function of the external additive cannot be fulfilled.
- the average primary particle diameter is too large, a problem in that the surface of the photoreceptor used is damaged by the external additive is caused.
- the hydrophobized inorganic material preferably has an average primary particle diameter of from 1 to 100 nm, and more preferably from 5 to 70 nm.
- the inorganic materials for use as the external additive preferably have a specific surface area (measured by a BEI method) of from 20 to 500 m 2 /g.
- the added amount of the external additive is from 0.1 to 5% by weight, and preferably from 0.3 to 3% by weight, based on the weight of the toner.
- particulate polymers such as polymers and copolymers of styrene, methacrylate and acrylate, which are prepared by a method such as soap-free emulsion polymerization methods, suspension polymerization methods, and dispersion polymerization methods; polycondensation resins such as silicone resins, benzoguanamine resins and nylon resins; and thermosetting resins, can be used as external additives.
- particulate resins in combination with another external additive, the charging properties of the toner can be improved. Specifically, the amount of reversely charged toner particles can be decreased, resulting in prevention of a background development problem in that the background of images is soiled with toner particles.
- the added amount of such a particulate resin is from 0.01 to 5% by weight, and preferably from 0.1 to 2% by weight, based on the weight of the toner.
- the toner for use in the present invention can include other additives such as fluidity improving agents, cleanability improving agents, magnetic materials, metal soaps.
- the fluidity improving agents are used for the toner such that the toner has good hydrophobicity and can maintain good fluidity and charge properties even under high humidity conditions.
- fluidity improving agents are treated on the toner or external additive
- specific examples of the fluidity improving agents include silane coupling agents, silylation agents, silane coupling agents having a fluoroalkyl group; organic titanate coupling agents, aluminum coupling agents, silicone oils and modified silicone oils.
- the toner for use in the present invention preferably includes a cleanability improving agent which can impart good cleaning property to the toner such that the toner remaining on the surface of' an image bearing member such as photoreceptors even after a toner image is transferred can be easily removed
- a cleanability improving agent which can impart good cleaning property to the toner such that the toner remaining on the surface of' an image bearing member such as photoreceptors even after a toner image is transferred can be easily removed
- cleanability improving agents include fatty acids and metal salts of fatty acids such as stearic acid, zinc stearate and calcium stearate; and particulate polymers such as polymethylmethacrylate and polystyrene, which are manufactured by a method such as soap-free emulsion polymerization methods.
- Particulate resins having a relatively narrow particle diameter distribution and a volume average particle diameter of from 0.01 ⁇ m to 1 ⁇ m are preferably used as the cleanability improving agent
- the magnetic materials include known magnetic materials. Specific examples thereof include powders of iron, magnetite, ferrite, etc Among these materials, white materials are preferably used as the magnetic material.
- the toner for use in the present invention can be prepared by any known methods such as kneading/pulverization methods in which a toner composition mixture is melted and kneaded, followed by cooling, pulverization and classification, and other methods such as polymerization methods, solution suspension methods and spray granulation methods.
- the melt kneading operation is performed using, for example, a kneader such as continuous single- or double-axis kneaders and batch kneaders such as roll mills.
- a kneader such as continuous single- or double-axis kneaders and batch kneaders such as roll mills.
- Specific examples thereof include KTK double-axis extruders manufactured by Kobe Steel, Ltd., TEM double-axis extruders manufactured by Toshiba Machine Co., Ltd., double-axis extruders manufactured by KCK, PCM double-axis extruders manufactured by Ikegai Corp., and KO-KNEADER manufactured by Buss AG.
- the kneading operation is performed while controlling the kneading temperature such that the molecular chain of the binder resin used is not cut. Specifically, when the kneading temperature is higher than the softening point of the binder resin, the molecular chain is seriously cut. In contrast, when the kneading temperature is lower than the melting point, the dispersion operation cannot be well performed.
- the kneaded mixture is pulverized, it is preferable that the kneaded mixture is crushed at first, followed by pulverization.
- a method in which particles are collided to a plate using jet air; a method in which particles are collided to each other using jet air; and a method in which particles are pulverized at a narrow gap between a rotor and a stator are preferably used.
- the thus prepared toner particles are then classified so that the resultant particles have the predetermined particle diameter.
- the classification treatment is performed using a cyclone, a decanter or a method utilizing centrifuge to remove fine particles therefrom.
- the pulverized material is subjected to classification in an air stream utilizing centrifuge to prepare toner particles having the predetermined particle diameter.
- the thus prepared toner particles are mixed with an external additive.
- an external additive such as particulate inorganic materials and particulate resins
- the external additive is dissociated so as to cover the surface of the toner particles.
- Suitable polymerization methods include methods including dissolving or dispersing toner constituents including a colorant and a modified polyester resin (which can form a urea or urethane bond) in an organic solvent to prepare a toner constituent liquid; dispersing the toner constituent liquid in an aqueous medium; subjecting the modified polyester resin to addition polymerization; removing the solvent from the reaction product; and then washing the reaction product
- Suitable resins for use as the modified polyester resin include polyester prepolymers having an isocyanate group, which are prepared by reacting a polyisocyanate compound (PIC) with a polyester resin having a carboxyl group or a hydroxyl group at the end portion thereof. The polyester prepolymer is then subjected to a crosslinking reaction or a molecular chain growth reaction using an amine, etc. The thus prepared modified polyester resin having a urea or urethane bond can impart a good combination of low temperature fixability and hot offset resistance to the toner.
- PIC polyisocyanate compound
- polyisocyanates include aliphatic polyisocyanates (e.g., tetramethylene diisocyanate, hexamethylene diisocyanate and 2,6-diisocyanate methylcaproate); alicyclic polyisocyanates (e.g., isophorone diisocyanate and cyclohexylmethane diisocyanate); aromatic diisocianates (e.g., tolylene diisocyanate and diphenylmethane diisocyanate); aromatic aliphatic diisocyanates (e,g., ⁇ , ⁇ , ⁇ ', ⁇ '-tetramethyl xylylene diisocyanate); isocyanurates; blocked polyisocyanates in which the polyisocyanates mentioned above are blocked with phenol derivatives, oximes or caprolactams. These compounds can be used alone or in combination.
- aliphatic polyisocyanates e.g., tetramethylene diis
- Suitable mixing ratio ie, the equivalence ratio [NCO]/[OH]
- a polyisocyanate (PIC) to the [OH] group of a polyester is from 5/1 to 1/1, preferably from 4/1 to 1.2/1 and more preferably from 2.5/1 to 1.5/1.
- the average number of the isocyanate group included in a molecule of the polyester prepolymer is generally not less than 1, preferably from 1.5 to 3, and more preferably from 1.8 to 2.5.
- amines (B) include diamines (B1), polyamines (B2) having three or more amino groups, amino alcohols (B3), amino mercaptans (B4), amino acids (B5) and blocked amines (B6) in which the amines (B1-B5) mentioned above are blocked. These amines can be used alone or in combination.
- diamines (B1) include aromatic diamines (e.g., phenylene diamine, diethyltoluene diamine and 4,4'-diaminadiphenyl methane); alicyclic diamines (e,g., 4,4'-diamino-3,3'-dimethyldicyclohexyl methane, diaminocyclohexane and isophoron diamine); aliphatic diamines (e.g., ethylene diamine, tetramethylene diamine and hexamethylene diamine).
- aromatic diamines e.g., phenylene diamine, diethyltoluene diamine and 4,4'-diaminadiphenyl methane
- alicyclic diamines e.g., 4,4'-diamino-3,3'-dimethyldicyclohexyl methane, diaminocyclohexane and isophoron diamine
- polyamines (B2) having three or more amino groups include diethylene triamine, triethylene tetramine, etc
- amino alcohols (B3) include ethanol amine, hydroxyethyl aniline, etc
- amino mercaptan (B4) include aminoethyl mercaptan, aminopropyl mercaptan, etc.
- amino acids (B5) include aminopropionic acid, aminocaproic acid, etc.
- the blocked amines (B6) include ketimine compounds which are prepared by reacting one of the amines (B1-B5) mentioned above with a ketone such as acetone, methyl ethyl ketone and methyl isobutyl ketone; oxazoline compounds, etc.
- diamines (B1) and mixtures of a diamine (B1) with a small amount of a polyamine (B2) are preferably used.
- the mixing ratio (i.e., the equivalence ratio [NCO]/[NHx]) of the [NCO] group of the prepolymer having an isocyanate group to the [NHx] group of the amine is from 1/2 to 2/1, preferably from 1/1.5 to 1.5/1 and more preferably from 1/1.2 to 1.2/1.
- toner having a small particle diameter and a spherical form can be manufactured at a low cost with low environmental load.
- the color of the toner is not particularly limited. When full color images are produced, a combination of black, cyan, magenta and yellow color toners is preferably used Such color toners can be prepared by properly selecting one or more colorants from the above-mentioned colorants.
- the volume average particle diameter of the toner is not particularly limited.
- the volume average particle diameter is determined by, for example, the following method
- the developer used for the image forming method of the present invention may be a one-component developer including the toner and no carrier or a two-component developer including the toner and a carrier.
- the developer is preferably a two-component developer.
- the developer has the following advantages.
- the developer has the following advantages.
- the carrier for use in the two component developer of the present invention is not particularly limited, and one or more proper carriers are chosen while considering the application of the developer. However, it is preferable to use a carrier in which a core material is coated with a resin
- Suitable materials for use as the core material include manganese-strontium materials and manganese-magnesium materials, which have a saturation magnetization of from 50 to 90 Am 2 /kg (90 emu/g).
- iron powders having a a saturation magnetization not less than 100 Am 2 /kg (100 emu/g) and magnetite having a saturation magnetization of from 75 to 120 Am 2 /kg (75 to 120 emu/g) are preferably used
- copper-zinc materials having a saturation magnetization of from 30 to 80 Am 2 /kg (30 to 80 emu/g) can be preferably used because the impact of the magnetic brush against the photoreceptor is relatively weak and high quality images can be produced
- These carrier materials can be used alone or in combination.
- the core material of the carrier preferably has a volume average particle diameter (D 50 ) of from 10 to 200 ⁇ m, and more preferably from 40 to 100 ⁇ m.
- D 50 volume average particle diameter
- a carrier scattering problem tends to occur because the particles have weak magnetization.
- the particle diameter is too large, the surface area of the carrier per unit weight decreases and thereby a toner scattering problem tends to occur.
- another problem in that uneven solid images are formed tends to occur.
- Such resins to be coated on the carriers include amino resins, vinyl or vinylidene resins, polystyrene resins, halogenated olefin resins, polyester resins, polycarbonate resins, polyethylene resins, polyvinyl fluoride resins, polyvinylidene fluoride resins, polytrifluoroethylene resins, polyhexafluoropropylene resins, vinylidenefluoride-acrylate copolymers, vinylidenefluoride-vinylfluoride copolymers, copolymers of tetrafluoroethylene, vinylidenefluoride and other monomers including no fluorine atom, silicone resins, etc.
- resins are used alone or in combination.
- silicone resins are preferably used.
- the silicone resin for use in covering carrier particles is not particularly limited, and any known silicone resins can be used Specific examples of the commercialized strait silicone resins include KR271, KR255, KR152 (which are manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.), SR2400, SR2406, and SR2410 (which are manufactured by Dow Corning Toray Silicone Co., Ltd.).
- the commercialized modified silicone resins include KR206 (alkyd-modified), KR5208 (acrylic-modified), ES1001N (epoxy-modified), KR305 (urethane-modified) (which are manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd), SR2115 (epoxy-modified), and SR2110 (alkyd-modified) (which are manufactured by Dow Coining Toray Silicone Co., Ltd.).
- silicone resin can be used for forming the cover layer
- additives such as crosslinking agents and charge controlling agents can be used in combination.
- an electroconductive powder can be included in the resin layer of the carrier
- electroconductive powders include metal powders, carbon blacks, titanium oxide, tin oxide, and zinc oxide
- the average particle diameter of such electroconductive powders is preferably not greater than 1 ⁇ m When the particle diameter is too large, it is hard to control the resistance of the coating layer
- the resin layer can be formed by coating a resin solution which is prepared by dissolving a resin in a solvent on a core materials using any known coating method, followed by drying and baking. Suitable coating methods include dip coating methods, spray coating methods, brush coating methods.
- the solvent examples include toluene, xylene, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, cellosolve, butyl acetate
- the method for baking the coated resin layer is not particularly limited, and external heating methods and internal heating methods can be used.
- methods using a heating device such as fixed electric furnaces, fluid electric furnaces, rotary electric furnaces, and burner furnaces, and methods using microwave, are preferably used.
- the coated amount of the resin is preferably 0.01 to 5 0 % by weight based on the weight of the carrier. When the coated amount is too small, a uniform resin layer cannot be formed. When the coated amount is too large, the carrier particles aggregate, and thereby the toner cannot be uniformly charged.
- the weight ratio of the toner to the carrier in the two component developer is from 10/90 to 2/98, and preferably from 7/93 to 3/97.
- the developing device may be a dry developing device using a dry developer or a wet developing device using a liquid developer
- the developing device may be a monochrome developing device or a multi-color developing device.
- developing devices including an agitator for agitating a developer (or toner) and a developing roller having a magnet roller can be preferably used
- a toner and a carrier are mixed and agitated to frictionally charge the toner
- the developer including the toner is borne on the surface of the developing roller due to the magnetic force of the magnet roller while forming a magnetic brush. Since the developing roller is set close to the latent image bearing member (such as photoreceptor drums), part of particles of the toner in the magnetic brush is electrically attracted by an electrostatic latent image on the latent image bearing member, resulting in transfer of the toner particles to the latent image. Thus, the latent image is developed with the toner, resulting in formation of a toner image on the surface of the latent image bearing member.
- the developer may be a one-component developer or a two-component developer.
- One-component developing device using one-component developer uses one-component developer
- Suitable one-component developing devices include devices including a developer bearing member to which a one-component developer is supplied, and a developer layer controlling member for forming a thin layer of'the developer on the surface of the developer bearing member.
- FIG 5 is a schematic view of a one-component developing device.
- the one-component developing device use a one-component developer (i.e., a toner), and includes a developer beating member 402 on which a thin toner layer is formed The toner layer on the developer bearing member 402 is contacted with a photoreceptor drum 1 serving as a latent image bearing member to develop an electrostatic latent image thereon.
- a one-component developer i.e., a toner
- the toner layer on the developer bearing member 402 is contacted with a photoreceptor drum 1 serving as a latent image bearing member to develop an electrostatic latent image thereon.
- the toner in a casing 401 is agitated by rotation of an agitator 411, and the agitated toner is supplied to a supply roller 412.
- the supply roller 412 is made of a foamed polyurethane and has a flexibility. Therefore, the toner can be easily held by cells with a diameter of from 50 to 500 ⁇ m, which are formed on the surface of the supply roller 412.
- the supply roller 412 is soft and has a JIS-A hardness of from 10 to 30 degree, the supply roller can be uniformly contacted with the developing roller 402.
- the supply roller 412 and the developing roller 402 are rotated in the same direction, namely the surface of the supply roller and the surface of the developing roller move in opposite directions at a nip N in which the supply roller is contacted with the developing roller
- the supply roller 412 and the developing roller 402 may be rotated in the opposite direction.
- the ratio (S/D) of the linear speed (S) of the supply roller 412 to that (D) of'the developing roller 402 is preferably from 0.5 to 1.5 In this developing device, the ratio (S/D) is set to 0.9.
- the surface portion of'the supply roller 412 is deformed by the developing roller 402 at a depth of from 0 5 to 1.5 mm at the nip N.
- the torque needed for rotating the rollers is from 14.7 to 24.5 N ⁇ cm when the effective width of the developing device is 240 mm (i.e., A-4 size).
- the developing roller 402 has a structure such that a rubber layer is formed on an electroconductive substrate and has a diameter of from 10 to 30 mm.
- the surface of the rubber layer is roughened so as to have a ten-point mean roughness Rz of from 1 to 4 ⁇ m.
- the roughness Rz is preferably 13 to 80% of the average particle diameter of the toner used so that the toner can be well transported. More preferably, the roughness Rz is 20 to 30% of the average particle diameter of'the toner so that the toner on the developing roller is sufficiently charged.
- the rubber materials for use in the rubber layer of the developing roller include silicone rubber, butadiene rubbers, NBRs, hydrin rubbers, EPDM rubbers, It is preferable to form a cover layer on the rubber layer.
- Specific examples of'the materials for use in the cover layer include silicone-based materials and fluorine-containing materials such as TEFLON. Silicone-based materials can well charge a toner, and fluorine-containing materials have good releasability. Carbon blacks can be included in the cover layer to impart electroconductivity to the layer.
- the thickness of the cover layer is preferably from 5 to 50 ⁇ m. When the thickness is out of the range, a problem in that the cover layer is cracked tends to occur
- the toner which is located on the surface of the supply roller 412 (and located in the cells formed on the supply roller) and which has a predetermined polarity, is nipped by the developing roller 402 and the supply roller 412 at the nip N, resulting in frictional charging of the toner. Due to this charging and the roughened surface of the developing roller 402, the toner is borne on the surface of the developing roller 402. In this case, the toner layer thus formed on the developing roller 402 is thick (about 1 to 3 mg/cm 2 ) and uneven.
- a thickness controlling blade 413 (hereinafter referred to as a blade) with the surface of the developing roller 402
- a uniform thin toner layer is formed on the surface of the developing roller.
- the blade 413 is set in such a manner that the developing roller trails the blade.
- the blade 413 may be set to counter the developing roller or may be subjected to edge contact with the developing roller.
- the blade 413 is made of a metal such as stainless steels (such as SUS 304) and has a thickness of from 0.1 to 0.15 mm.
- the blade 413 may be made of a relatively hard resin or rubber having a thickness of from 1 to 2 mm.
- electroconductive materials such as carbon blacks are preferably included therein to impart electroconductivity to the blade
- the blade 413 preferably has a free end portion (which is not contacted with a holder) having a length of from 10 to 15 mm
- a free end portion which is not contacted with a holder
- the blade 413 is vibrated when contacted with the developing roller 402, resulting in formation of' a toner layer with uneven thickness, thereby forming uneven-density stripe images.
- the contact pressure at which the blade 413 is contacted with the developing roller 402 is preferably from 0.049 to 2 45 N/cm.
- the contact pressure is too high, the thickness (i.e., weight) of the developer layer formed on the developing roller 402 excessively decreases, and in addition the charge quantity of the toner excessively increases, resulting in decrease of the image density.
- the contact pressure is too low, the thickness of the developer layer varies (i.e., a developer layer with an even thickness cannot be formed) and in addition aggregates of toner particles pass the nip between the developing roller 402 and the blade 413, resulting in serious deterioration of image qualities.
- Hardness of rubber layer of developing roller 30° (JIS-A hardness)
- Material of blade Stainless steel (SUS) with thickness of 0 1 mm
- Contact pressure of'blade 0.588 N/cm (60 gf/cm) (linear pressure)
- a developer layer with a desired weight can be formed on the developing roller 402.
- the angle formed by the free end portion of the blade 413 and the tangent line of a point of the developing roller to which the blade is contacted is prefer ably 10 to 45°
- a developer layer i.e., a toner layer
- a weight of from 0 4 to 0.8 mg/cm 2 is formed on the developing roller 402.
- the toner has a charge of from -10 to -30 ⁇ C/g. Therefore, electrostatic images on the photoreceptor 1 are well developed with the toner.
- the gap between the surface of the photoreceptor 1 and the surface of the developing roller 402 is narrower than those of conventional two-component developing devices. Therefore, the developing device has better developing ability than conventional two-component developing devices, namely, the developing device can develop electrostatic latent images even when the latent images have low potentials.
- Two-component developing devices having a developer bearing member which has a magnetic field generation member wherein and which bears a two-component developer including a magnetic carrier and a toner on the surface thereof are preferably used for the image forming apparatus of'the present invention.
- FIG. 6 A two-component developing device is illustrated in FIG. 6 .
- the developer is agitated and fed by a screw 441 to a development sleeve 442 serving as a developer bearing member.
- the developer thus fed to the development sleeve 442 is regulated by a developer layer thickness controlling blade 443 (hereinafter referred to as a doctor blade).
- the thickness of the developing layer is controlled by adjusting the gap (i.e., doctor gap) between the development sleeve 442 and the doctor blade 443
- the gap i.e., doctor gap
- the thickness of the developer layer excessively decreases, resulting in formation of low density images
- the doctor gap is too wide, a problem in that a thick developer layer is formed on the developing sleeve, and thereby the particles of'the carrier are adhered to the electrostatic latent images on the photoreceptor 1 is caused.
- a magnetic field generating member e.g., magnets
- the developer on the developing sleeve forms a magnetic brush (i.e., chains of the developer) along the magnetic lines of the magnets (i.e., the normal lines of the development sleeve)
- the development sleeve 442 is arranged so as to be close to the photoreceptor 1, and a gap (development gap) is formed therebetween. Thus a development region in which the developing sleeve is opposed to the photoreceptor is formed.
- the development sleeve is a cylinder made of a nonmagnetic material such as aluminum, brass, stainless steel and electroconductive resins, and is rotated by a rotation driving device (not shown) The magnetic brush formed on the development sleeve is fed to the development region due to rotation of the development sleeve.
- the development bias is typically a DC voltage or a DC voltage overlapped with an AC voltage.
- the development gap is preferably from 5 to 30 times the particle diameter of the carrier particles included in the developer Specifically, when the carrier particles have a diameter of 50 ⁇ m, the development gap is preferably from 0.5 to 1.5 mm. When the development gap is too wide, low density images are formed.
- the doctor gap is preferably the same as or slightly greater than the development gap.
- the diameters and linear speeds of the photoreceptor drum 1 and the development sleeve 442 are determined on the basis of the size and reproduction speed of the image forming apparatus, the ratio (D/S) of the linear speed (D) of the photoreceptor drum 1 to the linear speed (S) of'the development sleeve is preferably not less than 11. It is preferable that a position sensor is provided after the developing device to determine the weight (or thickness) of toner adhered to latent images by measuring the optical reflectance of'the toner image. On the basis of the data of'the reflectance (i.e., the weight of the adhered toner), the development conditions are adjusted if necessary
- a toner image formed on the image bearing member (photoreceptor) is transferred to a receiving material using a transfer device.
- the transfer device is broadly classified into direct transfer devices which transfer a toner image to a receiving material, and indirect transfer devices in which a toner image on the photoreceptor is primarily transferred to an intermediate transfer medium (primary transfer) and the toner image is then transferred to a receiving material (secondary transfer).
- the toner image is typically charged with a charger so as to be well transferred to a receiving material or an intermediate transfer medium.
- indirect transfer devices are preferably used. Specifically, plural color toner images formed on one or more photoreceptors are transferred to an intermediate transfer medium to form a combined color toner image, and the combined color toner image is then transferred to a receiving material.
- the intermediate transfer medium is not particularly limited, and any known intermediate transfer media such as transfer belts and rollers can be used.
- the surface of'the intermediate transfer medium preferably has a static friction coefficient of from 0.1 to 0.6, and more preferably from 0.3 to 0.5.
- the intermediate transfer medium preferably has a volume resistivity of from few ⁇ ⁇ cm to 10 3 ⁇ ⁇ cm In this case, charging of the intermediate transfer medium can be prevented, and the charges formed on the intermediate transfer medium by a charger to well transfer the toner image hardly remain thereon, resulting in prevention of occurrence of uneven transfer of toner images in the secondary transfer process.
- a secondary transfer bias can be effectively applied to the intermediate transfer medium
- the material constituting the intermediate transfer medium is not particularly limited, and any known materials can be used therefor. Specific examples of'the materials are as follows.
- the elastic belts are preferable.
- the elastic belts are deformed when contacted with a receiving material at the transfer nip Therefore, layered toner images (i.e., combined color toner image) on the intermediate transfer medium can be well transferred to a receiving material even when the receiving material has a rough surface because the surface of'the intermediate transfer medium is elastically deformed so as to be contacted with recessed portions of'the receiving material. Therefore, formation of hollow images can be prevented without excessively increasing the transfer pressure at the transfer nip even when receiving materials having a rough surface are used.
- the material used for the elastic belts is not particularly limited.
- the resins for use in the elastic belts include polycarbonate resins, fluorine-containing resins (e.g., ETFE and PVDF), styrene resins such as polystyrene resins, chloropolystyrene resins, poly- ⁇ -methylstyrene resins, styrene - butadiene copolymers, styrene - vinyl chloride copolymers, styrene - vinyl acetate copolymers, styrene - maleic acid copolymers, styrene - (meth)acrylate copolymers (e g., styrene - methyl (meth)acrylate copolymers, styrene - ethyl (meth)acrylate copolymers, styrene - butyl (meth)acrylate copolymers,
- the rubbers for use in the elastic belts include natural rubbers, butyl rubbers, fluorine-containing rubbers, acrylic rubbers, EPDM rubbers, NBRs, ABS rubbers, isoprene rubbers, SB rubbers, butadiene rubbers, ethylene - propylene rubbers, ethylene - propylene terpolymers, chloroprene rubbers, chlorosulfonated polyethylene rubbers, chlorinated polyethylene rubbers, urethane rubbers, syndiotactic 1,2-polybutadiene rubbers, epichlorohydrin rubbers, silicone rubbers, fluorine-containing rubbers, polysulfide rubbers, polynorbomene rubbers, hydrogenated nitrile rubber. These materials can be used alone or in combination.
- the elastomers for use in the elastic belts include polystyrene-based thermoplastic elastomers, polyolefin-based thermoplastic elastomers, polyvinyl chloride-based thermoplastic elastomers, polyurethane-based thermoplastic elastomers, polyamide-based thermoplastic elastomers, polyurea-based thermoplastic elastomers, polyester-based thermoplastic elastomers, fluorine-containing thermoplastic elastomers. These materials can be used alone or in combination
- resistivity controlling agents for use in the elastic belts include carbon black, graphite, powders of' metals (e.g., aluminum and nickel), metal oxides (e.g., tin oxide, titanium oxide, antimony oxide, indium oxide, potassium titanate, antimony oxide - tin oxide complexes (ATO), and indium oxide - tin oxide complexes (ITO)).
- metal oxides e.g., tin oxide, titanium oxide, antimony oxide, indium oxide, potassium titanate, antimony oxide - tin oxide complexes (ATO), and indium oxide - tin oxide complexes (ITO)
- electroconductive particles in which particles of' an insulating material such as barium sulfate, magnesium silicate, and calcium carbonate are covered with one or more electroconductive material can also be used.
- the surface of the elastic belt preferably has a low friction coefficient to prevent contamination of the belt with toner particles, to well remove toner particles remaining on the belt after a secondary transfer process, and to well transfer toner images to receiving materials.
- a layer including a binder resin such as polyurethane resins, polyester resins, and epoxy resins, and a particulate lubricating material having a low surface energy such as fluorine-containing resins, fluorine-containing compounds, carbon fluoride, titanium oxide, and silicone carbide, is formed on the surface of the elastic belt.
- a layer which is prepared by subjecting a fluorine-containing rubber to a heat treatment so that a large amount of fluorine atoms are present therein and which has a low surface energy, can also be used.
- the method for preparing the elastic belts is not particularly limited, and for example the following methods can be used
- the method for preventing elongation of the elastic belt is not particularly limited, and for example, the following methods can be used.
- the elongation preventing materials include natural fibers such as cotton fibers and silk fibers; synthetic fibers such as polyester fibers, nylon fibers, acrylic fibers, polyolefin fibers, polyvinyl alcohol fibers, polyvinyl chloride fibers, polyvinylidene chloride fibers, polyurethane fibers, polyacetal fibers, polyfluoroethylene fibers, and phenolic fibers; fibers of inorganic materials such as carbon fibers, glass fibers, and boron fibers; metal fibers such as iron fibers and copper fibers; . Webs and strings of these fibers are preferably used for the core layer
- the method for preparing the core layer is not particularly limited, and for example, the following methods can be used.
- the thickness of the cover layer is determined on the basis of the hardness of' the material used therefor, When the cover layer is too thick, cracks are formed in the cover layer, and in addition the resultant intermediate transfer medium are largely elongated and contracted, resulting in formation of'elongated or contracted images. Therefore, the thickness of the cover layer is preferably not greater than about 1 mm
- the transfer device (primary transfer device and secondary transfer device) preferably includes one or more transfer members for transferring toner images on the image bearing member (photoreceptor) to a receiving material
- transfer members include corona chargers, transfer belts, transfer rollers, pressure transfer rollers, adhesive transfer members, etc.
- the receiving material used for the image forming apparatus of the present invention is not particularly limited.
- papers are used therefor, and one or more white inorganic pigments such as calcium carbonate are included in papers or a coating liquid including such white pigments is applied on papers in order to increase the whiteness thereof
- white inorganic pigments calcium carbonate is typically used for the receiving material
- the present inventors discover that receiving papers including a large amount of calcium carbonate cause problems such that toner images on a receiving paper sheet are scratched or rubbed by the backside of the following receiving paper sheet on the tray of'the image forming apparatus.
- the amount of calcium carbonate included in receiving papers which is determined by a FTIR-ATR method using AVATOR 3 70 from Thexmo Electron Co., and the equation (2) mentioned below, is preferably not greater than 0.6, and more preferably not greater than 05.
- Amount of CaCO 3 H ⁇ peak 1421 ⁇ cm - 1 / H ′ peak 1036 ⁇ cm - 1 ) wherein H(peak 1421cm -1 ) represents the height of the peak which is specific to calcium carbonate and which is observed at 1421cm -1 , and H(peak 1036cm -1 ) represent the height of the peak which is specific to cellulose included in the paper and which is observed at 1036cm -1 .
- the penetration depth of the FTIR-ATR method depends on the wave number of the light used. When light with a wave number of 1421cm -1 is used, the penetration depth is about 0 6 ⁇ m.
- the penetration depth (d p ) is defined as a depth at which the strength of'the incident light decreases to 1/e, and is represented by the following equation.
- d p ⁇ 1 / 2 ⁇ ⁇ ( sin 2 ⁇ ⁇ - n 21 2 ⁇ ) 1 / 2
- n 21 is n2/n1
- n1 represents the refractive index of the ATR crystal (i.e., 4.0 for Ge crystal) and n2 represents the refractive index of the sample
- ⁇ 1 is ⁇ /n1 and represents the wavelength of the light in the ATR crystal
- the receiving material is not limited to papers, and other materials such as polyethylene terephthalate films (for overhead projection (OHP) sheets) can also be uses.
- OHP overhead projection
- Tandem image forming apparatus include a plural image forming units each including at least an image beating member, a charging device, a developing device, and a transfer device.
- image forming units are provided for forming yellow, magenta, cyan and black toner images.
- the four color images are prepared in parallel, and then overlaid on a receiving material optionally via an intermediate transfer medium. Therefore, full color images can be produced at a high speed
- tandem image forming apparatus includes the following.
- a feeding device 6 and the fixing device 7 have to be arranged at an upstream side and a downstream side of the tandem image forming units TA relative to the feeding direction of'the receiving material, respectively. Therefore, the apparatus tends to be jumboized
- the apparatus illustrated in FIG. 8 has a flexibility in configuration, and the feeding device 6 and the fixing device 7 can be arranged below the tandem image forming units TA. Therefore, the apparatus can be miniaturized.
- the fixing device 7 has to be set close to the tandem image forming units TA to prevent jumboization of the apparatus. Therefore, the receiving material sheet S straightly enters into the fixing device while the rear end of'the sheet S is sandwiched by the photoreceptor 1 and the transfer device 2, resulting in occurrence of problems in that toner images on the sheet S are easily damaged by the impact caused by collision of'the tip edge of'the sheet S against the fixing device and abnormal images such as elongated or contracted images are formed due to the difference in speed between the transfer belt 3 and the fixing device 7.
- the receiving material sheet S can be bent before the fixing device 7 and thereby the sheet S can enter into the fixing device 7 without influenced by the secondary transfer device 5. Therefore, the above-mentioned problems are hardly caused
- toner particles remaining on the image bearing member 1 are removed with a cleaning device 8 so that the surface of the image bearing member is cleaned so as to be ready for the next image forming operation
- toner particles remaining on the surface of the intermediate transfer medium 4 is removed with a second cleaning device 9 so that the surface of'the intermediate transfer medium is cleaned so as to be ready for the next image forming operation
- fixing device In the fixing process, toner images transferred on a receiving material sheet are fixed thereto by a fixing device
- the fixing device is not particularly limited, but fixing devices including a fixing member and a heater for heating the fixing member are preferably used.
- the fixing member of the fixing device is not particularly limited as long as the fixing member forms a nip
- combinations of'an endless belt and a roller, and combinations of two rollers can be used,
- combinations of an endless belt and a roller are preferably used to save energy
- induction heating (IH) is preferably used to save energy.
- the endless belt When the fixing member includes an endless belt, it is preferable for the endless belt to be made of a material having a low heat capacity, and to have a structure such that an offset preventing layer is formed on a substrate Suitable materials for use in the substrate include nickel and polyimide resins Suitable materials for use in the offset preventing layer include silicone rubbers and fluorine-containing resins.
- the cores of the rollers are preferably made of an non-elastic material so that the rollers are not deformed even when receiving a high pressure.
- Suitable non-elastic materials for use in the cores of the fixing rollers include metals having a high heat conductivity such as aluminum, iron, stainless steel, and brass.
- an offset preventing layer is preferably formed overlying the core Suitable materials for use in the offset preventing layer include RTV silicone rubbers, tetrafluoroethylene - perfluoroalkyl vinyl ether copolymers (PFA), polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE).
- toner images transferred onto a receiving material sheet are passed through the nip formed by the fixing members
- the toner image transferring operation and the fixing operation may be performed at the same time
- the plural color toner images may be individually fixed after each color toner image is transferred (i.e., a fixing operation is performed plural times), or the plural toner images may be fixed only by one fixing operation after forming a combined color toner image.
- the nip is formed by contacting two fixing members (such as belt-roller and roller-roller).
- the pressure (surface pressure) at the nip of the fixing members is not particularly limited, but is preferably not less than 5 N/cm 2 , more preferably from 7 to 100 N/cm 2 , and even more preferably from 10 to 60 N/cm 2 , When the pressure is too high, the life of the fixing members shortens. In contrast, when the pressure is too low, toner images cannot be sufficiently fixed to receiving materials.
- the fixing temperature is not particularly limited, but is preferably from 120 to 170 °C, and more preferably from 120 to 160°C.
- the fixing temperature is too low, toner images cannot be sufficiently fixed In contrast, fixing at a too high a temperature is not prefer able in view of energy saving
- the fixing devices are broadly classified into internal heating devices in which a fixing member (a roller or a belt) heated from the backside thereof (i.e., the side not contacting toner images) fixes toner images upon application of'heat and pressure thereto, and external heating devices in which a fixing member (a roller or a belt) heated from the front side thereof (i.e., the side contacting toner images) fixes toner images upon application of heat and pressure thereto. Combinations of the internal heating devices and the external heating devices can also be used.
- the fixing member has a heat source (such as heaters and halogen lamps) inside thereof.
- a heat source such as heaters and halogen lamps
- the external heating fixing devices it is preferable that a part of the fixing member is heated with a heat source
- the heat source is not particularly limited, and for example, electromagnetic induction heating devices are used
- the electromagnetic induction heating device is not particularly limited, and devices including a magnetic field generation member and a heat generation member capable of generating heat utilizing electromagnetic induction.
- Suitable devices for use in electromagnetic induction heating include devices having an induction coil which is set close to a fixing member (such as heat rollers), a shield layer on one side of'which the coil is arranged, and an insulating layer which is formed on the opposite side of'the shield layer.
- a fixing member such as heat rollers
- the heat roller serving as a fixing member is preferably a magnetic roller or a heat pipe
- the induction coil is preferably set so as to face half of'the heat roller, wherein a fixing member (such as pressure rollers and endless belts) is contacted with a portion of the other half of the heat roller.
- a fixing member such as pressure rollers and endless belts
- FIG. 9 illustrates a belt fixing device which is an internal heating fixing device.
- a belt fixing device 510 includes a heat roller 511, a fixing roller 512, a fixing belt 513, and a pressure roller 514
- the fixing belt 513 is rotated while tightly stretched by the heat roller 511 and the fixing roller 512, which are rotatable, and is heated to a predetermined temperature by the heat roller 511.
- the heat roller 511 has a heat source 515 therein.
- the temperature of the heat roller 511 is measured with a sensor 517 to be controlled.
- the fixing roller 512 is rotatably set while contacted with the inner surface of the fixing belt 513.
- the pressure roller 514 is rotatably set while contacted with the outer surface of' the fixing belt 513 and pressing the fixing belt to the fixing roller 512. Since the hardness of the surface of the fixing belt 513 is lower than that of the pressure roller 514, the fixing belt is deformed toward the fixing roller 512 at the nip N as illustrated in FIG. 9
- the receiving material sheet S bearing thereon a toner image T to be fixed is fed to the heat roller 511.
- the toner image T is heated by the heat roller 511 which is heated to the predetermined temperature by a heat source 515, and the fixing belt 513, and thereby the toner image T is melted
- the receiving material sheet S bearing the melted toner image is fed into the nip N, at which the toner image is pressed to the sheet S by the fixing roller 512 and the pressure roller 514 while the toner image is contacted with the surface of the fixing belt 513, resulting in fixation of the toner image on the sheet S.
- the receiving material sheet S After passing the nip N, the receiving material sheet S is then released from the fixing belt 513 to be fed to a tray (not shown) In this regard, since the nip N is curved as mentioned above, the receiving material sheet S is discharged toward the pressure roller 514, and thereby occurrence of a winding problem in that the sheet S is wound around the fixing belt 513, resulting in jamming of the sheet can be prevented
- the surface of the fixing belt 513 is cleaned by a cleaning roller 516.
- FIG. 10 illustrates a heat roller fixing device.
- a fixing device 518 includes a heat roller 520 and a pressure roller 530.
- the heat roller 520 has a metal cylinder 521, which is covered with an offset preventing layer 522 and inside which a heat lamp 523 is arranged
- the pressure roller 530 has a metal cylinder 531, which is covered with an offset preventing layer 532
- the pressure roller 530 may have a heat lamp 533 therein as illustrated in FIG 10 .
- the heat roller 520 and the pressure roller 530 are rotated while pressed to each other by a spring (not shown).
- the hardness of the offset preventing layer 522 of the heat roller 520 is lower than that of'the offset preventing layer 532 of the pressure roller 530, and therefore the offset preventing layer 522 is deformed (i.e , recessed) at the nip N as illustrated in FIG 10 .
- the receiving material sheet S bearing thereon the toner image T to be fixed is fed to the nip N.
- the toner image T is heated by the heat roller 520 which is heated to the predetermined temperature by the heat lamp 523, and thereby the toner image is melted.
- the toner image T is pressed to the sheet S by the pressure roller 530, and thereby the toner image is fixed on the sheet S.
- the receiving material sheet S After passing the nip N, the receiving material sheet S is then fed to a tray (not shown).
- the receiving material sheet S is discharged toward the pressure roller 530, and thereby occurrence of a winding problem in that the sheet S is wound around the heat roller 520 can be prevented.
- the surface of'the heat roller 520 is cleaned with a cleaning roller (not shown).
- FIG. 11 illustrates an electromagnetic induction heat fixing device which is an external heating fixing device and which uses a fixing belt, a fixing roller and a pressure roller
- an electromagnetic induction heat fixing device 570 includes a heat roller 566, a fixing roller 580, a fixing belt 567, a pressure roller 590 and an electromagnetic induction heat member 560
- the fixing belt 567 is tightly stretched by the heat roller 566 and the fixing roller 580, which are rotatable, and is heated to a predetermined temperature by the heat roller 566.
- the heat roller 566 includes a magnetic metal cylinder, which is made of a magnetic metal (such as iron, cobalt and nickel) or a magnetic metal alloy (such as alloys of'the above-mentioned metals) and which has an outside diameter of from 20 to 40 mm and a thickness of from 0.3 to 1.0 mm. Therefore, the heat roller 566 has a low heat capacity and thereby the roller can be rapidly heated to the predetermined temperature.
- a magnetic metal such as iron, cobalt and nickel
- a magnetic metal alloy such as alloys of'the above-mentioned metals
- the fixing roller 580 includes a metal cylinder 581 made of a metal such as stainless steel, and an elastic layer 582 which is formed on the metal cylinder 581 using a heat resistant elastic material such as solid silicone rubbers and foamed silicone rubbers.
- the fixing roller 580 is rotated while contacted with the inner surface of the fixing belt 567
- the fixing roller 580 and the pressure roller 590 form a nip N having a predetermined width Therefore, the fixing roller has an outside diameter of from 20 to 40 mm, which is greater than that of the heat roller 566.
- the elastic layer 582 has a thickness of from 4 to 6 mm.
- the fixing roller 580 is designed so as to have a large heat capacity than the heat roller 566, and thereby the warm-up time of'the heat roller 566 is reduced
- the pressure roller 590 includes a metal cylinder 591 made of a metal having a high heat conductivity such as copper, aluminum and stainless steel, and an elastic layer 592 which is formed on the metal cylinder 591 using a heat resistant elastic material having a good toner releasability The pressure roller 590 is rotated while contacted with the inner surface of the fixing belt 567 so as to press the fixing belt to the fixing roller 580
- the electromagnetic induction heat member 560 is set close to the heat roller 566, and extends in a direction parallel to the axis of'the heat roller 566.
- the heat member 560 includes an exciting coil 561 serving as a magnetic field generation device, and a coil guide plate 562, around which the coil is wound
- the coil guide plate 562 has a half pipe form and is set close to the heat roller 566.
- the exciting coil 561 is prepared by winding a single wire along the surface of the coil guide plate 562 in a reciprocating manner so that the wire extends in the longitudinal direction of'the coil guide plate 562.
- the oscillating circuit of the exciting coil 561 is connected with a frequency-changeable driving power source (not shown).
- an exciting coil core 563 which is made of' a ferromagnetic material such as fenites and which has a half'pipe form is set close to the exciting coil 561 while supported by a support 564.
- the electromagnetic induction heat fixing device 570 illustrated in FIG 11 when an electric power is applied to the exciting coil 561 of the electromagnetic induction heat member 560 is heated, an alternating magnetic field is formed in the vicinity of the induction heat member 560, and thereby the heat roller 566, which is close to the exciting coil 561 and which is surrounded by the coil 561, is efficiently heated due to eddy current generated therein.
- the receiving material sheet S is fed to the nip N formed between the fixing roller 580 and the pressure roller 590
- the toner image T on the receiving material sheet S is heated by the fixing belt 567, which is heated by the heat roller 566 at a contact portion W1 of the heat roller, and thereby the toner image I is melted
- the sheet S bearing the melted toner image is fed to the nip N, and the toner image is pressed by the pressure roller 590 toward the fixing roller 580 while contacted with the surface of the fixing belt 567, resulting in fixation of the toner image T on the sheet S.
- the receiving material sheet S bearing the fixed toner image thereon is released from the fixing belt 567 and is then fed to a tray (not shown)
- the receiving material sheet S is discharged toward the pressure roller 590, and thereby occurrence of a winding problem in that the sheet S is wound around the fixing belt 567 can be prevented
- the surface of the fixing belt 567 is cleaned with a cleaning roller (not shown)
- FIG. 12 illustrates another electromagnetic induction heat fixing device which is an external heating fixing device and which uses two rollers.
- a fixing device 535 includes a fixing roller 540, a pressure roller 550 contacted with the fixing roller 540, and electromagnetic induction heating sources 536
- the fixing roller 540 includes a metal cylinder 541, and a heat insulating elastic layer 542, a heat generation layer 543, and a release layer 544 which are overlaid on the metal cylinder 541 in this order.
- the pressure roller 550 also includes a metal cylinder 551, and a heat insulating elastic layer 552, a heat generation layer 553, and a release layer 554, which are overlaid on the metal cylinder 551 in this order.
- Each of' the release layers 544 and 554 are made of a tetrafloroethylene - perfluoroalkyl vinyl ether copolymer (PFA)
- the fixing roller 540 and the pressure roller 550 are rotated while pressed to each other by a spring (not shown) Thus, the nip N is formed therebetween.
- the electromagnetic induction heating sources 536 are set close to the fixing roller 540 and the pressure roller 550, respectively, to heat the heat generation layers 543 and 553 by electromagnetic induction heating.
- the fixing device 535 illustrated in FIG. 12 has advantages such that the fixing roller 540 and the pressure roller 550 are evenly and efficiently heated, and a high surface pressure can be applied to the nip N because of a combination of rollers is used
- an oil is applied to the fixing member such as fixing belts and fixing rollers using an oil application device.
- the oil application device is not particularly limited, and for example, application devices including an oil application roller having a heat resistant felt or a heat resistant porous layer on the surface thereof which is soaked with an oil, is pressed to the fixing roller to apply the oil to the fixing roller are used
- FIG. 13 illustrates an oil application device set on a fixing device for use in the image forming apparatus of the present invention.
- an oil supplied from an oil container 217 to a felt 211 by a pump 220 is coated on the surface of a fixing roller 213.
- the amount of the oil on the surface of the fixing roller 213 is controlled by a blade 216.
- the coating amount of the oil can be changed by changing the pressure of the blade 216 to the fixing roller 213. Specifically, by increasing the pressure of the blade 216, the coating amount of the oil can be decreased In contrast, by decreasing the pressure of the blade, the coating amount of the oil can be increased.
- a toner image 218 formed on a receiving material 219 is fixed by the fixing roller 213 and the pressure roller 215 when the receiving material 219 passes through the nip between the two rollers
- Numerals 212 and 214 respectively denote a cleaning roller for cleaning the surface of the fixing roller 213, and a discharging roller for discharging the receiving material 219 bearing thereon the fixed toner image from the fixing device.
- the oil application roller preferably has a porous outermost layer made of a polytetrafluoroethylene resin.
- Suitable oils to be applied to the fixing roller include oils having high heat resistance Among the heat resistant oils, silicone oils are preferably used. Specific examples of the silicone oils include polydimethylsilicones, polyphenylmethylsilicones, etc. Among the silicone oils, amino-modified silicone oils are preferably used because of having a good wettability to fixing roller.
- the viscosity of the oils is preferably from 1 Pa ⁇ s (1,000 cps) to 100 Pa ⁇ s (100,000 cps) When the viscosity is too low, a large amount of oil is exuded from the application roller at a time In order
- the amount of'oil applied to the fixing member is preferably from 0.1 to 10 ⁇ g/cm 2 and more preferably from 0.2 to 7 ⁇ g/cm 2 .
- the amount is too small, the releasability of the fixing member is deteriorated when the fixing speed is high.
- the amount is too large, problems such that receiving papers become transparent due to penetration of the oil into the papers, and thereby formation of additional images using a pencil or ball point pen or inkjet printing cannot be well performed on such oil-penetrated receiving papers occur.
- toner particles remaining on the surface of the image bearing member without being transferred are removed therefrom by a cleaning device.
- the cleaning device is not particularly limited, and known cleaning devices can be used. Specific examples thereof include magnetic brush cleaners, electrostatic brush cleaners, magnetic roller cleaners, blade cleaners, brush cleaners, and web cleaners, etc. Among these cleaners, blade cleaners are preferably used because of having a good cleanability, low costs and small size.
- Suitable materials for use in the cleaning blades include urethane rubbers, silicone rubbers, fluorine-containing rubbers, chloroprene rubbers, butadiene rubbers. Among these materials, methane rubbers are preferable.
- FIG. 14 illustrate a cleaning blade.
- a cleaning blade 613 is contacted with the photoreceptor 1 serving as an image bearing member at a contact point 615
- the cleaning blade 613 is set so as to counter the photoreceptor 1, and a surface 617 (i.e., toner blocking surface) of the cleaning blade 613 and the surface of the photoreceptor form a space SP, which is preferably an acute angle.
- the surface 617 has an outermost layer 618 thereon, which has a higher friction coefficient than the cleaning blade 613.
- Specific examples of the materials having a high friction coefficient for use in the outermost layer 618 include diamond-like carbon (DLC), but are not limited thereto. It is preferable that the outermost layer 618 is formed on a portion of the surface 617 so as not to contact the surface of the photoreceptor 1.
- the cleaning device including the cleaning blade 613 also includes a toner collection blade for collecting toner particles scraped off by the blade 613, a toner collection coil for feeding the collected toner particles to a residual toner collector, etc., which are not shown in FIG. 14
- FIG. 15 illustrates a cleaning-less image forming apparatus including a developing device having a cleaning function.
- the image forming apparatus includes the photoreceptor 1 serving as the image hearing member, a brush charger 620 serving as a contact charger for charging the photoreceptor 1, a light irradiating device 603 for irradiating the photoreceptor 1 with light L to form an electrostatic latent image on the photoreceptor 1, a developing device 604 for developing the electrostatic latent image with a developer including a toner to form a toner image on the photoreceptor 1, a receiving material feeding device 640 for feeding a receiving material sheet P, a transfer device 650 for transferring the toner image onto the receiving material sheet, and a feeder 680 for feeding the receiving material sheet.
- toner particles remaining on the surface of the photoreceptor 1 without being transferred to the receiving material sheet P are transported to the brush charger 620.
- the residual toner particles are temporarily collected by a magnetic bmsh of a charging member 621 of the brush charger 620
- the thus collected toner particles are discharged from the magnetic brush to the surface of the photoreceptor 1, and the discharged toner particles are collected by a developer bearing member 631 together with the developer on the developer bearing member
- the toner particles are returned to the developing device 604 to be reused for developing
- Numerals 641 and 642 denote a feeding roller and a pair of registration rollers.
- toner particles remaining on the photoreceptor 1 are collected due to a development bias (i.e., the potential difference between the DC voltage applied to the developer bearing member 631 and the surface potential of the photoreceptor 1).
- a development bias i.e., the potential difference between the DC voltage applied to the developer bearing member 631 and the surface potential of the photoreceptor 1.
- residual toner particles are collected by the developing device to be reused, i.e., the image forming apparatus is free from maintenance
- the apparatus is a cleaner-less system, and therefore the size of the image forming apparatus can be reduced.
- the image forming apparatus optionally performs a discharging process.
- a discharging process charges remaining on the image bearing member (photoreceptor) are discharged using a discharging device.
- the discharging device is not particularly limited, and any known dischargers can be used.
- discharging lamps are used for the discharging device.
- a toner recycle process can be optionally performed.
- the toner recycle process is such that toner particles collected by the cleaning device are fed to the developing device by a recycling device to be recycled. Any known powder feeding devices can be used for the recycling device
- a controlling process is performed by a controller to control the above-mentioned processes.
- the controller include sequencers, and computers.
- FIG. 16 is a schematic view illustrating an embodiment of the image forming apparatus of'the present invention.
- an image forming apparatus 100 includes a photoreceptor drum 10 (hereinafter referred to as a photoreceptor 10) serving as the image bearing member; a charging roller 20 serving as the charging device; a light irradiator 30 serving as the latent image forming device; a developing device 40 serving as the image developing device; an intermediate transfer medium 50; a cleaner 60 serving as the cleaning device and including a cleaning blade; and a discharging lamp 70 serving as the discharging device.
- a photoreceptor drum 10 hereinafter referred to as a photoreceptor 10
- a charging roller 20 serving as the charging device
- a light irradiator 30 serving as the latent image forming device
- a developing device 40 serving as the image developing device
- an intermediate transfer medium 50 a cleaner 60 serving as the cleaning device and including a cleaning blade
- a discharging lamp 70 serving as the discharging device.
- the intermediate transfer medium 50 is an endless belt which is rotated in a direction indicated by an arrow by three rollers 51 arranged therein while tightly stretched by the rollers. At least one of the three rollers 51 applies a transfer bias (first transfer bias) to the intermediate transfer medium 50 A cleaner 90 is provided to clean the surface of the intermediate transfer medium 50.
- a transfer roller 80 On the upper side of the intermediate transfer medium 50, a transfer roller 80 is provided which applies a transfer bias (a second transfer bias) to a receiving material 95 on which a toner image is to be transferred.
- a corona charger 58 is provided to charge the toner image on the intermediate transfer medium 50 before the toner image is transferred to the receiving material 95.
- a developing device 40 includes a developing belt 41; a black developing unit 45K; a yellow developing unit 45Y; a magenta developing unit 45M; and a cyan developing unit 45C.
- Each of'the developing units includes a developer containing portion 42 (42K, 42Y, 42M or 42C), a developer supplying roller 43 (43K, 43Y, 43M or 43C), and a developing roller 44 (44K, 44Y, 44M or 44C).
- the developing belt 41 is rotatably supported by plural rollers and is contacted with the photoreceptor 10
- the surface of the photoreceptor 10 is uniformly charged with the charging roller 20.
- the light irradiator 30 irradiates the charged surface of the photoreceptor 10 with imagewise light to form an electrostatic latent image on the photoreceptor 10.
- the developing device 40 develops the latent image with color toners to sequentially form color toner images on the photoreceptor 10.
- the color toner images are transferred to the intermediate transfer medium 50 (first transfer) to form a toner image (e.g., a full color toner image) thereon while at least one of the rollers 51 applies a transfer bias thereto.
- the toner image formed on the intermediate transfer medium 50 is then transferred to the receiving material 95 (second transfer). Particles of the toner remaining on the photoreceptor 10 are removed with the cleaner 60 and charges remaining on the photoreceptor 10 are removed by irradiating the photoreceptor 10 with light using the discharging lamp 70.
- FIG. 17 Another image forming apparatus is illustrated in FIG 17 .
- an image forming apparatus 101' has the same configuration as that of the image forming apparatus illustrated in FIG 16 except that the black, yellow, magenta and cyan developing units 45K, 45Y, 45M and 45C are directly contacted with the photoreceptor 10 without using the developing belt 41.
- the action of the image forming apparatus is also the same as that of the image forming apparatus illustrated in FIG 16
- FIG. 18 is the overview of another embodiment of the image forming apparatus suitable for the present invention, which is a tandem-type color image forming apparatus
- a tandem-type color image forming apparatus 500 includes an image forming section 150, a paper feeding section 200, a scanner 300 and an automatic document feeder 400
- the image forming section 150 includes an endless intermediate transfer medium 50 which is provided in the center of the image forming section 150.
- the intermediate transfer medium 50 is rotated in the clockwise direction by rollers 14, 15 and 16 while tightly stretched by the rollers.
- a cleaner 17 is provided near the roller 15 to remove particles of the toner remaining on the surface of the intermediate transfer medium.
- the image forming units 18 for forming yellow, magenta, cyan and black toner images are arranged side by side on the intermediate transfer medium 50.
- the image forming units 18 include respective photoreceptors 10Y, 10M, 10C and 10K.
- Numeral 120 denotes a tandem type developing device.
- the developing device 120 includes four developing devices arranged in the respective four image forming units 18.
- a light irradiator 21 is arranged at a location over the image forming units 18.
- a second transfer device 22 is provided below the intermediate transfer medium 50
- the second transfer device 22 includes an endless belt 24 which is rotatably stretched a pair of rollers 23.
- the endless belt 24 feeds a receiving material so that the toner images on the intermediate transfer medium 50 are transferred to the receiving material while sandwiched by the intermediate transfer medium 50 and the endless belt 24
- a fixing device 25 is arranged at a position near the second transfer device 22.
- the fixing device 25 includes an endless fixing belt 26 and a pressure roller 27 which presses the fixing belt 26.
- a sheet reversing device 28 configured to reverse the receiving material is provided at a position near the fixing device 25, to produce double-sided copies.
- An original to be copied is set on an original table 130 of the automatic document feeder 400 Alternatively, the original is directly set on a glass plate 32 of the scanner 300 after the automatic document feeder 400 is opened, followed by closing of'the automatic document feeder 400.
- a start button (not shown) is pushed, the color image on the original on the glass plate 32 is scanned with a first traveler 33 and a second traveler 34 which move in the right direction.
- the original is set on the table 130 of'the automatic document feeder 400
- the color image thereon is scanned with the first and second travelers 33 and 34
- the first traveler 33 irradiates the color image on the original with light
- the second traveler 34 reflects the light reflected from the color image to send the color image light to a sensor 36 via a focusing lens 35
- color image information i.e., black, yellow, magenta and cyan color image data
- the black, yellow, magenta and cyan color image data are sent to the respective black, yellow, magenta and cyan color image forming units 18, and black, yellow, magenta and cyan color toner images are formed on the respective photoreceptors 10K, 10Y, 10M and 10C.
- the toner image forming operation is the same as that mentioned in the image forming apparatus illustrated in FIG. 16 .
- FIG. 19 is a schematic view illustrating a part of'the image forming units 18.
- Numeral 160, 61, 62, 63 and 64 denote a charger, a developing device, a transfer roller, a cleaner and a discharger.
- the developing device 61 includes agitators 68, a developing roller 72, and a regulating blade 73 configured to form a developer layer 65 on the surface of'the developing roller.
- Numeral 71 denotes a toner sensor configured to determine the toner concentration.
- Character L denotes imagewise light.
- the cleaner 63 includes cleaning blade 75, a cleaning brush 76, a roller 77, a blade 78 and a toner recycling device 79 configured to feed the collected toner particles to the developing device 61.
- the thus prepared black, yellow, magenta and cyan color toner images are transferred one by one to the intermediate transfer medium 50 which is rotated by the rollers 14, 15 and 16, resulting in formation of' a full color toner image on the intermediate transfer medium 50.
- Numeral 62 denotes a transfer charger.
- one of paper feeding rollers 142 is selectively rotated to feed the top paper sheet of paper sheets stacked in a paper cassette 144 in a paper bank 143 while the paper sheet is separated one by one by a separation roller 145 when plural paper sheets are continuously fed.
- the paper sheet is fed to a passage 148 in the image forming section 150 through a passage 146 in the paper feeding section 200, and is stopped once by a registration roller 49.
- Numeral 14 denotes feed rollers.
- a paper sheet can also be fed from a manual paper tray 54 to a passage 53 by a separation roller 52 The thus fed paper sheet is also stopped once by the registration roller 49.
- the registration roller 49 is generally grounded, but a bias can be applied thereto to remove paper dust therefrom.
- the thus prepared full color toner image on the intermediate transfer medium 50 is transferred to the paper sheet, which is timely fed by the registration roller 49, at the contact point of the second transfer device 22 with the intermediate transfer medium 50. Particles of the toner remaining on the surface of the intermediate transfer medium 50 even after the second image transfer operation are removed therefrom by the cleaner 17.
- the paper sheet having the full color toner image thereon is then fed by the second transfer device 22 to the fixing device 25, and the toner image is fixed on the paper sheet upon application of heat and pressure Then the paper sheet is discharged from the image forming section 150 by a discharge roller 56 while the path is properly selected by a paper path changing pick 55. Thus, a copy is stacked on a tray 57
- the paper sheet having a toner image on one side thereof is fed to the sheet reversing device 28 to be reversed. Then the paper sheet is fed to the second transfer device 24 so that an image is transferred to the other side of the paper sheet.
- the image is also fixed by the fixing device 25 and then the copy is discharged to the tray 57 by the discharge roller 56.
- the image forming apparatus can include a toner container containing a toner or a developer therein, which is to be fed to the developing device.
- the container is not particularly limited, and known containers can be used
- the main body (bottle) is not particularly limited with respect to the size, shape, structure and constitutional material
- a cylindrical bottle is used
- the bottle has a spiral groove inside surface thereof so that the toner or developer therein is fed to the exit of the bottle when rotated. It is preferable that the body of the bottle having a spiral groove is shrunk like an accordion.
- Suitable materials for constituting the bottle include materials with a high dimensional accuracy.
- Specific examples of such materials include resins such as polyester resins, polyethylene resins, polypropylene resins, polystyrene resins, polyvinyl chloride resins, polyacrylic resins, polycarbonate resins, ABS resins, polyacetal resins, etc.
- the toner container is detachably attached to the image forming apparatus to supply a toner or a developer to the image forming apparatus.
- the container has good combination of preservability, feedability and handleability.
- the process cartridge for use in the present invention includes at least an image bearing member configured to bear an electrostatic latent image, and a developing device configured to develop the electrostatic latent image with a developer including a toner to form a toner image on the image bearing member, and optionally includes one or more of' a charging device for charging the image bearing member, a light irradiating device for irradiating the charged image bearing member to form the electrostatic latent image, a transfer device for transferring the toner image onto a receiving material, a cleaning device for cleaning the surface of the image bearing member, and a discharging device for discharging residual charges on the image beating member.
- the developing device included in the process cartridge includes at least a developer containing section for containing the developer, and a developer bearing member for bearing and feeding the developer to the photoreceptor to develop an electrostatic latent image, and optionally includes a developer layer controlling member for forming a uniform developer layer on the developer bearing member.
- the developer is a one-component developer or a two-component developer
- the above-mentioned devices for use in the image forming apparatus of the present invention can be used for the charging device, light irradiating device, transfer device, cleaning device, and discharging device of the process cartridge.
- the process cartridge of the present invention is detachably attached to electrophotographic image forming apparatus such as copiers, printers and facsimiles, and preferably to the image forming apparatus of'the present invention.
- FIG. 20 illustrates a process cartridge for use in the present invention.
- the process cartridge includes an image bearing member 101 bearing an electrostatic latent image, a charging device 102, a developing device 104, a transfer device 108 and a cleaning device 107.
- the process cartridge can optionally include other devices if necessary
- numerals 103 and 105 denote light from a light irradiator and a receiving material, respectively.
- the image forming operations of the process cartridge is the same as those mentioned above in the image forming apparatus of the present invention.
- the image bearing member 101 is rotated in the direction indicated by an arrow, and is charged by the charging device 102, followed by light irradiation 103 by the light irradiating device (not shown) to form an electrostatic latent image thereon.
- the developing device 104 develops the electrostatic latent image to form a toner image on the image bearing member, and the transfer device 108 transfers the toner image onto the receiving material 105 Thus, an image is printed out
- the surface of the image bearing member 101 is cleaned by the cleaning device 107, and residual charges on the image bearing member are removed by the discharging device (not shown) These image forming operations are repeated to produce the next image
- the conditions of the flow tester are as follows:
- the glass transition temperature (Tg) of a resin can be measured with a differential scanning colorimeter DSC210 from Seiko Instruments, Inc. The method is as follows.
- the acid value of' a resin is determined by the method described in JIS K0070 except that a mixture solvent of acetone and toluene (mixing ratio of 1:1) is used as the solvent instead of'the mixture solvent of ethanol and ether.
- the melting point of' a resin can be measured with a differential scanning colorimeter DSC210 from Seiko Instruments, Inc. The method is as follows.
- the volume average particle diameter is determined by an instrument COULTER MULIISIZER II from Beckman Coulter Inc. The measurement method is mentioned above
- the amount of calcium carbonate included in a receiving material is determined by analyzing the surface of a receiving material with a Fourier transform infrared spectrometer (F T-IR) AVANIOR 370 from Thermo Electron Co., and making calculation using the equation (2) mentioned above
- the alcohol component, carboxylic acid component (other than trimellitic anhydride), and esterification catalyst listed in Table 1 were fed into a 5-litter four-necked flask equipped with a nitrogen feed pipe, a dewatering pipe, an agitator and a thermocouple.
- the mixture was subjected to condensation polymerization for 10 hours at 230 °C under a nitrogen gas flow, followed by a reaction for 1 hour at 230 °C under a pressure of 80 kPa. After the reaction product was cooled to 220 °C, trimellitic anhydride was added to the reaction product, and the mixture was reacted for 1 hour under a normal pressure.
- the reaction product was further reacted at 220 °C under a pressure of 20 kPa so that the reaction product has the predetermined softening point.
- Polyester resin 1 50 parts Polyester resin 2 (R2) 50 parts Carbon black (CB) 10 parts Carnauba wax (CW) 2 parts N-steatylsteaiamide (SA) 2 parts Zinc salicylate (ZS) 1 part
- the mixture was kneaded with a double-axis extruder from Toshiba Machine Co , Ltd., followed by cooling on a steel belt
- the kneading operation was performed so that the temperature of the kneaded mixture at the exit of the extruder is 120 °C.
- the kneaded mixture was then pulverized with a jet mill so that the resultant powder has a volume average particle diameter of 8.0 ⁇ m ⁇ 0.5 ⁇ m.
- the powder was then subjected to air classification to prepare toner particles.
- One hundred (100) parts of'the thus prepared toner particles were mixed with 1.0 part of a silica (R-972 from Nippon Aerosil Co.) serving as an external additive using a HENSCHEL MIXER mixer.
- a toner 1 was prepared.
- each toner was pressed under a pressure of 100 kg/cm 2 using a pelletizing machine to prepare pellets of the toners each having a diameter of 5 mm
- the pellets were set on an aluminum foil set on a hot plate (PC-400D from Coining) to be heated for 5 minutes at 180 °C under an environmental conditions of' 23 °C and 55%RH After heating, the pellets were allowed to settle on a flat place together with the aluminum foil to be cooled to room temperature.
- the amount of nitrogen atoms present in a surface portion of the pellet was determined by X-ray photoelectron spectroscopy (XPS). The measurement conditions are as follows.
- the amount of nitrogen atoms is classified into the following categories
- a calcined ferrite powder which serves as a core material of the carrier and which has a formula of (MgO) 18 (MnO) 49 5 (Fe 2 O 3 ) 48 0 and an average particle diameter of 35 ⁇ m was coated with the coating liquid prepared above using a coating machine SPIRA COTA from Okada Seiko Co, Ltd.
- the thickness of the cover layer was 0.15 ⁇ m
- the coated carrier was calcined at 150 °C for 1 hour using an electric furnace After cooling, the coated carrier, was sieved using a screen with openings of 106 ⁇ m
- a coated carrier was prepared
- Each of the developers was set in a color laser printer (IPSIO CX8200 from Ricoh Co , Ltd.), and images were produced under the conditions mentioned below in Tables 6-10
- the color printer can freely change the linear speed thereof, and has an oil applicator, which can freely change the coating amount of oil
- the toners and developers were evaluated as follows.
- the area (A2) of the oil was also measured at a time 24 hours after dropping the oil to determine how the drop spread.
- the oils used for this test are described in Tables 6-10 below
- the oil spread property (OSP) of the toner is graded as follows.
- the produced image was rubbed with a smear cloth (defined in JIS L0849) set on a clock meter (Model 1 from Atlas Electric Device Co.)
- the optical density of the portion of the smear cloth rubbing the image was measured with the densitometer X-RITE 938.
- the fixability of the toner is graded as follows.
- Table 6 Ex. 1 Ex. 2 Ex. 3 Ex. 4 Ex. 5 Ex. 6 Number of toner (developer) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Amount of amide wax ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ Oil used** A B A A A A Oil spread property ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ RC* Linear speed (mm/sec) 1950 1950 1950 1950 1950 Coating amount of oil ( ⁇ g/cm 2 ) 0.3 0.3 6 11 0.3 0.3 Content of CaCO 3 in receiving material 0.49 0.49 049 0.49 0.02 0.62 Fixability ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ RC*: Image recording conditions Oil** A: Silicone oil type SS from Ricoh Co., Ltd.
Landscapes
- Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Spectroscopy & Molecular Physics (AREA)
- Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
- Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
- Developing Agents For Electrophotography (AREA)
- Electrostatic Charge, Transfer And Separation In Electrography (AREA)
Description
- The present invention relates to an electrophotographic image forming method.
- Recently, a need exists for an electrophotographic image forming method by which high quality images can be produced at a high speed In order to produce high quality images fixation of toner images is an important factor. Specifically, when high speed image formation is performed, the fixing property of fixed toner images deteriorates. Therefore, it is a problem to be solved that toner images are sufficiently fixed even at a high speed image forming (fixing) speed.
- There is a technique in that the fixing temperature is increased as the image forming speed is increased in order to prevent deterioration of the fixing property of toner images. However, the technique causes other problems such that the inner temperature of the image forming apparatus increases, resulting in deterioration of the image forming materials such as toners, and photoreceptors; the life of the fixing members shortens; and a large amount of energy is consumed. Namely, the technique is not satisfactory Therefore, a need exists for a toner which can be well fixed in a small amount of energy even when high speed image formation is performed.
- Various attempts have been made to develop such a toner For example, techniques in that the thermal properties of binder resins used for toner is controlled have been investigated. Specifically, published unexamined Japanese patent applications Nos. (hereinafter referred to as JP-As)
60-90344 64-15755 02-82267 03-229264 03-41470 11-305486 -
JP-A 62-63940 JP-As 11-249339 2001-222138 JP-A 2002-214833 - On the other hand, fixing devices often cause problems in that when image fixation is performed, the surface of a fixing member is contaminated with toner particles, which are transferred from toner images to be fixed on a receiving material sheet, and thereby the toner particles are re-transferred to the sheet or another sheet, thereby soiling images, or a receiving material sheet is wound around the fixing member by being affixed to the melted toner particles on the fixing member, resulting in occurrence of a jamming problem. In attempting to prevent such problems, techniques in that a releasing oil is applied to a fixing member have been proposed and used.
- Recently, toner including a release agent is used. However, even when such toner is used for high speed image forming apparatus, it is necessary to use a fixing device equipped with an oil applicator for the apparatus although the coating amount of oil can be decreased compared to a case where toner including no release agent is used.
- Various oil applicators have been disclosed. For example, oil application devices including an oil application roller having a heat resistant felt or a porous layer on the surface thereof, which is soaked with an oil, is pressed to a fixing member to apply the oil thereto have been proposed and used. However, when the oil application devices are used for high speed image forming apparatus, toner images on a receiving material cannot be well fixed due to insufficient fixation energy although the fixing member has good releasability from the toner images, resulting in prevention of occurrence of an offset problem.
- Because of these reasons, a need exists for an image forming method and apparatus by which high quality images having good fixing property can be formed using a toner including a release agent and a fixing device having an oil applicator.
-
EP-A-1168089 relates to a toner including mother toner particles including at least two resins A and B and a wax each of which is incompatible with the others; and an external additive including at least one of a particulate inorganic material and a particulate resin. -
EP-A-1111474 relates to an image forming method including the steps of forming an electrostatic latent image on a latent image holding member; developing the electrostatic latent image by using a color toner to form a toner image; transferring the toner image onto a recording material; and fixing the toner image to the recording material by a heat fixing device comprising a fixing film for contacting the toner image on the recording material, a heating member for heating the fixing film, and a pressing member for imparting a pressure to the recording material, wherein the color toner contains at least a binder resin, a colorant and wax. - As an aspect of the present invention, an image forming method is provided which includes:
- forming an electrostatic image on an
image bearing member 321; 1; 10; 101; - developing the electrostatic image with a developer including a toner to form a toner image on the image bearing member;
- transferring the toner image onto a
receiving material 326; S; P; 95; 105 optionally via anintermediate transfer medium 50; - fixing the toner image to the receiving material with a
fixing member 513; 520; 567; 540;213;and - applying an oil to the fixing member.
- In this image forming method, the toner includes a binder resin, a colorant and a wax, and satisfies the following relationship (A):
- The oil spreading property (OSP) is determined by a method including:
- pressing about 2 g of the toner at a pressure of 100 kg/cm2 to form the pellet of' the toner having a cylindrical form with a diameter of 40 mm and a thickness of' 2 mm;
- heating the pellet on a hot plate heated to 180 °C for 5 minutes under an environmental condition of 23 °C and 55%RH;
- setting the pellet on a horizontal plane so that a flat surface of the pellet faces upward to cool the pellet under the environmental condition;
- dropping 9 mg of the oil on the flat surface of'the pellet from a
point 1 cm above the flat surface of'the pellet; and - measuring the area of the oil dropped on the flat surface of the pellet soon (30 seconds) after dropping the oil and 24 hours after dropping the oil to determine the oil spreading property (OSP),
- pressing about 30 mg of the toner for 1 minute at a pressure of 100 kg/cm2 to form a pellet of the toner having a cylindrical form with a diameter of about 5 mm;
- heating the pellet for 5 minutes on a hot plate heated to 180 °C under an environmental condition of 23 °C and 55%RH;
- cooling the pellet; and
- subjecting a flat surface of the pellet to an X-ray photoelectron spectroscopy to determine the amount of nitrogen atoms of the amide wax in the pellet of the toner.
- Various other objects, features and attendant advantages of'the present invention will be more fully appreciated as the same becomes better understood from the detailed description when considered in connection with the accompanying drawings in which like reference characters designate like corresponding parts throughout and wherein:
-
FIG 1 is a schematic view illustrating a charging roller for use in the image forming apparatus suitable for the present invention; -
FIG. 2 is a schematic view illustrating an example of'the image forming apparatus using the charging roller as a contact charger; -
FIG 3 is a schematic view illustrating an example of the image forming apparatus using the charging roller as a short range charger; -
FIG. 4 is a side view illustrating the short range charger illustrated inFIG. 3 ; -
FIG. 5 is a schematic view illustrating a one-component developing device for use in the image forming apparatus suitable for the present invention; -
FIG. 6 is a schematic view illustrating a two-component developing device for use in the image forming apparatus suitable for the present invention; -
FIG. 7 is a schematic view illustrating another example of the image forming apparatus suitable for the present invention, which uses a direct image transfer method; -
FIG. 8 is a schematic view illustrating another example of the image forming apparatus suitable for the present invention, which uses an indirect image transfer method; -
FIG 9 is a schematic view illustrating a fixing device using a belt for use in the image forming apparatus suitable for the present invention; -
FIG 10 is a schematic view illustrating a fixing device using heat rollers for use in the image forming apparatus suitable for the present invention; -
FIGS. 11 and12 are schematic views illustrating fixing devices utilizing electromagnetic induction heating for use in the image forming apparatus suitable for the present invention; -
FIG. 13 is a schematic view illustrating an oil applicator for use in the image forming apparatus suitable for the present invention; -
FIG. 14 is a schematic view illustrating a cleaning blade for use in the image forming apparatus suitable for the present invention; -
FIG. 15 is a schematic view illustrating another example of the image forming apparatus suitable for the present invention (i.e., a cleaner-less image forming apparatus); -
FIGS. 16-18 are schematic views illustrating other examples of the image forming apparatus suitable for the present invention; -
FIG. 19 is an enlarged view illustrating the image forming units of the image forming apparatus illustrated inFIG. 18 ; -
FIG. 20 is a schematic view illustrating an example of the process cartridge of the present invention. - Conventionally, fixing devices with an oil applicator are typically used for effectively fixing images of toner including no release agent (such as waxes) In this case, the releasability of the fixing member from toner can be enhanced, but another problem is caused by the applied oil Therefore, recently combinations of toner including a release agent and a fixing device without an oil applicator are typically used In this case, it is impossible to produce high quality images having good fixing property at a high speed.
- The present inventors have been studying to solve the problems mentioned above. As a result of the study, the following knowledge can be attained. Specifically, as a result of experiments in which an oil is dropped on pellets of various toners to determine the oil spreading property thereof, it is found that the smaller oil spreading property a toner has, the better fixability the toner has. Further, it is found that by using a combination of toner having a small oil spreading property (i.e., satisfying the above-mentioned relationship (A)) with a fixing device having an oil applicator, the above-mentioned problems can be solved.
- Next the image forming apparatus and method of the present invention will be explained in detail.
- The image forming apparatus suitable for the present invention includes at least an image bearing member; a latent image forming device (such as combinations of' a charging device and a light irradiating device) configured to form an electrostatic latent image on the image bearing member; a developing device configured to develop the electrostatic latent image with a developer including a toner to form a toner image on the image bearing member; a transfer device configured to transfer the toner image onto a receiving material optionally via an intermediate transfer medium; a fixing device configured to fix the toner image on the receiving material; and an oil applicator configured to apply an oil (such as silicone oils) to a fixing member of the fixing device
- The image forming apparatus can optionally include a cleaning device configured to clean the surface of'the image bearing member; a discharging device configured to discharge charges remaining on the surface of'the image bearing member after the image transfer operation; a toner recycling device configured to recycle the toner particles collected by the cleaning device; a controller configured to control the image forming operations of'the image forming apparatus; etc.
- The image forming method of'the present invention includes at least a latent image forming process (such as combinations of a charging process and a light irradiating process), a developing process, an image transfer process, and a fixing process. The image forming method can optionally include a cleaning process, a discharging process, a toner recycling process, a controlling process, etc
- The image forming method is preferably performed using the image forming apparatus of the present invention, and the latent image forming process, developing process, image transfer process, and fixing process are preferably performed by the latent image forming device (such as combinations of a charging device and a light irradiating device), developing device, transfer device, and fixing device of the present invention. The cleaning process, discharging process, toner recycling process and controlling process are performed by the cleaning device, discharging device, toner recycling device, and controller.
- In the present invention, the toner includes at least a binder resin, a colorant, and a wax
- The toner has the following property. Specifically, at first, about 2 g of the toner is subjected to a compression molding at a pressure of 100 kg/cm2 to form a cylindrical pellet of' the toner having a diameter of' about 40 mm and a thickness of about 2 mm. The pellet is then heated for 5 minutes on a hot plate heated to 180 °C under an environmental condition of 23 °C and 55%RH The pellet is then set on a horizontal plate under the environmental condition so that the flat surface of'the cylindrical pellet faces upward, to be cooled. Nine (9) milligrams of the oil used for the oil applicator is dropped on the flat surface of the pellet from a
point 1 cm above the flat surface of the pellet. The area (W1) of the oil dropped on the flat surface is measured soon (within 30 seconds) after the oil is dropped In addition, the area (W2) of the dropped oil is also measured 24 hours after the oil dropping operation In this regard, the oil spreading property (OSP) is defined by the following equation: - The method for determining the oil spread property (OSP) is explained later in detail.
- The oil spreading property is less than 200%, preferably not greater than 150%, and more preferably not greater than 125%. When the oil spreading property is too large, an abrasion problem in that fixed toner images are easily abraded by receiving material sheets and the toner powder formed by the abrasion of the toner images is adhered to the receiving material sheet or image forming members such as rollers, resulting in soiling of the backside of copies and contamination of'the image forming members.
- The toner preferably includes an amide wax, and the amount of nitrogen atoms of the amide wax in a pellet of'the toner determined by the following XPS method is from 0.5 to 3.0 atomic % based on the total of the detected atoms The method for determining the amount of nitrogen atoms of the amide wax includes:
- pressing about 30 mg of the toner for 1 minute at a pressure of 100 kg/cm2 to form the pellet of'the toner having a cylindrical form with a diameter of about 5 mm;
- heating the pellet for 5 minutes on a hot plate heated to 180 °C under an environmental condition of 23 °C and 55%RH;
- cooling the pellet;
- subjecting a flat surface of the pellet to an X-ray photoelectron spectroscopy (XPS) to determine the amount of nitrogen atoms present on the surface and in a surface portion of the pellet of the toner.
- When the amount of nitrogen atoms is too small, the fixability improving effect can be hardly produced. In contrast, when the amount of nitrogen atoms is too large (i.e., when the added amount of amide wax is too large), problems in that a film of the wax is formed on image forming members and the toner has poor fluidity occur
- In the present application, the conditions for XPS are as follows. Instrument: QUANTUM 2000 from PHI using an electron neutralization gun X-ray source: AlKα
- The amount of nitrogen atoms can be determined from the strength of the peak specific to nitrogen atoms.
- The penetration depth of the XPS is generally few nanometers.
- The image forming apparatus used in the present invention has a system linear speed of from 500 to 2000 mm/sec, and preferably from 1000 to 1800 mm/sec When the system linear speed is too low, the effects of'the present invention cannot be well produced. In contrast, when the system linear speed is too high, the developing process, transfer process and fixing process are insufficiently performed.
- Next, the devices and toner used for the image forming apparatus suitable for the present invention, and the processes of'the image forming method of the present invention will be explained in detail.
- The image beating member of the image forming apparatus of the present invention is not particularly limited with respect to the constitutional materials, shape, structure, size, etc For example, with respect to the shape, drum-form, sheet-form, and endless belt -form image bearing members can be used. With respect to the structure, single-layered structures and multi-layered structures can be adopted. The size is determined depending on the specification of the image forming apparatus
- The image bearing member is typically a photoreceptor such as inorganic photoreceptors including an inorganic photosensitive material such as amorphous silicon, selenium, CdS, and ZnO; and organic photoreceptors (OPCs) including an organic photosensitive material such as polysilane and phthalopolymethine
- Amorphous silicon photoreceptors for use in the present invention are typically prepared by the following method. A substrate is heated to a temperature of from 50 to 400 °C, and an amorphous silicon layer is formed thereon by a method such as vacuum deposition methods, sputtering methods, ion plating methods, thermal CVD (chemical vapor deposition) methods, photo-assisted CVD methods, and plasma CVD methods. Among these methods, plasma CVD methods are preferably used. Specifically, raw gaseous materials are decomposed by glow discharge using direct current (DC), high frequency waves, or microwaves to form an amorphous silicon layer on the substrate
- Organic photoreceptors are typically used because of'having:
- (1) good optical properties such as wide light absorption range and large light absorbency;
- (2) good electric properties such as high sensitivity and stable charge properties;
- (3) a wide material selectivity (i.e., various materials can be used therefor);
- (4) good productivity (i.e., capable of being easily produced);
- (5) low costs; and
- (6) low toxicity.
- The organic photoreceptors are classified into photoreceptors having a single-layered photosensitive layer, and photoreceptors having a multi-layered photosensitive layer
- The single-layered photoreceptors include a single-layered photosensitive layer formed on a substrate, and optionally include one or more other layers such as protective layers, and intermediate layers.
- The multi-layered photoreceptors include a multi-layered photosensitive layer, which is formed on a substrate and which includes plural layers such as charge generation layers and charge transport layers, and optionally include one or more other layers such as protective layers, and intermediate layers.
- In the charging process, the image bearing member is charged with a charging device.
- The charging device is not particularly limited as long as the device can uniformly charge an image bearing member. The charging device is broadly classified into (1) contact charging devices which charges an image bearing member by contacting a charging member therewith; and (2) noncontact charging devices which charges an image bearing member using a noncontact charging member.
(1) Contact charging device - Specific examples of the contact charging devices include devices which charge an image bearing member using a charging member such as charging roller s, magnetic brushes, fur brushes, films, and rubber blades. Among these members, charging rollers are preferably used because the amount of'ozone generated by the charging process can be dramatically decreased. Therefore, an image bearing member can be stably used repeatedly, and thereby high quality images can be repeatedly produced.
- Magnetic brushes for use in contact charging devices typically include a non-magnetic electroconductive sleeve bearing thereon a particulate ferrite such as Zn-Cu ferrites, and a magnet roller arranged inside the sleeve
- Fur brushes for use in contact charging devices typically include a support such as metal shafts and metal wires, and a fur which is wound around or affixed to the support and is subjected to an electroconductive treatment using carbon, copper sulfide, a metal or a metal oxide.
-
FIG 1 illustrates the cross section of a charging roller Referring toFIG 1 , a chargingroller 310 includes acylindrical substrate 311, aresistivity controlling layer 312 formed on the substrate, and aprotective layer 313 formed on the resistivity controlling layer to protect the layer and to prevent occurrence of a leaking problem in that a large current flows between the charging roller and (a defect of) the photoreceptor. - The
resistivity controlling layer 312 is typically formed on the surface of a substrate by subjecting a thermoplastic resin including a polymeric ion conducting agent to extrusion molding or injection molding - The volume resistivity of the
resistivity controlling layer 312 is preferably from 106 to 109 Ω · cm. When the volume resistivity is too high, the quantity of charge formed on the photoreceptor decreases, and thereby a desired potential needed for forming uneven images cannot be formed on the surface of the photoreceptor. In contrast, when the volume resistivity is too low, the leaking problem occurs - The material of the
resistivity controlling layer 312 is not particularly limited. Specific examples of the material include polyethylene, polypropylene, polymethyl methacrylate, polystyrene, styrene copolymers (e.g., acrylonitrile - styrene copolymers (AS), and acrylonitrile - butadiene - styrene copolymers (ABS)). - Suitable polymeric ion conducting agents include materials having a volume resistivity of from 106 to 109 Ω · cm. Specific examples thereof include compounds including a polyether ester amide component The added amount of such compounds is 30 to 70 parts by weight per 100 parts by weight of the thermoplastic resin used to control the resistivity of'the
resistivity controlling layer 312 in the preferable range. In addition, polymers having a quaternary ammonium salt group (such as polyolefins having a quaternary ammonium salt group) can also be used as a polymeric ion conducting agent. The added amount of such polymers is 10 to 40 parts by weight per 100 parts by weight of the thermoplastic resin used. - When a polymeric ion conducting agent is dispersed in a thermoplastic resin, kneaders such as double-axis kneaders are preferably used. In this case, molecules of the polymeric ion conducting agent are uniformly dispersed in the thermoplastic resin, and therefore the resultant resistivity controlling layer has a less resistivity variation than conventional resistivity controlling layers including an electroconductive pigment therein. In addition, since a polymeric ion conducting agent is used, a bleed-out problem such that an electroconductive material included in a layer bleeds from the layer is hardly caused.
- The
protective layer 313 has a higher resistivity than theresistivity controlling layer 312 to prevent occurrence of the leaking problem. However, when the resistivity of the protective layer is too high, the charging efficiency of the charging roller deteriorates. The difference in resistivity between the protective layer and the resistivity controlling layer is preferably not greater than 103 Ω · cm. - Resins are typically used for the
protective layer 313 because of having a good film formability. For example, non-tacky resins such as fluorine-containing resins, polyamide resins, polyester resins, and polyvinyl acetal resins are used for the protective layer to prevent toner particles from adhering thereto. However, such resins are typically insulators, and therefore a charging roller having a protective layer made of only such a resin does not fulfill the requirements for the charging roller. Therefore it is preferable to control the resistivity of theprotective layer 313 by adding an electroconductive material thereto. In addition, it is preferable to mix a reactive crosslinking agent such as isocyanates with the resin used for theprotective layer 313 to improve the adhesion of the protective layer to theresistivity controlling layer 312. - A power source is connected with the charging
roller 310 to apply a predetermined voltage such as DC voltages and combinations of DC and AC voltages. By using a DC voltage overlapped with an AC voltage, the surface of an image bearing member (e.g., photoreceptors) can be evenly charged. -
FIG. 2 illustrates an image forming apparatus using thecontact charging roller 310 as a contact charging member The image forming apparatus illustrated inFIG 2 has aphotoreceptor drum 321 serving as an image bearing member, and a charging device including the chargingroller 310 for charging the photoreceptor drum, alight irradiator 323 configured to irradiate the charged photoreceptor with imagewise light to form an electrostatic latent image on the photoreceptor drum, a developingdevice 324 configured to develop the electrostatic latent image with a developer including a toner to form a toner image on the photoreceptor drum, atransfer device 325 configured to transfer the toner image on a receivingmaterial sheet 326, a fixingdevice 327 configured to fix the toner image on the receiving material sheet, acleaning device 330 configured to remove toner particles remaining on the photoreceptor drum, and a dischargingdevice 331 configured to discharge charges remaining on the photoreceptor drum. These devices are arranged around thephotoreceptor drum 321. The chargingroller 310 illustrated inFIG. 1 is used as a contact charging member - Specific examples of the noncontact charging devices include noncontact chargers utilizing corona discharging, chargers having a needle electrode or a solid state discharging element, charges including an electroconductive or semi-conductive charging roller set close to an image bearing member.
- Chargers utilizing corona discharging cause corona discharging in the air to generate positive or negative ions, thereby charging an image bearing member. Specific examples thereof include corotron chargers supplying charges with a constant charge quantity, and scorotron chargers supplying charges to form a constant potential on an image bearing member
- Corotron chargers include a discharging wire and a casing set above the wire to surround the upper space of'the discharging wire. Scorotron chargers is the same as the corotron chargers except that a grid is arranged below the wire. The distance between the grid and the surface of'the image bearing member is generally from 1.0 to 2.0 mm
-
FIG 3 illustrates an image forming apparatus using the chargingroller 310 as a noncontact charging member The charging roller is set close to the surface of thephotoreceptor drum 321 while a gap of from 10 to 200 µm (preferably from 10 to 100 µm) is formed therebetween -
FIG. 4 is a side view of the charging device illustrated inFIG. 3 The chargingroller 310 is set near thephotoreceptor drum 321 while a small gap H is formed therebetween byspacers 302. Thespacers 302 are contacted with non-image-forming areas of thephotoreceptor drum 321. The spacers are formed by winding a film on both end portions of the chargingroller 310Numeral 304 denotes a power source for applying a voltage (e g , a DC voltage overlapped with an AC voltage) to the charging roller. By applying such a voltage to the chargingroller 310, discharging is caused in the air gap H, and thereby the photoreceptor is charged By pressing ashaft 311 of the chargingroller 310 withsprings 303, the gap H can be stably maintained. - The
spacers 302 may be formed by an integral molding method when the charging roller is prepared. In this regard, the surface of the spacers is made of'an insulator to prevent occurrence of discharging at the contact points between the spacers and the photoreceptor drum. By preventing occurrence of discharging, a problem in that discharge products are adhered to the surface of the spacers and thereby the gap H is widened can be avoided. A heat shrinkable tube may be used for thespacers 302. Specific examples thereof include SUMIIUBE F105°C from Sumitomo Chemical Co., Ltd., which can be used at 105 °C. - In the light irradiation process, a light irradiating device irradiates the charged image bearing member with imagewise light to form an electrostatic latent image on the image bearing member The light irradiation device is broadly classified into analogue optical devices and digital optical devices. In analogue optical devices, light reflected from an original image is directly projected on an image bearing member (such as photoreceptors) to form an electrostatic image of'the original image. In digital optical devices, an original image is changed to electric signals The digital optical devices irradiate an image bearing member according to the signals to apply optical signals thereto
- The light irradiating device is not particularly limited, and any known devices can be used. Specific examples thereof include optical systems for use in copiers, rod lens arrays, optical systems using a laser, a liquid crystal shutter, a LED, or the like
- Light irradiating methods in which light irradiates an image bearing member from the inside of the image bearing member can also be used.
- In the developing device, an electrostatic latent image formed on an image bearing member is developed with a developer including a toner using a developing device.
- The developing device is not particularly limited, and any developing devices can be used as long as the devices develop an electrostatic image with a developer including a toner. For example, devices which contain a developer including a toner and which applies the toner to an electrostatic image by contacting the toner with the electrostatic image or without contacting the toner with the electrostatic image.
- The toner for use in the image forming apparatus includes at least a binder resin, a colorant and a wax, and optionally includes a charge controlling agent, an external additive, etc.
- The binder resin is not particularly limited, and known resins can be used therefor Suitable resins for use as the binder resin include copolymers obtained by two or more kinds of vinyl monomers such as styrene-based monomers, acrylic monomers, and methacrylic monomers; polyester resins, polyol resins, phenolic resins, silicone resins, polyurethane resins, polyamide resins, furan resins, epoxy resins, xylene resins, terpene resins, coumarone-indene resins, polycarbonate resins, petroleum resins.
- Specific examples of the styrene-based monomers include styrene derivatives such as styrene, o-methylstyrene, m-methylstyrene, p-methylstyrene, p-phenylstyrene, p-ethyl styrene, 2,4-dimethylstyrene, p-n-amylstyrene, p-tert-butylstyrene, p-n-hexylstyrene, p-n-octylstyrene, p-n-nonylstyrene, p-n-decylstyrene, p-n-dodecylstyrene, p-methoxystyrene, p-chlorostyrene, 3,4-dichlorostyrene, m-nitrostyrene, o-nitrostyrene, and p-nitrostyrene.
- Specific examples of the acrylic monomers include acrylic acid, methyl acrylate, ethyl acrylate, propyl acrylate, n-butyl acrylate, iso-butyl acrylate, n-octyl acryalte, n-dodecyl acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl acryalte, stearyl acrylate, 2-chloroethyl acrylate, phenyl acrylate, esters of these acrylic monomers.
- Specific examples of'the methacrylic monomers include methacrylic acid, methyl methacrylate, ethyl methacrylate, propyl methacrylate, n-butyl methacrylate, iso-butyl methacrylate, n-octyl methacryalte, n-dodecyl methacrylate, 2-ethylhexyl methacryalte, stearyl methacrylate, phenyl methacrylate, diethylaminoethyl methacrylate, esters of these methacrylic monomers.
- Specific examples of other monomers used for preparing copolymers for use as the binder resin include the following monomers
- (1) mono-olefin monomers such as ethylene, propylene, butylenes, and isobutylene;
- (2) poly-ene monomers such as butadiene, and isoprene;
- (3) halogenated vinyl monomers such as vinyl chloride, vinylidene chloride, vinyl bromide, and vinyl fluoride;
- (4) vinyl ester monomers such as vinyl acetate, vinyl propionate, and vinyl benzoate;
- (5) vinyl ether monomers such as vinyl methyl ether, vinyl ethyl ether, and vinyl isobutyl ether;
- (6) vinyl ketone monomers such as vinyl methyl ketone, vinyl hexyl ketone, and methyl isopropenyl ketone;
- (7) N-vinyl monomers such as N-vinyl pyrrole, N-vinyl carbazole, N-vinyl indole, and N-vinyl pyrrolidone;
- (8) vinyl naphthalene monomers;
- (9) (meth)acrylic acid derivatives such as acrylonittile, methacrylonitrile, and acrylamide;
- (10) unsaturated dibasic acids such as maleic acid, citraconic acid, itaconic acid, alkenylsuccinic acid, fumaric acid, and mesaconic acid;
- (11) unsaturated dibasic acid anhydrides such as maleic anhydride, citaraconic anhydride, itaconic anhydride, and alkenylsuccinic anhydrides;
- (12) monoesters of unsaturated dibasic acids such as monomethyl maleate, monoethyl maleate, monobutyl maleate, monomethyl citraconate, monoethyl citraconate, monobutyl citraconate, monomethyl itaconate, monomethyl alkenylsuccinate, monomethyl fumarate, and monomethyl mesaconate;
- (13) esters of unsaturated dibasic acids such as dimethyl maleate, and dimethyl fumarate;
- (14) α, β -unsaturated acids such as crotonic acid, and cinnamic acid;
- (15) α, β-unsaturated acid anhydrides such as crotonic anhydride, and cinnamic anhydride;
- (16) monomers having a carboxyl group such as anhydrides of α, β -unsaturated acids and lower fatty acids, alkenyl malonic acid, alkenylglutaric acids, alkenyladipic acids, and anhydrides and monoesters of these acids;
- (17) hydroxyalkyl esters of (meth)acrylic acid such as 2-hydroxyethyl (meth)acrylate, and 2-hydroxypropyl methacrylate; and
- (18) monomers having a hydroxyl group such as 4-(1-hydroxy-1-methylbutyl)styrene, and 4-(1-hydroxy-1-methylhexyl)styrene.
- Among these resins, styrene copolymers and styrene - acrylic copolymers are preferably used as the binder resin.
- The binder resin of the toner can have a crosslinked structure formed by using a crosslinking agent having two or more vinyl groups Specific examples of such a crosslinking agent include aromatic divinyl compounds such as divinyl benzene, and divinyl naphthalene; di(meth)acrylate compounds, in which (meth)acrylate compounds are connected with an alkyl chain, such as ethylene glycol di(meth)acrylate, 1,3-butylene glycol di(meth)acrylate, 1,4-butanediol di(meth)acrylate, 1,5-pentanediol di(meth)acrylate, 1,6-hexanediol di(meth)acrylate, and neopentylglycol di(meth)acrylate; di(meth)acrylate compounds, in which (meth)acrylate compounds are connected with an alkyl chain having an ether bond, such as diethylene glycol di(meth)acrylate, triethylene glycol di(meth)acrylate, tetraethylene glycol di(meth)acrylate, polyethylene(400)glycol di(meth)acrylate, polyethylene(600)glycol di(meth)acrylate, and dipropyleneglycol di(meth)acrylate; di(meth)acrylate compounds, in which (meth)acrylate compounds are connected with an aromatic group or an ether bond; polyester diacrylates such as MANDA from Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.; etc.
- Specific examples of polyfunctional crosslinking agents include pentaerythritol tri(meth)acrylate, trimethylolethane tri(meth)acrylate, trimethylolpropane triacrylate, tetramethylolmethane tetraacrylate, oligoester acrylate, triaryl cyanurate, triaryl trimellitate.
- Among these crosslinking agents, aromatic divinyl compounds (preferably divinyl benzene) and diacrylate compounds having a chain including an aromatic group and an ether bond are preferably used because of imparting a good combination of fixability and offset resistance to the toner
- The added amount of'these crosslinking agents is from 0.01 to 10 parts by weight, and preferably from 0.0.3 to 5 parts by weight, per 100 parts by weight of monomers used for preparing the binder resin.
- Specific examples of polymerization initiators for use in polymerization of the above-mentioned monomers include ,2'-azobisisobutylonitrile,
- 2,2'-azobis(4-methoxy-2,4-dimethylvalcionitrile),
- 2,2'-azobis(2,4-dimethylvaleronitrile), 2,2'-azobis(2-methylbutyronitrile),
- dimethyl-2,2'-azobisisobutyate, 1,1'-azobis(1-cyclohexanecanbonitrile),
- 2-((carbamoylazo)-isobutyronitrile, 2,2'-azobis(2,4,4-trimethylpentane),
- 2-phenylazo-2',4'-dimethyl-4'-methoxyvaleronitrile, 2,2'-azobis(2-methylpropane),
- ketone peroxides (e.g., methyl ethyl ketone peroxide, acetylacetone peroxide, and
- cyclohexane peroxide), 2,2-bis(tert-butylperoxy)butane, tert-butyl hydroperoxide,
- cumene hydroperoxide, 1,1,3,3-tetramethylbutyl hydroperoxide, di-tert-butyl peroxide,
- tert-butylcumyl peroxide, dicumyl peroxide, α-(tert-butylperoxy)isopropylbenzene,
- isobutyl peroxide, octanoyl peroxide, decanoyl peroxide, lauroyl peroxide,
- 3,5,5-trimethylhexanoyl peroxide, benzoyl peroxide, m-tolyl peroxide,
- di-isopropylperoxy dicarbonate, di-2-ethylhexylperoxy dicarbonate, di-n-propylperoxy dicarbonate, di-2-ethoxyethylperoxy dicarbonate, di-ethoxyisopropylperoxy dicarbonate,
- di(3-methyl-3-methoxybutyl)peroxy dicarbonate, acetylcyclohexylsulfonyl peroxide,
- tert-butylperoxy acetate, tert-butylperoxy isobutyrate, tert-butylperoxy-2-ethyl hexyarate, tert-butylperoxy laurate, tert-butyl-oxy benzoate, tert-butylperoxy isopropylcarbonate, di-tert-butylperoxy isophthalate, tert-butylperoxy arylcarbonate,
- isoamylperoxy-2-ethyl hexanoate, di-tert-butylperoxy hexahydroterephthalate,
- tert-butylperoxy azelate.
- When styrene - acrylic resins are used as the binder resin, the resins preferably include tetrahydrofuran-soluble components having a molecular weight distribution (determined by gel permeation chromatography (GPC)) such that at least one peak is present in a number average molecular weight range of from 3,000 to 50,000 and at least one peak is present in a range of not less than 100,000. In this case, a good combination of fixabililty, offset resistance and preservability can be imparted to the toner Among these resins, resins including tetrahydrofuran-soluble components having a molecular weight of not greater than 100,000 in an amount of from 50 to 90% by weight are preferably used. Further, resins including tetrahydrofuran-soluble components having a molecular weight distribution such that a main peak is present in a range of from 5,000 to 30,000 and preferably from 5,000 to 20,000 are more (preferably used.
- Further, when vinyl resins such as styrene - acrylic resins are used as the binder resin, the resins preferably have an acid value of from 0.1 to 100 mgKOH/g, preferably from 0.1 to 70 mgKOH/g, and more preferably from 01 to 50 mgKOH/g
- Suitable polyester resins for use as the binder resin include polyester resins obtained by reacting one or more alcohol components with one or more acid components.
- Specific examples of' alcohol components include dihydric alcohols such as ethylene glycol, propylene glycol, 1,3-butanediol, 1,4-butanediol, 2,3-butanediol, diethylene glycol, triethylene glycol, 1,5-pentanediol, 1,6-hexanediol, neopentylglycol, 2-ethyl-1,3-hexanediol, hydrogenated bisphenol A, and diols obtained by reacting a ring ether (e.g., ethylene oxide and propylene oxide) with bisphenol A; and polyhydric alcohols having three or more hydroxyl groups such as sorbitol, 1,2,3,6-hexanetetraol, 1,4-sorbitane, pentaerythritol, dipentaerythritol, tripentaerythritol, 1,2,4-butanetriol, 1,2,5-pentanetriol, glycerol, 2-methylpropanetriol, 2-methyl-1,2,4-butanetriol, trimethylol ethane, trimethylol propane, 1,3,5-trihydroxybenzene.
- Specific examples of the acid components include dibasic acids such as benzene dicarboxylic acids such as phthalic acid, isophthalic acid, terephthalic acid, and their anhydrides; alkyldicarboxylic acid such as succinic acid, adipic acid, sebacic acid, azelaic acid, and their anhydrides; and unsaturated dibasic acids such as maleic acid, citraconic acid, itaconic aicd, alkenylsuccinic acid, fumaric acid, mesaconic acid, and their anhydrides; and polybasic acids having three or more carboxyl groups such as trimellitic acid, pyromellitic acid, 1,2,4-benzentricarboxylic acid, 1,2,5-benzentricarboxylic acid, 2,5,7-naphthalenetricarboxylic acid, 1,2,4-naphthalenetricarboxylic acid, 1,2,4-butanetricarboxylic acid, 1,2,5-hexanetricarboxylic acid, 1,3-dicarboxy-2-methyl-2-methylenecarboxypropane, tetra(methylenecarboxy)methane, 1,2,7,8-octanetetracarboxylic acid, trimers of embole, and anhydrides and lower alkyl esters of these acids.
- When polyester resins are used as the binder resin, the resins preferably include tetrahydrofuran-soluble components having a molecular weight distribution (determined by GPC) such that at least one peak is present in a molecular weight range of from 3,000 to 50,000. In this case, a good combination of fixabililty, offset resistance and preservability can be imparted to the toner Among these resins, polyester resins including tetrahydrofuran-soluble components having a molecular weight of not greater than 100,000 in an amount of from 60 to 100% by weight are preferably used. Further, polyester resins including tetrahydrofuran-soluble components having a molecular weight distribution such that at least one peak is present in a range of from 5,000 to 20,000 are more preferably used.
- Polyester resins having an acid value of from 0 1 to 100 mgKOH/g, preferably from 0.1 to 70 mgKOH/g, and more preferably from 0.1 to 50 mgKOH/g, are preferably used as the binder resin.
- When a combination of'a polyester resin and a vinyl resin are used as the binder resin, at least one of'the polyester resin and vinyl resin can include a unit having a group which is reactive with the other resin. Specific examples of' the monomers for forming the polyester resin and having a group reactive with vinyl resins include unsaturated dicarboxylic acids such as phthalic acid, maleic acid, citraconic acid, itaconic acid, anhydrides of the acids, etc. Specific examples of the monomers for forming the vinyl resin and having a group reactive with polyester resins include monomers having a carboxyl group or a hydroxyl group, esters of (meth)acrylic acid, etc
- When a combination of a polyester resin, a vinyl resin and another kind of resin are used as the binder resin, the combined binder resin prefer ably includes resins having an acid value of from 0.1 to 50 mgKOH/g in an amount of not less than 60% by weight. The acid value is determined by the method described in JIS K0070, which is as follows.
- (1) At first, about 0.5 to 2 0 g of a sample (a binder resin) is precisely measured. In this regard, when the sample includes other materials such as additives, the acid values and contents of'the other materials are previously determined For example, when the acid value of'the binder resin included in a toner, which further includes a colorant and additives such as magnetic materials, is determined, the acid values of'the colorant and the additives are previously determined and then the acid value of the toner is determined. The acid value of the binder resin is calculated from these acid value data
- (2) The sample is mixed with 150 ml of a mixture solvent of'toluene and ethanol (mixed in a ratio of 4:1) to be dissolved
- (3) The thus prepared solution is subjected to a potentiometric titration using a 0.1 mol/l ethanol solution of potassium hydroxide (KOH).
- The acid value (AV) of the sample is calculated by the following equation (1).
wherein S represents the amount of KOH consumed in the titration, B represents the amount of KOH consumed in the titration when a blank (i.e, a toluene/ethanol mixture solvent) is subjected to the titration, f represents the factor of N/10 potassium hydroxide, and W represents the precise weight of'the sample. - Each of the binder resin of'the toner and the toner preferably has a glass transition temperature (Tg) of from 55 to 70 °C, and more preferably from 57 to 70 °C, In this case, the toner has good preservability. When the T g is too low, the toner deteriorates under high temperature conditions, and causes an offset problem in a fixing process. In contrast, when the Tg is too high, the fixability of the toner deteriorates
- The toner of the present invention can include a crystalline polyester resin to improve the low temperature fixability thereof.
- Among the crystalline polyester resins, crystalline aliphatic polyester resins having the following formula (1) (i.e., an ester bond) in a main chain in an amount of not less than 60% by mole are preferable
-OCO-R-COO-(CH2)n - formula (1)
In formula (1), R represents the residual group of an unsaturated linear fatty acid (dicarboxylic acid), which has 2 to 20 carbon atoms, and preferably from 2 to 4 carbon atoms; and n is an integer of from 2 to 20 and preferably from 2 to 6. - Whether or not a resin has the structure having formula (1) can be determined by solid 13C-NMR.
- Specific examples of the unsaturated linear fatty acids having a formula -OCO-R-COO- include maleic acid, fumaric acid, 1,3-n-propenedicarboxylic acid, 1,4-n-butenedicarboxylic acid, etc
- In formula (1), -(CH2)n - represents the residual group of a dihydric linear aliphatic alcohol. Specific examples of' such linear aliphatic alcohols include ethylene glycol, 1,3-propylene glycol, 1,4-butanediol, 1,6-hexanediol, etc.
- Polyester resins prepared by using an unsaturated linear dicarboxylic acid form a crystalline structure more easily than polyester resins prepared by using an unsaturated aromatic dicarboxylic acid.
- The crystalline polyester resins for use in the toner of the present invention can be produced by subjecting the following components (1) and (2) to a polycondensation reaction in a usual manner.
- (1) a linear unsaturated aliphatic dicarboxylic acid or a reactive derivative thereof (such as anhydrides, alkyl (C1 to C4) esters and acid halides thereof); and
- (2) a linear aliphatic diol.
- In this case, a small amount of polycarboxylic acid can be used in combination with a polycarboxylic acid, if desired. Specific examples of'the polycarboxylic acids include:
- (1) unsaturated aliphatic dicarboxylic acids having a branched chain;
- (2) saturated aliphatic polycarboxylic acids such as saturated aliphatic dicarboxylic acids and saturated aliphatic tricarboxylic acids; and
- (3) aromatic polycarboxylic acids such as aromatic dicarboxylic acids and aromatic tricarboxylic acids.
- These polycarboxylic acids (1) to (3) can be included in an amount such that the resultant polyester resin does not lose the crystallinity Specifically, the added amount thereof is generally not greater than 30 % by mole, and preferably not greater than 10 % by mole, based on the total amount of the carboxylic acids used.
- Specific examples of'the polycarboxylic acids to be optionally used include dicarboxylic acids such as malonic acid, succinic acid, glutaric acid, adipic acid, suberic acid, sebacic acid, citraconic acid, phthalic acid, isophthalic acid, and terephthalic acid; and tri- or more- carboxylic acid units such as trimellitic anhydride, 1,2,4-benzenetricarboxylic acid, 1,2,5-benzenetricarboxylic acid, 1,2,4-cyclohexanetricarboxylic acid, 1,2,4-naphthalenetricarboxylic acid, 1,2,5-hexanetricarboxylic acid, 1,3-dicarboxyl-2-methylenecarboxypropane, and 1,2,7,8-octanetetracarboxylic acid.
- In addition, a small amount of polyhydric alcohols such as branched dihydric alcohols, cyclic dihydric alcohols, and tri- or more- hydric alcohols can be included in combination with the above-mentioned polyhydric alcohols to an extent such that the resultant polyester resin does not lose the crystallinity The added amount is generally not greater than 30 % by mole, and preferably not greater than 10 % by mole, based on the total amount of'the alcohols used.
- Specific examples of' such polyhydric alcohols to be optionally added include 1,4-bis(hydroxymethyl)cyclohexane, polyethylene glycol, ethylene oxide adduct of' bisphenol A, propylene oxide adduct of bisphenol A, glycerin.
- Crystalline polyester resins included in the toner preferably have a relatively low molecular weight and a sharp molecular weight distribution to impart good low temperature fixability to the toner Specifically, crystalline polyester resins having a weight average molecular weight (Mw) of from 5,500 to 6,500, a number average molecular weight (Mn) of from 1,300 to 1,500 and a Mw/Mn ratio of from 2 to 5, which are determined from the molecular weight distributions of o-dichlorobenzen-soluble components of'the resins determined by GPC, are preferably used
- The molecular weight distribution of a crystalline polyester resin can be determined from a molecular weight distribution graph in which the molecular weight of components in the logarithm unit (log M) is plotted on the horizontal axis and the weight percentage of the components is plotted on the vertical axis. Crystalline polyester resins having a peak, which preferably has a half width of not greater than 1.5, in a range of from 3.5 to 4 0 (% by weight) are preferably used as the binder resin of the toner of the present invention.
- The glass transition temperature (Ig) and the softening point [T(F1/2)] of the crystalline polyester resin included in the toner are preferably as low as possible as long as the high temperature preservability of the resultant toner does not deteriorate Specifically, the glass transition temperature of the crystalline polyester resin is generally from 80 to 130 °C and preferably from 80 to 125 °C. The softening point [I(F1/2)] thereof is generally from 80 to 130 °C, and preferably from 80 to 125 °C. When the glass transition temperature and softening point are too high, the lowest fixable temperature of the toner increases, namely the low temperature fixability of'the toner deteriorates.
- Known waxes can be used as the wax included in the toner Suitable waxes include waxes having a carbonyl group, polyolefin waxes, amide waxes, long chain hydrocarbons, salts of aliphatic carboxylic acids.
- Specific examples of the waxes having a carbonyl group include polyalkane acid esters such as carnauba wax, montan waxes, trimethylolpropane tribehenate, pentaerythritol tetrabehenate, pentaerythritol diacetate dibehenate, glycerin tribehenate, and 1,18-octadecanediol distearate; polyalkanol esters such as tristearyl trimellitate, and distearyl maleate; polyalkylamides such as trimellitic acid tristearylamide; dialkyl ketone such as distearyl ketone, etc. Among these materials, polyalkane acid esters are preferable.
- Specific examples of polyolefin waxes include polyethylene waxes and polypropylene waxes.
- Specific examples of the amide waxes include lauramide, palmitamide, stearamide, ercamide, behenamide, N-stearylstearamide, methylolstearamide, methylolbehenamide, dimethytol amide, dimethyllauramide, dimethylstearamide, N-palmitylpalmitamide, ethylenbiscapronamide, methylenbisstearamide, ethylenebislauramide, hexamethylenebisoleamide, hexamethylenebisstearamide, butylenebisstearamide, m-xylylenebisstearamide, m-xylylenebis-12-hydroxystearamide, N,N'-dioleyladipamide, N,N'-distearyladipamide, N,N'-distearylisophthalamide, N,N'-distearylterephthalamide, N-butyl-N'-stearylurea, N-propyl-N'-stearylurea, N-aryl-N'-stearylurea, N-stearyl-N'-stearylurea.
- Specific examples of the long chain hydrocarbons include paraffin waxes, SAZOL waxes, etc
- Specific examples of the salts of aliphatic carboxylic acids include sodium laurate, potassium laurate, hydrogen potassium laurate, magnesium laurate, calcium laurate, zinc laurate, silver laurate, lithium myristate, sodium myristate, potassium hydrogen myristate, magnesium myristate, calcium myristate, zinc myristate, silver myristate, lithium palmitate, potassium palmitate, magnesium palmitate, magnesium palmitate, calcium palmitate, zinc palmitate, copper palmitate, lead palmitate, thallium palmitate, cobalt palmitate, sodium oleate, potassium oleate, magnesium oleate, calcium oleate, zinc oleate, lead oleate, thallium oleate, copper oleate, nickel oleate, sodium stearate, lithium stearate, magnesium stearate, calcium stearate, barium stearate, aluminum stearate, thallium stearate, lead stearate, nickel stearate, beryllium stearate, sodium isostearate, potassium isostearate, magnesium isostearate, calcium isostearate, barium isostearate, aluminum isostearate, zinc isostearate, nickel isostearate, sodium behenate, potassium behenate, magnesium behenate, calcium behenate, barium behenate, aluminum behenate, zinc behenate, nickel behenate, sodium montanate, potassium montanate, magnesium montanate, calcium montanate, barium montanate, aluminum montanate, zinc montanate, nickel montanate.
- The power includes an amide waxe. When a toner including an amide wax is used for image forming apparatus equipped with a fixing device having an oil coating device coating a silicone oil, the amide wax exuding from a toner image forms a film on the toner image Since the film repels the silicone oil (i e , the silicone oil does not penetrate into the toner image), the toner image has good abrasion resistance.
- The content of the wax in the toner is preferably from 1.5 to 9 parts by weight, and more preferably from 2 to 8 parts by weight, per 100 parts by weight of the binder resin included in the toner. When the content is too low, the toner has poor releasability from fixing members When the content is too high, the amount of wax in a surface portion of the toner increases, resulting in decrease of'the charge quantity of the toner.
- The content of the amide wax in the toner is preferably from 0.5 to 5 parts by weight, and more preferably from 1 to 4 parts by weight, per 100 parts by weight of the binder resin included in the toner. When the content is too low, the fixability improving effect (i.e., oil spread preventing effect) cannot be produced. When the content is too high, problems in that the charge quantity of the toner decreases and a toner film is formed on carrier particles and image forming members such as developing rollers occur.
- The melting point of the wax included in the toner is preferably from 70 to 165 °C. When the melting point is too low, the toner has poor high temperature preservability. When the melting point is too high, the toner causes a cold offset in that when a toner image is fixed by a fixing member at a relatively low temperature, the toner image is transferred to the fixing member
- The melt viscosity of the wax included in the toner is preferably from 0.005 to 1 Pa · s (5 to 1000 cps), and more preferably from 0.01 to 0.1 Pa · s (10 to 100 cps) When the melt viscosity is too low, the toner has poor releasability. When the melt viscosity is too high, the hot offset resistance and low temperature fixability of the toner is hardly improved.
- The toner for use in the image forming method of the present invention includes a colorant Suitable materials for use as the colorant include known dyes and pigments
- Specific examples of the dyes and pigments include carbon black, Nigrosine dyes, black iron oxide, NAPHTHOL YELLOW S, HANSA YELLOW 10G, HANSA YELLOW 5G, HANSA YELLOW G, Cadmium Yellow, yellow iron oxide, loess, chrome yellow, Titan Yellow, polyazo yellow, Oil Yellow, HANSA YELLOW GR, HANSA YELLOW A, HANSA YELLOW RN, HANSA YELLOW R, PIGMENT YELLOW L, BENZIDINE YELLOW G, BENZIDINE YELLOW GR, PERMANENT YELLOW NCG, VULCAN FAST YELLOW 5G, VULCAN FAST YELLOW R, Tartrazine Lake, Quinoline Yellow LAKE, ANTHRAZANE YELLOW BGL, isoindolinone yellow, red iron oxide, red lead, orange lead, cadmium red, cadmium mercury red, antimony orange, Permanent Red 4R, Para Red, Fire Red, p-chloro-o-nitroaniline red, Lithol Fast Scarlet G, Brilliant Fast Scarlet, Brilliant Carmine BS, PERMANENT RED F2R, PERMANENT RED F4R, PERMANENT RED FRL, PERMANENT RED FRLL, PERMANENT RED F4RH, Fast Scarlet VD, VULCAN FAST RUBINE B, Brilliant Scarlet G, LITHOL RUBINE GX, Permanent Red F5R, Brilliant Carmine 6B, Pigment Scarlet 3B, Bordeaux 5B, Toluidine Maroon, PERMANENT BORDEAUX F2K, HELIO BORDEAUX BL, Bordeaux 10B, BON MAROON LIGHT, BON MAROON MEDIUM, Eosin Lake, Rhodamine Lake B, Rhodamine Lake Y, Alizarine Lake, Thioindigo Red B, Thioindigo Maroon, Oil Red, Quinacridone Red, Pyrazolone Red, polyazo red, Chrome Vermilion, Benzidine Orange, perynone orange, Oil Orange, cobalt blue, cerulean blue, Alkali Blue Lake, Peacock Blue Lake, Victoria Blue Lake, metal-free Phthalocyanine Blue, Phthalocyanine Blue, Fast Sky Blue, INDANTHRENE BLUE RS, INDANTHRENE BLUE BC, Indigo, ultramarine, Prussian blue, Anthraquinone Blue, Fast Violet B, Methyl Violet Lake, cobalt violet, manganese violet, dioxane violet, Anthraquinone Violet, Chrome Green, zinc green, chromium oxide, viridian, emerald green, Pigment Green B, Naphthol Green B, Green Gold, Acid Green Lake, Malachite Green Lake, Phthalocyanine Green, Anthraquinone Green, titanium oxide, zinc oxide, lithopone. These materials are used alone or in combination.
- The color of the colorant is not particularly limited, and black colorants and colorants having other colors can be used. As mentioned above, two or more colorants having different colors can be used in combination.
- Specific examples of the black colorants include carbon blacks (C.I. Pigment Black 7) such as furnace black, lamp black, acetylene black, and channel black; metals and metal compounds such as copper, iron (C.I. Pigment Black 11) and titanium oxide; and organic pigments such as Aniline Black.
- Specific examples of the magenta colorants include C.I.
Pigment Red I. Vat Red - Specific examples of the cyan colorants include C.I.
Pigment Blue Pigment Green 7 and 36. - Specific examples of the yellow colorants include C.I. Pigment Yellow 0-16, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 23, 55, 65, 73, 74, 83, 97, 110, 151, 154 and 180; C.I.
Vat Yellow Pigment Orange 36. - The content of the colorants in the toner for use in the present invention is preferably from 1 to 15% by weight, and more preferably from 3 to 10% by weight. When the content is too low, the resultant toner has low tinting power. When the content is too high, the colorants cannot be well dispersed in the toner, resulting in deterioration of the tinting power and electric properties of'the toner.
- Master batches, which are complexes of a colorant with a resin, can be used as the colorant of the toner of the present invention.
- Specific examples of the resins for use as the binder resin of'the master batches include styrene polymers and substituted styrene polymers such as polystyrene, poly-p-chlorostyrene and polyvinyltoluene; styrene copolymers such as styrene - p-chlorostyrene copolymers, styrene - propylene copolymers, styrene - vinyltoluene copolymers, styrene - vinylnaphthalene copolymers, styrene - methyl acrylate copolymers, styrene - ethyl acrylate copolymers, styrene - butyl acrylate copolymers, styrene - octyl acrylate copolymers, styrene - methyl methacrylate copolymers, styrene - ethyl methacrylate copolymers, styrene - butyl methacrylate copolymers, styrene - methyl α-chloromethacrylate copolymers, styrene - acrylonitrile copolymers, styrene - vinyl methyl ketone copolymers, styrene - butadiene copolymers, styrene - isoprene copolymers, styrene - acrylonitrile-indene copolymers, styrene - maleic acid copolymers and styrene - maleic acid ester copolymers; and other resins such as polymethyl methacrylate, polybutyl methacrylate, polyvinyl chloride, polyvinyl acetate, polyethylene, polypropylene, polyesters, epoxy resins, epoxy polyol resins, polyurethane resins, polyamide resins, polyvinyl butyral resins, polyacrylic acid resins, rosin, modified rosins, terpene resins, aliphatic or alicyclic hydrocarbon resins, aromatic petroleum resins, chlorinated paraffin, paraffin waxes. These resins are used alone or in combination.
- The master batches can be prepared by mixing one or more of the resins as mentioned above and one or more of the colorants as mentioned above and kneading the mixture while applying a high shearing force thereto. In this case, an organic solvent can be added to increase the interaction between the colorant and the resin. In addition, a flushing method in which an aqueous paste including a colorant and water is mixed with a resin dissolved in an organic solvent and kneaded so that the colorant is transferred to the resin side (i.e., the oil phase), and then the organic solvent and water, if desired are removed from the mixture can be preferably used because the resultant wet cake can be used as it is without being dried When performing the mixing and kneading process, dispersing devices capable of' applying a high shearing force such as three roll mills can be preferably used
- The toner for use in the present invention can include a charge controlling agent, if desired Any known charge controlling agents can be used for the toner. It is preferable to use colorless or white charge controlling agents to prevent change of the color tone of the resultant toner
- Suitable examples of the charge controlling agents include Nigrosine dyes, triphenyl methane dyes, molybdic acid chelate pigments, Rhodamine dyes, alkoxyamines, quaternary ammonium salts, fluorine-containing quaternary ammonium salts, alkylamides, phosphor and its compounds, tungsten and its compounds, fluorine-containing activators, metal salts of salicylic acid, metal salts of salicylic acid derivatives, etc These materials can be used alone or in combination.
- Specific examples of the marketed charge controlling agents include BONTRON P-51 (quaternary ammonium salt), BONTRON E-82 (metal complex of oxynaphthoic acid), BONTRON E-84 (metal complex of salicylic acid), and BONTRON E-89 (phenolic condensation product), which are manufactured by Orient Chemical Industries Co., Ltd.; TP-302 and TP-415 (molybdenum complex of quaternary ammonium salt), which are manufactured by Hodogaya Chemical Co , Ltd.; COPY CHARGE PSY VP2038 (quaternary ammonium salt), COPY BLUE (triphenyl methane derivative), COPY CHARGE NEG VP2036 and COPY CHARGE® NX VP434 (quaternary ammonium salt), which are manufactured by Hoechst AG; LRA-901, and LR-147 (boron complex), which are manufactured by Japan Carlit Co., Ltd.; quinacridone, azo pigments, and polymers having a functional group such as a sulfonate group, a carboxyl group, a quaternary ammonium group.
- The charge controlling agent is kneaded together with a masterbatch, and the mixture is used for preparing toner particles. Alternatively, the charge controlling agent is dissolved or dispersed in an organic solvent together with other toner constituents when toner particles are prepared by a wet method. It is also possible to adhere and fix a charge controlling agent to a surface of toner particles which are previously prepared
- The content of the charge controlling agent in the toner for use in the present invention is determined depending on the variables such as choice of binder resin, presence of additives, and dispersion method. In general, the content the charge controlling agent is preferably from 0.1 to 10 parts by weight, and more preferably from 0.2 to 5 parts by weight, per 100 parts by weight of the binder resin included in the toner. When the content is too low, a good charge property cannot be imparted to the toner. When the content is too high, the charge quantity of the toner excessively increases, and thereby the electrostatic attraction between the developing roller and the toner increases, resulting in deterioration of fluidity and decrease of' image density.
- The toner for use in the present invention can include an external additive, which is typically present on the surface of toner particles. Known materials for use as the external additives for toner can be used.
- Suitable materials for use as the external additive of the toner include silica, hydrophobized silica, fatty acid metal salts such as zinc stearate and aluminum stearate, metal oxides such as titanium oxide, aluminum oxide, tin oxide and antimony oxide, which may be hydrophobized, fluoropolymers.
- Among these materials, hydrophobized silica, titanium oxide, and hydrophobized titanium oxide are preferably used.
- Specific examples of silica include HDK H 2000, HDK H 2000/4, HDK H 2050EP, HVK21 and HDK H 1303, which are manufactured by Hoechst AG; and R972, R974, RX200, RY200, R202, R805 and R812, which are manufactured by Nippon Aerosil Co. Specific examples of the titanium oxide include P-25 manufactured by Nippon Aerosil Co,; STT-30 and STT-65C-S, which are manufactured by Titan Kogyo K.K.; TAF-140 manufactured by Fuji Titanium Industry Co., Ltd.; MT-150W, MT-500B, MT-600B and MT-150A, which are manufactured by Tayca Corp.; etc. Specific examples of the hydrophobized titanium oxides include T-805 manufactured by Nippon Aerosil Co.; STT-30A and STT-65S-S, which are manufactured by Titan Kogyo K.K.; TAF-500T and TAF-1500T, which are manufactured by Fuji Titanium Industry Co., Ltd.; MT-100S and MT-100T, which are manufactured by Tayca Corp.; IT-S manufactured by Ishihara Sangyo Kaisha K.K.;
- Suitable hydrophobizing agents for use in the hydrophobizing treatment of' inorganic materials (such as silica, titanium oxide and aluminum oxide) include silane coupling agents such as methyl trimethoxy silane, methyl triethoxy silane, octyl trimethoxy silane, dialkyldihalogenated silane, trialkylhalogenated silane, alkyltrihalogenated silane, hexaalkyldisilazane, silylation agents, silane coupling agents having a fluoroalkyl group; organic titanate coupling agents, aluminum coupling agents, silicone oils and silicone varnishes.
- Specific examples of the silicone oils include dimethyl silicone oils, methylphenyl silicone oils, chrolophenyl silicone oils, methylhydrodiene silicone oils, alkyl-modified silicone oils, fluorine-modified silicone oils, polyether-modified silicone oils, alcohol-modified silicone oils, amino-modified silicone oils, epoxy-modified silicone oils, epoxy/polyether-modified silicone oils, phenol-modified silicone oils, carboxyl-modified silicone oils, mercapto-modified silicone oils, (meth)acrylic-modified silicone oils, α -methylstyrene-modified silicone oils, etc.
- Inorganic materials, which are treated with a silicone oil upon application of heat if desired, can also be preferably used as the external additive. Specific examples of'the particulate inorganic materials to be treated include silica, aluminum oxide, titanium oxide, barium titanate, magnesium titanate, calcium titanate, strontium titanate, iron oxide, copper oxide, zinc oxide, tin oxide, quartz sand, clay, mica, sand-lime, diatom earth, chromium oxide, cerium oxide, red iron oxide, antimony trioxide, magnesium oxide, zirconium oxide, barium sulfate, barium carbonate, calcium carbonate, silicon carbide, silicon nitride.
- Among these inorganic materials, silica and titanium oxide are preferably used
- The average primary particle diameter of the inorganic materials for use as the external additive is from 1 to 100 nm, and preferably from 3 to 70 nm. When the average primary particle diameter is too small, the inorganic materials tend to be embedded into toner particles, and thereby the function of the external additive cannot be fulfilled. In contrast, when the average primary particle diameter is too large, a problem in that the surface of the photoreceptor used is damaged by the external additive is caused.
- When an inorganic material and a hydrophobized inorganic material are used in combination, the hydrophobized inorganic material preferably has an average primary particle diameter of from 1 to 100 nm, and more preferably from 5 to 70 nm. In addition, it is preferable to use at least two kinds of hydrophobized inorganic materials each having an average primary particle diameter of not greater than 20 nm, and at least one kind of inorganic material having an average primary particle diameter of not less than 30 nm for the external additive
- The inorganic materials for use as the external additive preferably have a specific surface area (measured by a BEI method) of from 20 to 500 m2/g.
- The added amount of the external additive is from 0.1 to 5% by weight, and preferably from 0.3 to 3% by weight, based on the weight of the toner.
- In addition, particulate polymers such as polymers and copolymers of styrene, methacrylate and acrylate, which are prepared by a method such as soap-free emulsion polymerization methods, suspension polymerization methods, and dispersion polymerization methods; polycondensation resins such as silicone resins, benzoguanamine resins and nylon resins; and thermosetting resins, can be used as external additives. By using such particulate resins in combination with another external additive, the charging properties of the toner can be improved. Specifically, the amount of reversely charged toner particles can be decreased, resulting in prevention of a background development problem in that the background of images is soiled with toner particles.
- The added amount of such a particulate resin is from 0.01 to 5% by weight, and preferably from 0.1 to 2% by weight, based on the weight of the toner.
- The toner for use in the present invention can include other additives such as fluidity improving agents, cleanability improving agents, magnetic materials, metal soaps.
- The fluidity improving agents are used for the toner such that the toner has good hydrophobicity and can maintain good fluidity and charge properties even under high humidity conditions. Specifically, fluidity improving agents are treated on the toner or external additive Specific examples of the fluidity improving agents include silane coupling agents, silylation agents, silane coupling agents having a fluoroalkyl group; organic titanate coupling agents, aluminum coupling agents, silicone oils and modified silicone oils.
- The toner for use in the present invention preferably includes a cleanability improving agent which can impart good cleaning property to the toner such that the toner remaining on the surface of' an image bearing member such as photoreceptors even after a toner image is transferred can be easily removed Specific examples of such cleanability improving agents include fatty acids and metal salts of fatty acids such as stearic acid, zinc stearate and calcium stearate; and particulate polymers such as polymethylmethacrylate and polystyrene, which are manufactured by a method such as soap-free emulsion polymerization methods.
- Particulate resins having a relatively narrow particle diameter distribution and a volume average particle diameter of from 0.01 µm to 1 µm are preferably used as the cleanability improving agent
- Specific examples of the magnetic materials include known magnetic materials. Specific examples thereof include powders of iron, magnetite, ferrite, etc Among these materials, white materials are preferably used as the magnetic material.
- The toner for use in the present invention can be prepared by any known methods such as kneading/pulverization methods in which a toner composition mixture is melted and kneaded, followed by cooling, pulverization and classification, and other methods such as polymerization methods, solution suspension methods and spray granulation methods.
- One example of the kneading/pulverization methods is as follows
- (1) toner constituents such as binder resins, colorants and release agents (such as waxes) are mechanically mixed (mixing process);
- (2) the mixture is heated and kneaded (kneading process);
- (3) the kneaded mixture is cooled and then pulverized (pulverization process); and
- (4) the pulverized mixture is classified (classification process).
- The melt kneading operation is performed using, for example, a kneader such as continuous single- or double-axis kneaders and batch kneaders such as roll mills. Specific examples thereof include KTK double-axis extruders manufactured by Kobe Steel, Ltd., TEM double-axis extruders manufactured by Toshiba Machine Co., Ltd., double-axis extruders manufactured by KCK, PCM double-axis extruders manufactured by Ikegai Corp., and KO-KNEADER manufactured by Buss AG.
- It is preferable that the kneading operation is performed while controlling the kneading temperature such that the molecular chain of the binder resin used is not cut. Specifically, when the kneading temperature is higher than the softening point of the binder resin, the molecular chain is seriously cut. In contrast, when the kneading temperature is lower than the melting point, the dispersion operation cannot be well performed.
- When the kneaded mixture is pulverized, it is preferable that the kneaded mixture is crushed at first, followed by pulverization. In the pulverization process, a method in which particles are collided to a plate using jet air; a method in which particles are collided to each other using jet air; and a method in which particles are pulverized at a narrow gap between a rotor and a stator are preferably used.
- The thus prepared toner particles are then classified so that the resultant particles have the predetermined particle diameter. The classification treatment is performed using a cyclone, a decanter or a method utilizing centrifuge to remove fine particles therefrom.
- After the pulverization operation and classification operation are performed, the pulverized material is subjected to classification in an air stream utilizing centrifuge to prepare toner particles having the predetermined particle diameter.
- The thus prepared toner particles are mixed with an external additive. By mixing an external additive and the toner particles while agitating, the external additive is dissociated so as to cover the surface of the toner particles. In this regard, it is important to strongly affix the external additive (such as particulate inorganic materials and particulate resins) to the toner particles in order to impart good durability to the toner
- Suitable polymerization methods include methods including dissolving or dispersing toner constituents including a colorant and a modified polyester resin (which can form a urea or urethane bond) in an organic solvent to prepare a toner constituent liquid; dispersing the toner constituent liquid in an aqueous medium; subjecting the modified polyester resin to addition polymerization; removing the solvent from the reaction product; and then washing the reaction product
- Suitable resins for use as the modified polyester resin include polyester prepolymers having an isocyanate group, which are prepared by reacting a polyisocyanate compound (PIC) with a polyester resin having a carboxyl group or a hydroxyl group at the end portion thereof. The polyester prepolymer is then subjected to a crosslinking reaction or a molecular chain growth reaction using an amine, etc. The thus prepared modified polyester resin having a urea or urethane bond can impart a good combination of low temperature fixability and hot offset resistance to the toner.
- Specific examples of the polyisocyanates (PIC) include aliphatic polyisocyanates (e.g., tetramethylene diisocyanate, hexamethylene diisocyanate and 2,6-diisocyanate methylcaproate); alicyclic polyisocyanates (e.g., isophorone diisocyanate and cyclohexylmethane diisocyanate); aromatic diisocianates (e.g., tolylene diisocyanate and diphenylmethane diisocyanate); aromatic aliphatic diisocyanates (e,g., α, α, α', α'-tetramethyl xylylene diisocyanate); isocyanurates; blocked polyisocyanates in which the polyisocyanates mentioned above are blocked with phenol derivatives, oximes or caprolactams. These compounds can be used alone or in combination.
- Suitable mixing ratio (ie, the equivalence ratio [NCO]/[OH]) of the [NCO] group of a polyisocyanate (PIC) to the [OH] group of a polyester is from 5/1 to 1/1, preferably from 4/1 to 1.2/1 and more preferably from 2.5/1 to 1.5/1.
- The average number of the isocyanate group included in a molecule of the polyester prepolymer is generally not less than 1, preferably from 1.5 to 3, and more preferably from 1.8 to 2.5.
- Specific examples of the amines (B) include diamines (B1), polyamines (B2) having three or more amino groups, amino alcohols (B3), amino mercaptans (B4), amino acids (B5) and blocked amines (B6) in which the amines (B1-B5) mentioned above are blocked. These amines can be used alone or in combination.
- Specific examples of the diamines (B1) include aromatic diamines (e.g., phenylene diamine, diethyltoluene diamine and 4,4'-diaminadiphenyl methane); alicyclic diamines (e,g., 4,4'-diamino-3,3'-dimethyldicyclohexyl methane, diaminocyclohexane and isophoron diamine); aliphatic diamines (e.g., ethylene diamine, tetramethylene diamine and hexamethylene diamine).
- Specific examples of the polyamines (B2) having three or more amino groups include diethylene triamine, triethylene tetramine, etc Specific examples of the amino alcohols (B3) include ethanol amine, hydroxyethyl aniline, etc Specific examples of the amino mercaptan (B4) include aminoethyl mercaptan, aminopropyl mercaptan, etc. Specific examples of the amino acids (B5) include aminopropionic acid, aminocaproic acid, etc. Specific examples of the blocked amines (B6) include ketimine compounds which are prepared by reacting one of the amines (B1-B5) mentioned above with a ketone such as acetone, methyl ethyl ketone and methyl isobutyl ketone; oxazoline compounds, etc. Among these amines, diamines (B1) and mixtures of a diamine (B1) with a small amount of a polyamine (B2) are preferably used.
- The mixing ratio (i.e., the equivalence ratio [NCO]/[NHx]) of the [NCO] group of the prepolymer having an isocyanate group to the [NHx] group of the amine is from 1/2 to 2/1, preferably from 1/1.5 to 1.5/1 and more preferably from 1/1.2 to 1.2/1.
- By using such a polymerization method, toner having a small particle diameter and a spherical form can be manufactured at a low cost with low environmental load.
- The color of the toner is not particularly limited. When full color images are produced, a combination of black, cyan, magenta and yellow color toners is preferably used Such color toners can be prepared by properly selecting one or more colorants from the above-mentioned colorants.
- The volume average particle diameter of the toner is not particularly limited. The volume average particle diameter is determined by, for example, the following method
- (1) Instrument: COULTER MULTISIZER II (from Beckman Coulter Inc);
- (2) Diameter of aperture: 100 µm;
- (3) Analysis software: COULTER MULTISIZER ACUCOMP VER. 1.19 (from Beckman Coulter Inc.);
- (4) Electrolyte: ISOION II (from Beckman Coulter Inc.);
- (5) Dispersant: EMULGEN 109P (polyoxyethylene lauryl ether having HLB of 13.6 from Kao Corp., which is mixed with the electrolyte in a weight ratio of 5:95 (i.e., 5%));
- (6) Dispersing method: Ten (10) mg of a sample (toner) is added to the dispersant, and the mixture is subjected to a supersonic dispersing treatment for 1 minute. The mixture is then mixed with 25 ml of the electrolyte and the mixture is subjected to a supersonic dispersing treatment for 1 minute to prepare a dispersion.
- (7) Measuring method: The dispersion prepared above is mixed with 100 ml of the electrolyte in a beaker The particle diameters of' 30,000 particles in the dispersion are measured over 20 seconds using the instrument to determine the particle diameter distribution of the sample. The average particle diameter of the sample is determined by the particle diameter distribution.
- The developer used for the image forming method of the present invention may be a one-component developer including the toner and no carrier or a two-component developer including the toner and a carrier. When the developer is used for high speed image forming apparatuses, the developer is preferably a two-component developer.
- When the toner mentioned above is used as a one component developer, the developer has the following advantages.
- (1) Even when the developer is used for a long time while a fresh developer (toner) is replenished, the particle diameter distribution of the developer hardly changes; and
- (2) Even when the developer is used for a long time, the developer does not cause a problem in that the developer is adhered and fixed to the developing roller and developer layer forming blade used, resulting in formation of a toner film thereon
- Therefore images having good image qualities can be produced for a long period of time.
- When the toner is used for the two component developer, the developer has the following advantages.
- (1) Even when the developer is used for a long time while a fresh toner is replenished, the particle diameter distribution of the toner hardly changes; and
- (2) Even when the developer is agitated in the developing device, the developer can maintain good developing ability
- Therefore images having good image qualities can be produced.
- The carrier for use in the two component developer of the present invention is not particularly limited, and one or more proper carriers are chosen while considering the application of the developer. However, it is preferable to use a carrier in which a core material is coated with a resin
- Suitable materials for use as the core material include manganese-strontium materials and manganese-magnesium materials, which have a saturation magnetization of from 50 to 90 Am2/kg (90 emu/g). In view of image density, iron powders (having a a saturation magnetization not less than 100 Am2/kg (100 emu/g) and magnetite having a saturation magnetization of from 75 to 120 Am2/kg (75 to 120 emu/g) are preferably used In addition, copper-zinc materials having a saturation magnetization of from 30 to 80 Am2/kg (30 to 80 emu/g) can be preferably used because the impact of the magnetic brush against the photoreceptor is relatively weak and high quality images can be produced
- These carrier materials can be used alone or in combination.
- The core material of the carrier preferably has a volume average particle diameter (D50) of from 10 to 200 µm, and more preferably from 40 to 100 µm. When the volume average particle diameter is too small, a carrier scattering problem tends to occur because the particles have weak magnetization. When the particle diameter is too large, the surface area of the carrier per unit weight decreases and thereby a toner scattering problem tends to occur. In addition, another problem in that uneven solid images are formed tends to occur.
- Specific examples of such resins to be coated on the carriers include amino resins, vinyl or vinylidene resins, polystyrene resins, halogenated olefin resins, polyester resins, polycarbonate resins, polyethylene resins, polyvinyl fluoride resins, polyvinylidene fluoride resins, polytrifluoroethylene resins, polyhexafluoropropylene resins, vinylidenefluoride-acrylate copolymers, vinylidenefluoride-vinylfluoride copolymers, copolymers of tetrafluoroethylene, vinylidenefluoride and other monomers including no fluorine atom, silicone resins, etc.
- These resins are used alone or in combination. Among these resins, silicone resins are preferably used.
- The silicone resin for use in covering carrier particles is not particularly limited, and any known silicone resins can be used Specific examples of the commercialized strait silicone resins include KR271, KR255, KR152 (which are manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.), SR2400, SR2406, and SR2410 (which are manufactured by Dow Corning Toray Silicone Co., Ltd.). Specific examples of the commercialized modified silicone resins include KR206 (alkyd-modified), KR5208 (acrylic-modified), ES1001N (epoxy-modified), KR305 (urethane-modified) (which are manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd), SR2115 (epoxy-modified), and SR2110 (alkyd-modified) (which are manufactured by Dow Coining Toray Silicone Co., Ltd.).
- Although only a silicone resin can be used for forming the cover layer, additives such as crosslinking agents and charge controlling agents can be used in combination.
- If desired, an electroconductive powder can be included in the resin layer of the carrier Specific examples of such electroconductive powders include metal powders, carbon blacks, titanium oxide, tin oxide, and zinc oxide The average particle diameter of such electroconductive powders is preferably not greater than 1 µm When the particle diameter is too large, it is hard to control the resistance of the coating layer
- The resin layer can be formed by coating a resin solution which is prepared by dissolving a resin in a solvent on a core materials using any known coating method, followed by drying and baking. Suitable coating methods include dip coating methods, spray coating methods, brush coating methods.
- Specific examples of the solvent include toluene, xylene, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, cellosolve, butyl acetate
- The method for baking the coated resin layer is not particularly limited, and external heating methods and internal heating methods can be used. For example, methods using a heating device such as fixed electric furnaces, fluid electric furnaces, rotary electric furnaces, and burner furnaces, and methods using microwave, are preferably used.
- The coated amount of the resin is preferably 0.01 to 5 0 % by weight based on the weight of the carrier. When the coated amount is too small, a uniform resin layer cannot be formed. When the coated amount is too large, the carrier particles aggregate, and thereby the toner cannot be uniformly charged.
- The weight ratio of the toner to the carrier in the two component developer is from 10/90 to 2/98, and preferably from 7/93 to 3/97.
- Next, the developing device will be explained.
- The developing device may be a dry developing device using a dry developer or a wet developing device using a liquid developer In addition, the developing device may be a monochrome developing device or a multi-color developing device. For example, developing devices including an agitator for agitating a developer (or toner) and a developing roller having a magnet roller can be preferably used
- In the developing device, a toner and a carrier are mixed and agitated to frictionally charge the toner The developer including the toner is borne on the surface of the developing roller due to the magnetic force of the magnet roller while forming a magnetic brush. Since the developing roller is set close to the latent image bearing member (such as photoreceptor drums), part of particles of the toner in the magnetic brush is electrically attracted by an electrostatic latent image on the latent image bearing member, resulting in transfer of the toner particles to the latent image. Thus, the latent image is developed with the toner, resulting in formation of a toner image on the surface of the latent image bearing member. In this regard, the developer may be a one-component developer or a two-component developer.
- Suitable one-component developing devices include devices including a developer bearing member to which a one-component developer is supplied, and a developer layer controlling member for forming a thin layer of'the developer on the surface of the developer bearing member.
-
FIG 5 is a schematic view of a one-component developing device. The one-component developing device use a one-component developer (i.e., a toner), and includes adeveloper beating member 402 on which a thin toner layer is formed The toner layer on thedeveloper bearing member 402 is contacted with aphotoreceptor drum 1 serving as a latent image bearing member to develop an electrostatic latent image thereon. - Referring to
FIG. 5 , the toner in acasing 401 is agitated by rotation of an agitator 411, and the agitated toner is supplied to asupply roller 412. Thesupply roller 412 is made of a foamed polyurethane and has a flexibility. Therefore, the toner can be easily held by cells with a diameter of from 50 to 500 µm, which are formed on the surface of thesupply roller 412. In addition, since thesupply roller 412 is soft and has a JIS-A hardness of from 10 to 30 degree, the supply roller can be uniformly contacted with the developingroller 402. - In
FIG. 5 , thesupply roller 412 and the developingroller 402 are rotated in the same direction, namely the surface of the supply roller and the surface of the developing roller move in opposite directions at a nip N in which the supply roller is contacted with the developing roller However, thesupply roller 412 and the developingroller 402 may be rotated in the opposite direction. The ratio (S/D) of the linear speed (S) of thesupply roller 412 to that (D) of'the developingroller 402 is preferably from 0.5 to 1.5 In this developing device, the ratio (S/D) is set to 0.9. The surface portionof'the supply roller 412 is deformed by the developingroller 402 at a depth of from 0 5 to 1.5 mm at the nip N. In this developing device, the torque needed for rotating the rollers is from 14.7 to 24.5 N · cm when the effective width of the developing device is 240 mm (i.e., A-4 size). - The developing
roller 402 has a structure such that a rubber layer is formed on an electroconductive substrate and has a diameter of from 10 to 30 mm. The surface of the rubber layer is roughened so as to have a ten-point mean roughness Rz of from 1 to 4 µm. In this regard, the roughness Rz is preferably 13 to 80% of the average particle diameter of the toner used so that the toner can be well transported. More preferably, the roughness Rz is 20 to 30% of the average particle diameter of'the toner so that the toner on the developing roller is sufficiently charged. - Specific examples of the rubber materials for use in the rubber layer of the developing roller include silicone rubber, butadiene rubbers, NBRs, hydrin rubbers, EPDM rubbers, It is preferable to form a cover layer on the rubber layer. Specific examples of'the materials for use in the cover layer include silicone-based materials and fluorine-containing materials such as TEFLON. Silicone-based materials can well charge a toner, and fluorine-containing materials have good releasability. Carbon blacks can be included in the cover layer to impart electroconductivity to the layer. The thickness of the cover layer is preferably from 5 to 50 µm. When the thickness is out of the range, a problem in that the cover layer is cracked tends to occur
- The toner, which is located on the surface of the supply roller 412 (and located in the cells formed on the supply roller) and which has a predetermined polarity, is nipped by the developing
roller 402 and thesupply roller 412 at the nip N, resulting in frictional charging of the toner. Due to this charging and the roughened surface of the developingroller 402, the toner is borne on the surface of the developingroller 402. In this case, the toner layer thus formed on the developingroller 402 is thick (about 1 to 3 mg/cm2) and uneven. - By contacting a thickness controlling blade 413 (hereinafter referred to as a blade) with the surface of the developing
roller 402, a uniform thin toner layer is formed on the surface of the developing roller. InFIG 5 , theblade 413 is set in such a manner that the developing roller trails the blade. However, theblade 413 may be set to counter the developing roller or may be subjected to edge contact with the developing roller. - It is preferable that the
blade 413 is made of a metal such as stainless steels (such as SUS 304) and has a thickness of from 0.1 to 0.15 mm. Alternatively, theblade 413 may be made of a relatively hard resin or rubber having a thickness of from 1 to 2 mm. By applying a voltage to theblade 413, an electric field can be formed between the blade and the developing roller. In this regard, when a resin or rubber is used for the blade, electroconductive materials such as carbon blacks are preferably included therein to impart electroconductivity to the blade - The
blade 413 preferably has a free end portion (which is not contacted with a holder) having a length of from 10 to 15 mm When the length of the free end portion is too long, the size of the developing device increases. When the length is too short, theblade 413 is vibrated when contacted with the developingroller 402, resulting in formation of' a toner layer with uneven thickness, thereby forming uneven-density stripe images. - The contact pressure at which the
blade 413 is contacted with the developingroller 402 is preferably from 0.049 to 2 45 N/cm. When the contact pressure is too high, the thickness (i.e., weight) of the developer layer formed on the developingroller 402 excessively decreases, and in addition the charge quantity of the toner excessively increases, resulting in decrease of the image density. When the contact pressure is too low, the thickness of the developer layer varies (i.e., a developer layer with an even thickness cannot be formed) and in addition aggregates of toner particles pass the nip between the developingroller 402 and theblade 413, resulting in serious deterioration of image qualities. - The conditions of this example of the developing device are as follows
Hardness of rubber layer of developing roller: 30° (JIS-A hardness)
Material of blade: Stainless steel (SUS) with thickness of 0 1 mm
Contact pressure of'blade: 0.588 N/cm (60 gf/cm) (linear pressure) - Under these conditions, a developer layer with a desired weight can be formed on the developing
roller 402. - The angle formed by the free end portion of the
blade 413 and the tangent line of a point of the developing roller to which the blade is contacted is prefer ably 10 to 45° - Under these conditions, a developer layer (i.e., a toner layer) having a weight of from 0 4 to 0.8 mg/cm2 is formed on the developing
roller 402. In this case, the toner has a charge of from -10 to -30 µC/g. Therefore, electrostatic images on thephotoreceptor 1 are well developed with the toner. - In this example of the one-component developing device, the gap between the surface of the
photoreceptor 1 and the surface of the developingroller 402 is narrower than those of conventional two-component developing devices. Therefore, the developing device has better developing ability than conventional two-component developing devices, namely, the developing device can develop electrostatic latent images even when the latent images have low potentials. - Two-component developing devices having a developer bearing member which has a magnetic field generation member wherein and which bears a two-component developer including a magnetic carrier and a toner on the surface thereof are preferably used for the image forming apparatus of'the present invention.
- A two-component developing device is illustrated in
FIG. 6 . In a developingdevice 424 illustrated inFIG. 6 , the developer is agitated and fed by ascrew 441 to adevelopment sleeve 442 serving as a developer bearing member. The developer thus fed to thedevelopment sleeve 442 is regulated by a developer layer thickness controlling blade 443 (hereinafter referred to as a doctor blade). The thickness of the developing layer is controlled by adjusting the gap (i.e., doctor gap) between thedevelopment sleeve 442 and thedoctor blade 443 When the doctor gap is too narrow, the thickness of the developer layer excessively decreases, resulting in formation of low density images When the doctor gap is too wide, a problem in that a thick developer layer is formed on the developing sleeve, and thereby the particles of'the carrier are adhered to the electrostatic latent images on thephotoreceptor 1 is caused. - Since a magnetic field generating member (e.g., magnets) is arranged in the development sleeve, the developer on the developing sleeve forms a magnetic brush (i.e., chains of the developer) along the magnetic lines of the magnets (i.e., the normal lines of the development sleeve)
- The
development sleeve 442 is arranged so as to be close to thephotoreceptor 1, and a gap (development gap) is formed therebetween. Thus a development region in which the developing sleeve is opposed to the photoreceptor is formed. The development sleeve is a cylinder made of a nonmagnetic material such as aluminum, brass, stainless steel and electroconductive resins, and is rotated by a rotation driving device (not shown) The magnetic brush formed on the development sleeve is fed to the development region due to rotation of the development sleeve. Since a development bias is applied to the development sleeve by a power source (not shown) and thereby an electric field is formed between the development sleeve and the photoreceptor, the toner in the magnetic brush is separated from the carrier particles and adhered to the electrostatic latent images, resulting in formation of toner images. The development bias is typically a DC voltage or a DC voltage overlapped with an AC voltage. - The development gap is preferably from 5 to 30 times the particle diameter of the carrier particles included in the developer Specifically, when the carrier particles have a diameter of 50 µm, the development gap is preferably from 0.5 to 1.5 mm. When the development gap is too wide, low density images are formed.
- The doctor gap is preferably the same as or slightly greater than the development gap.
- Although the diameters and linear speeds of the
photoreceptor drum 1 and thedevelopment sleeve 442 are determined on the basis of the size and reproduction speed of the image forming apparatus, the ratio (D/S) of the linear speed (D) of thephotoreceptor drum 1 to the linear speed (S) of'the development sleeve is preferably not less than 11. It is preferable that a position sensor is provided after the developing device to determine the weight (or thickness) of toner adhered to latent images by measuring the optical reflectance of'the toner image. On the basis of the data of'the reflectance (i.e., the weight of the adhered toner), the development conditions are adjusted if necessary - In the transfer process, a toner image formed on the image bearing member (photoreceptor) is transferred to a receiving material using a transfer device. The transfer device is broadly classified into direct transfer devices which transfer a toner image to a receiving material, and indirect transfer devices in which a toner image on the photoreceptor is primarily transferred to an intermediate transfer medium (primary transfer) and the toner image is then transferred to a receiving material (secondary transfer).
- In the transfer process, the toner image is typically charged with a charger so as to be well transferred to a receiving material or an intermediate transfer medium. When multiple color images are formed, indirect transfer devices are preferably used. Specifically, plural color toner images formed on one or more photoreceptors are transferred to an intermediate transfer medium to form a combined color toner image, and the combined color toner image is then transferred to a receiving material.
- The intermediate transfer medium is not particularly limited, and any known intermediate transfer media such as transfer belts and rollers can be used.
- The surface of'the intermediate transfer medium preferably has a static friction coefficient of from 0.1 to 0.6, and more preferably from 0.3 to 0.5. The intermediate transfer medium preferably has a volume resistivity of from few Ω · cm to 103 Ω · cm In this case, charging of the intermediate transfer medium can be prevented, and the charges formed on the intermediate transfer medium by a charger to well transfer the toner image hardly remain thereon, resulting in prevention of occurrence of uneven transfer of toner images in the secondary transfer process. In addition, a secondary transfer bias can be effectively applied to the intermediate transfer medium
- The material constituting the intermediate transfer medium is not particularly limited, and any known materials can be used therefor. Specific examples of'the materials are as follows.
- (1) Single-layered belts made of'a material with high Young's modulus such as polycarbonate resins (PC), polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF), polyalkylene terephtalate (PAT), mixtures of PC and PAT, mixtures of an ethylene - tetrafluoroethylene copolymer (EIFE) and PC, mixtures of EIFE and PAT, polyimides containing carbon black. These single-layered belts have advantages such that the belts are hardly deformed even when receiving a high stress, and shift of the belts in the width direction is hardly caused in a color image forming process.
- (2) Multi-layered belts in which one or two layers are formed on a single-layered belt mentioned above in (1). The belts have advantages such that formation of hollow images due to high hardness of the single-layered belt can be prevented
- (3) Elastic belts made of'an elastic material (such as resins, rubbers and elastomers) and having a low Young's modulus The belts have an advantage such that formation of hollow line images can be prevented due to their high softness. In addition, by using a belt having a width greater than the width of the rollers for driving or stretching the belt, meandering of the belt can be prevented due to elastic force of the side edge portions without using ribs and a meandering preventing device, resulting in reduction of' costs of the transfer device.
- Among these intermediate transfer media, the elastic belts are preferable. The elastic belts are deformed when contacted with a receiving material at the transfer nip Therefore, layered toner images (i.e., combined color toner image) on the intermediate transfer medium can be well transferred to a receiving material even when the receiving material has a rough surface because the surface of'the intermediate transfer medium is elastically deformed so as to be contacted with recessed portions of'the receiving material. Therefore, formation of hollow images can be prevented without excessively increasing the transfer pressure at the transfer nip even when receiving materials having a rough surface are used.
- The material used for the elastic belts is not particularly limited. Specific examples of the resins for use in the elastic belts include polycarbonate resins, fluorine-containing resins (e.g., ETFE and PVDF), styrene resins such as polystyrene resins, chloropolystyrene resins, poly- α -methylstyrene resins, styrene - butadiene copolymers, styrene - vinyl chloride copolymers, styrene - vinyl acetate copolymers, styrene - maleic acid copolymers, styrene - (meth)acrylate copolymers (e g., styrene - methyl (meth)acrylate copolymers, styrene - ethyl (meth)acrylate copolymers, styrene - butyl (meth)acrylate copolymers, styrene - octyl (meth)acrylate copolymers, and styrene - phenyl (meth)acrylate copolymers), styrene - methyl α -chloroacrylate, and styrene - acrylonitrile - acrylate copolymers; methyl methacrylate resins, butyl methacrylate resins, ethyl acrylate resins, butyl acrylate resins, butyl acrylate resins, modified acrylic resins (e.g., silicone-modified acrylic resins, vinyl chloride-modified acrylic resins, and acrylic urethane resins), vinyl chloride resins, vinyl chloride - vinyl acetate copolymers, rosin-modified maleic resins, phenolic resins, epoxy resins, polyester resins, polyethylene resins, polypropylene resins, polybutadiene resins, ionomer resins, polyurethane resins, silicone resins, ketone resins, ethylene - ethyl acrylate copolymers, xylene resins, polyvinyl butyral resins, polyamide resins, polyphenylene oxide resins. These materials can be used alone or in combination.
- Specific examples of the rubbers for use in the elastic belts include natural rubbers, butyl rubbers, fluorine-containing rubbers, acrylic rubbers, EPDM rubbers, NBRs, ABS rubbers, isoprene rubbers, SB rubbers, butadiene rubbers, ethylene - propylene rubbers, ethylene - propylene terpolymers, chloroprene rubbers, chlorosulfonated polyethylene rubbers, chlorinated polyethylene rubbers, urethane rubbers, syndiotactic 1,2-polybutadiene rubbers, epichlorohydrin rubbers, silicone rubbers, fluorine-containing rubbers, polysulfide rubbers, polynorbomene rubbers, hydrogenated nitrile rubber. These materials can be used alone or in combination.
- Specific examples of'the elastomers for use in the elastic belts include polystyrene-based thermoplastic elastomers, polyolefin-based thermoplastic elastomers, polyvinyl chloride-based thermoplastic elastomers, polyurethane-based thermoplastic elastomers, polyamide-based thermoplastic elastomers, polyurea-based thermoplastic elastomers, polyester-based thermoplastic elastomers, fluorine-containing thermoplastic elastomers. These materials can be used alone or in combination
- Specific examples of the resistivity controlling agents for use in the elastic belts include carbon black, graphite, powders of' metals (e.g., aluminum and nickel), metal oxides (e.g., tin oxide, titanium oxide, antimony oxide, indium oxide, potassium titanate, antimony oxide - tin oxide complexes (ATO), and indium oxide - tin oxide complexes (ITO)). In addition, electroconductive particles in which particles of' an insulating material such as barium sulfate, magnesium silicate, and calcium carbonate are covered with one or more electroconductive material can also be used.
- The surface of the elastic belt (intermediate transfer medium) preferably has a low friction coefficient to prevent contamination of the belt with toner particles, to well remove toner particles remaining on the belt after a secondary transfer process, and to well transfer toner images to receiving materials. For example, a layer including a binder resin such as polyurethane resins, polyester resins, and epoxy resins, and a particulate lubricating material having a low surface energy such as fluorine-containing resins, fluorine-containing compounds, carbon fluoride, titanium oxide, and silicone carbide, is formed on the surface of the elastic belt. Further, a layer, which is prepared by subjecting a fluorine-containing rubber to a heat treatment so that a large amount of fluorine atoms are present therein and which has a low surface energy, can also be used.
- The method for preparing the elastic belts is not particularly limited, and for example the following methods can be used
- (1) Centrifugal molding methods in which a coating liquid (such as melted belt-forming material and solutions of belt-forming materials) is fed into a rotating cylinder to for an endless film (i.e., belt) of the belt-forming material;
- (2) Spray coating methods in which a coating liquid is sprayed against a plate or a cylinder to form a film of the belt-forming material;
- (3) Dipping methods in which a cylinder is dipped into a coating liquid, followed by pulling up (and drying) to form an endless film of the belt-forming material on the surface of the cylinder;
- (4) A coating liquid is fed into a gap between an inner mold and an outer mold to form an endless film of the belt-forming material; and
- (5) A compound is wound around the surface of a cylinder and then the compound is subjected to a vulcanization polishing treatment to form an endless film of the belt-forming material on the surface of the cylinder
- The method for preventing elongation of the elastic belt is not particularly limited, and for example, the following methods can be used.
- (1) Methods in which an elongation preventing material is included in the main (core) layer; and
- (2) Methods in which a rubber layer is formed on a core layer which hardly elongates.
- Specific examples of the elongation preventing materials include natural fibers such as cotton fibers and silk fibers; synthetic fibers such as polyester fibers, nylon fibers, acrylic fibers, polyolefin fibers, polyvinyl alcohol fibers, polyvinyl chloride fibers, polyvinylidene chloride fibers, polyurethane fibers, polyacetal fibers, polyfluoroethylene fibers, and phenolic fibers; fibers of inorganic materials such as carbon fibers, glass fibers, and boron fibers; metal fibers such as iron fibers and copper fibers; . Webs and strings of these fibers are preferably used for the core layer
- The method for preparing the core layer is not particularly limited, and for example, the following methods can be used.
- (1) Methods in which an endless web is set on a cylinder and a cover layer is formed on the web;
- (2) Methods in which an endless web is dipped into a coating liquid such as liquefied rubbers to form a rubber layer on one or both sides of the web; and
- (3) Methods in which strings are wounded around a cylinder and a cover layer is formed on the strings.
- The thickness of the cover layer is determined on the basis of the hardness of' the material used therefor, When the cover layer is too thick, cracks are formed in the cover layer, and in addition the resultant intermediate transfer medium are largely elongated and contracted, resulting in formation of'elongated or contracted images. Therefore, the thickness of the cover layer is preferably not greater than about 1 mm
- The transfer device (primary transfer device and secondary transfer device) preferably includes one or more transfer members for transferring toner images on the image bearing member (photoreceptor) to a receiving material Specific examples of the transfer members include corona chargers, transfer belts, transfer rollers, pressure transfer rollers, adhesive transfer members, etc.
- The receiving material used for the image forming apparatus of the present invention is not particularly limited. In general, papers are used therefor, and one or more white inorganic pigments such as calcium carbonate are included in papers or a coating liquid including such white pigments is applied on papers in order to increase the whiteness thereof Among the white inorganic pigments, calcium carbonate is typically used for the receiving material However, the present inventors discover that receiving papers including a large amount of calcium carbonate cause problems such that toner images on a receiving paper sheet are scratched or rubbed by the backside of the following receiving paper sheet on the tray of'the image forming apparatus. Therefore, the amount of calcium carbonate included in receiving papers, which is determined by a FTIR-ATR
method using AVATOR 3 70 from Thexmo Electron Co., and the equation (2) mentioned below, is preferably not greater than 0.6, and more preferably not greater than 05.
wherein H(peak 1421cm-1) represents the height of the peak which is specific to calcium carbonate and which is observed at 1421cm-1, and H(peak 1036cm-1) represent the height of the peak which is specific to cellulose included in the paper and which is observed at 1036cm-1. - The penetration depth of the FTIR-ATR method depends on the wave number of the light used. When light with a wave number of 1421cm-1 is used, the penetration depth is about 0 6 µm. In this regard, the penetration depth (dp) is defined as a depth at which the strength of'the incident light decreases to 1/e, and is represented by the following equation.
wherein n21 is n2/n1 wherein n1 represents the refractive index of the ATR crystal (i.e., 4.0 for Ge crystal) and n2 represents the refractive index of the sample, and λ1 is λ /n1 and represents the wavelength of the light in the ATR crystal - The receiving material is not limited to papers, and other materials such as polyethylene terephthalate films (for overhead projection (OHP) sheets) can also be uses.
- Tandem image forming apparatus include a plural image forming units each including at least an image beating member, a charging device, a developing device, and a transfer device. In general, four image forming units are provided for forming yellow, magenta, cyan and black toner images. The four color images are prepared in parallel, and then overlaid on a receiving material optionally via an intermediate transfer medium. Therefore, full color images can be produced at a high speed
- Specific examples of the tandem image forming apparatus include the following.
- (1) Image forming apparatus using a direct transfer method, an example of which is illustrated in
FIG 7 . In the apparatus, color toner images formed on theplural photoreceptors 1 serving as image bearing members are transferred one by one bytransfer devices 2 onto a receiving material S which is fed by a feedingbelt 3 Thus a combined color toner image is formed on the receiving material S The color toner image is then fixed by a fixing device 7, resulting in formation of a fixed full color toner image on the receiving material S. - (2) Image forming apparatus using an indirect transfer method, an example of which is illustrated in
FIG. 8 . In the apparatus, color toner images formed on theplural photoreceptors 1 are transferred one by one bytransfer devices 2 onto an intermediate transfer medium 4. Thus a combined color toner image is formed on the intermediate transfer medium 4. The combined color toner image is then transferred by a secondary transfer device 5 to the receiving material S. Although the secondary transfer device 5 has a belt form, the device is not limited thereto, and roller-form transfer devices can also be used therefor. - In the apparatus illustrated in
FIG. 7 , a feeding device 6 and the fixing device 7 have to be arranged at an upstream side and a downstream side of the tandem image forming units TA relative to the feeding direction of'the receiving material, respectively. Therefore, the apparatus tends to be jumboized In contrast, the apparatus illustrated inFIG. 8 has a flexibility in configuration, and the feeding device 6 and the fixing device 7 can be arranged below the tandem image forming units TA. Therefore, the apparatus can be miniaturized. - In addition, in the apparatus illustrated in
FIG 7 , the fixing device 7 has to be set close to the tandem image forming units TA to prevent jumboization of the apparatus. Therefore, the receiving material sheet S straightly enters into the fixing device while the rear end of'the sheet S is sandwiched by thephotoreceptor 1 and thetransfer device 2, resulting in occurrence of problems in that toner images on the sheet S are easily damaged by the impact caused by collision of'the tip edge of'the sheet S against the fixing device and abnormal images such as elongated or contracted images are formed due to the difference in speed between thetransfer belt 3 and the fixing device 7. In contrast, in the apparatus illustrated inFIG 8 , the receiving material sheet S can be bent before the fixing device 7 and thereby the sheet S can enter into the fixing device 7 without influenced by the secondary transfer device 5. Therefore, the above-mentioned problems are hardly caused - For the reasons mentioned above, the indirect transfer methods attract attention recently In the image forming apparatus using an indirect transfer method, toner particles remaining on the
image bearing member 1 are removed with acleaning device 8 so that the surface of the image bearing member is cleaned so as to be ready for the next image forming operation, In addition, toner particles remaining on the surface of the intermediate transfer medium 4 is removed with a second cleaning device 9 so that the surface of'the intermediate transfer medium is cleaned so as to be ready for the next image forming operation - In the fixing process, toner images transferred on a receiving material sheet are fixed thereto by a fixing device The fixing device is not particularly limited, but fixing devices including a fixing member and a heater for heating the fixing member are preferably used.
- The fixing member of the fixing device is not particularly limited as long as the fixing member forms a nip For example, combinations of'an endless belt and a roller, and combinations of two rollers can be used, Among these fixing members, combinations of an endless belt and a roller are preferably used to save energy, With respect to the heating method, induction heating (IH) is preferably used to save energy.
- When the fixing member includes an endless belt, it is preferable for the endless belt to be made of a material having a low heat capacity, and to have a structure such that an offset preventing layer is formed on a substrate Suitable materials for use in the substrate include nickel and polyimide resins Suitable materials for use in the offset preventing layer include silicone rubbers and fluorine-containing resins.
- When the fixing member includes one or more rollers, the cores of the rollers are preferably made of an non-elastic material so that the rollers are not deformed even when receiving a high pressure. Suitable non-elastic materials for use in the cores of the fixing rollers include metals having a high heat conductivity such as aluminum, iron, stainless steel, and brass. In addition, an offset preventing layer is preferably formed overlying the core Suitable materials for use in the offset preventing layer include RTV silicone rubbers, tetrafluoroethylene - perfluoroalkyl vinyl ether copolymers (PFA), polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE).
- In the fixing process, toner images transferred onto a receiving material sheet are passed through the nip formed by the fixing members In this regard, the toner image transferring operation and the fixing operation may be performed at the same time When a multi-color image constituted of plural color toner images is formed, the plural color toner images may be individually fixed after each color toner image is transferred (i.e., a fixing operation is performed plural times), or the plural toner images may be fixed only by one fixing operation after forming a combined color toner image.
- The nip is formed by contacting two fixing members (such as belt-roller and roller-roller). The pressure (surface pressure) at the nip of the fixing members is not particularly limited, but is preferably not less than 5 N/cm2, more preferably from 7 to 100 N/cm2, and even more preferably from 10 to 60 N/cm2, When the pressure is too high, the life of the fixing members shortens. In contrast, when the pressure is too low, toner images cannot be sufficiently fixed to receiving materials.
- The fixing temperature is not particularly limited, but is preferably from 120 to 170 °C, and more preferably from 120 to 160°C. When the fixing temperature is too low, toner images cannot be sufficiently fixed In contrast, fixing at a too high a temperature is not prefer able in view of energy saving
- The fixing devices are broadly classified into internal heating devices in which a fixing member (a roller or a belt) heated from the backside thereof (i.e., the side not contacting toner images) fixes toner images upon application of'heat and pressure thereto, and external heating devices in which a fixing member (a roller or a belt) heated from the front side thereof (i.e., the side contacting toner images) fixes toner images upon application of heat and pressure thereto. Combinations of the internal heating devices and the external heating devices can also be used.
- In the internal heating fixing devices, the fixing member has a heat source (such as heaters and halogen lamps) inside thereof.
- In the external heating fixing devices, it is preferable that a part of the fixing member is heated with a heat source The heat source is not particularly limited, and for example, electromagnetic induction heating devices are used The electromagnetic induction heating device is not particularly limited, and devices including a magnetic field generation member and a heat generation member capable of generating heat utilizing electromagnetic induction.
- Suitable devices for use in electromagnetic induction heating include devices having an induction coil which is set close to a fixing member (such as heat rollers), a shield layer on one side of'which the coil is arranged, and an insulating layer which is formed on the opposite side of'the shield layer. In this case, the heat roller serving as a fixing member is preferably a magnetic roller or a heat pipe
- The induction coil is preferably set so as to face half of'the heat roller, wherein a fixing member (such as pressure rollers and endless belts) is contacted with a portion of the other half of the heat roller.
- Next, the internal heating fixing devices will be explained by reference to drawings.
-
FIG. 9 illustrates a belt fixing device which is an internal heating fixing device. Referring toFIG. 9 , abelt fixing device 510 includes aheat roller 511, a fixingroller 512, a fixingbelt 513, and apressure roller 514 - The fixing
belt 513 is rotated while tightly stretched by theheat roller 511 and the fixingroller 512, which are rotatable, and is heated to a predetermined temperature by theheat roller 511. Theheat roller 511 has aheat source 515 therein. The temperature of theheat roller 511 is measured with asensor 517 to be controlled. The fixingroller 512 is rotatably set while contacted with the inner surface of the fixingbelt 513. Thepressure roller 514 is rotatably set while contacted with the outer surface of' the fixingbelt 513 and pressing the fixing belt to the fixingroller 512. Since the hardness of the surface of the fixingbelt 513 is lower than that of thepressure roller 514, the fixing belt is deformed toward the fixingroller 512 at the nip N as illustrated inFIG. 9 - In the
belt fixing device 510, the receiving material sheet S bearing thereon a toner image T to be fixed is fed to theheat roller 511. The toner image T is heated by theheat roller 511 which is heated to the predetermined temperature by aheat source 515, and the fixingbelt 513, and thereby the toner image T is melted The receiving material sheet S bearing the melted toner image is fed into the nip N, at which the toner image is pressed to the sheet S by the fixingroller 512 and thepressure roller 514 while the toner image is contacted with the surface of the fixingbelt 513, resulting in fixation of the toner image on the sheet S. - After passing the nip N, the receiving material sheet S is then released from the fixing
belt 513 to be fed to a tray (not shown) In this regard, since the nip N is curved as mentioned above, the receiving material sheet S is discharged toward thepressure roller 514, and thereby occurrence of a winding problem in that the sheet S is wound around the fixingbelt 513, resulting in jamming of the sheet can be prevented The surface of the fixingbelt 513 is cleaned by a cleaningroller 516. -
FIG. 10 illustrates a heat roller fixing device. Referring toFIG. 10 , a fixingdevice 518 includes aheat roller 520 and apressure roller 530. - The
heat roller 520 has ametal cylinder 521, which is covered with an offset preventinglayer 522 and inside which aheat lamp 523 is arranged Thepressure roller 530 has ametal cylinder 531, which is covered with an offset preventinglayer 532 Thepressure roller 530 may have aheat lamp 533 therein as illustrated inFIG 10 . - The
heat roller 520 and thepressure roller 530 are rotated while pressed to each other by a spring (not shown). The hardness of the offset preventinglayer 522 of theheat roller 520 is lower than that of'the offset preventinglayer 532 of thepressure roller 530, and therefore the offset preventinglayer 522 is deformed (i.e , recessed) at the nip N as illustrated inFIG 10 . - In the heat
roller fixing device 518, the receiving material sheet S bearing thereon the toner image T to be fixed is fed to the nip N. The toner image T is heated by theheat roller 520 which is heated to the predetermined temperature by theheat lamp 523, and thereby the toner image is melted. In addition, the toner image T is pressed to the sheet S by thepressure roller 530, and thereby the toner image is fixed on the sheet S. - After passing the nip N, the receiving material sheet S is then fed to a tray (not shown). In this regard, since the nip N is curved as mentioned above, the receiving material sheet S is discharged toward the
pressure roller 530, and thereby occurrence of a winding problem in that the sheet S is wound around theheat roller 520 can be prevented. The surfaceof'the heat roller 520 is cleaned with a cleaning roller (not shown). - Next, the external heating fixing devices will be explained by reference to drawings.
-
FIG. 11 illustrates an electromagnetic induction heat fixing device which is an external heating fixing device and which uses a fixing belt, a fixing roller and a pressure roller Referring toFIG. 11 , an electromagnetic inductionheat fixing device 570 includes aheat roller 566, a fixingroller 580, a fixingbelt 567, apressure roller 590 and an electromagneticinduction heat member 560 The fixingbelt 567 is tightly stretched by theheat roller 566 and the fixingroller 580, which are rotatable, and is heated to a predetermined temperature by theheat roller 566. - The
heat roller 566 includes a magnetic metal cylinder, which is made of a magnetic metal (such as iron, cobalt and nickel) or a magnetic metal alloy (such as alloys of'the above-mentioned metals) and which has an outside diameter of from 20 to 40 mm and a thickness of from 0.3 to 1.0 mm. Therefore, theheat roller 566 has a low heat capacity and thereby the roller can be rapidly heated to the predetermined temperature. - The fixing
roller 580 includes ametal cylinder 581 made of a metal such as stainless steel, and anelastic layer 582 which is formed on themetal cylinder 581 using a heat resistant elastic material such as solid silicone rubbers and foamed silicone rubbers. The fixingroller 580 is rotated while contacted with the inner surface of the fixingbelt 567 The fixingroller 580 and thepressure roller 590 form a nip N having a predetermined width Therefore, the fixing roller has an outside diameter of from 20 to 40 mm, which is greater than that of theheat roller 566. Theelastic layer 582 has a thickness of from 4 to 6 mm. Thus the fixingroller 580 is designed so as to have a large heat capacity than theheat roller 566, and thereby the warm-up timeof'the heat roller 566 is reduced - The
pressure roller 590 includes ametal cylinder 591 made of a metal having a high heat conductivity such as copper, aluminum and stainless steel, and anelastic layer 592 which is formed on themetal cylinder 591 using a heat resistant elastic material having a good toner releasability Thepressure roller 590 is rotated while contacted with the inner surface of the fixingbelt 567 so as to press the fixing belt to the fixingroller 580 - The electromagnetic
induction heat member 560 is set close to theheat roller 566, and extends in a direction parallel to the axisof'the heat roller 566. Theheat member 560 includes anexciting coil 561 serving as a magnetic field generation device, and acoil guide plate 562, around which the coil is wound Thecoil guide plate 562 has a half pipe form and is set close to theheat roller 566. Theexciting coil 561 is prepared by winding a single wire along the surface of thecoil guide plate 562 in a reciprocating manner so that the wire extends in the longitudinal direction of'thecoil guide plate 562. The oscillating circuit of theexciting coil 561 is connected with a frequency-changeable driving power source (not shown). On the outside of theexciting coil 561, anexciting coil core 563 which is made of' a ferromagnetic material such as fenites and which has a half'pipe form is set close to theexciting coil 561 while supported by asupport 564. - In the electromagnetic induction
heat fixing device 570 illustrated inFIG 11 , when an electric power is applied to theexciting coil 561 of the electromagneticinduction heat member 560 is heated, an alternating magnetic field is formed in the vicinity of theinduction heat member 560, and thereby theheat roller 566, which is close to theexciting coil 561 and which is surrounded by thecoil 561, is efficiently heated due to eddy current generated therein. On the other hand, the receiving material sheet S is fed to the nip N formed between the fixingroller 580 and thepressure roller 590 The toner image T on the receiving material sheet S is heated by the fixingbelt 567, which is heated by theheat roller 566 at a contact portion W1 of the heat roller, and thereby the toner image I is melted The sheet S bearing the melted toner image is fed to the nip N, and the toner image is pressed by thepressure roller 590 toward the fixingroller 580 while contacted with the surface of the fixingbelt 567, resulting in fixation of the toner image T on the sheet S. - After passing the nip N, the receiving material sheet S bearing the fixed toner image thereon is released from the fixing
belt 567 and is then fed to a tray (not shown) In this regard, since the nip N is curved similarly to the case illustrated inFIG. 9 , the receiving material sheet S is discharged toward thepressure roller 590, and thereby occurrence of a winding problem in that the sheet S is wound around the fixingbelt 567 can be prevented The surface of the fixingbelt 567 is cleaned with a cleaning roller (not shown) -
FIG. 12 illustrates another electromagnetic induction heat fixing device which is an external heating fixing device and which uses two rollers. Referring toFIG. 12 , a fixingdevice 535 includes a fixingroller 540, apressure roller 550 contacted with the fixingroller 540, and electromagneticinduction heating sources 536 - The fixing
roller 540 includes a metal cylinder 541, and a heat insulatingelastic layer 542, aheat generation layer 543, and arelease layer 544 which are overlaid on the metal cylinder 541 in this order. Thepressure roller 550 also includes ametal cylinder 551, and a heat insulatingelastic layer 552, aheat generation layer 553, and arelease layer 554, which are overlaid on themetal cylinder 551 in this order Each of' the release layers 544 and 554 are made of a tetrafloroethylene - perfluoroalkyl vinyl ether copolymer (PFA) - The fixing
roller 540 and thepressure roller 550 are rotated while pressed to each other by a spring (not shown) Thus, the nip N is formed therebetween. - The electromagnetic
induction heating sources 536 are set close to the fixingroller 540 and thepressure roller 550, respectively, to heat the heat generation layers 543 and 553 by electromagnetic induction heating. The fixingdevice 535 illustrated inFIG. 12 has advantages such that the fixingroller 540 and thepressure roller 550 are evenly and efficiently heated, and a high surface pressure can be applied to the nip N because of a combination of rollers is used - In the oil application process, an oil is applied to the fixing member such as fixing belts and fixing rollers using an oil application device.
- The oil application device is not particularly limited, and for example, application devices including an oil application roller having a heat resistant felt or a heat resistant porous layer on the surface thereof which is soaked with an oil, is pressed to the fixing roller to apply the oil to the fixing roller are used
-
FIG. 13 illustrates an oil application device set on a fixing device for use in the image forming apparatus of the present invention. Referring toFIG. 13 , an oil supplied from anoil container 217 to a felt 211 by apump 220 is coated on the surface of a fixingroller 213. The amount of the oil on the surface of the fixingroller 213 is controlled by ablade 216. The coating amount of the oil can be changed by changing the pressure of theblade 216 to the fixingroller 213. Specifically, by increasing the pressure of theblade 216, the coating amount of the oil can be decreased In contrast, by decreasing the pressure of the blade, the coating amount of the oil can be increased. Since the fixingroller 213 and apressure roller 215 are heated byrespective halogen heaters 221, atoner image 218 formed on a receivingmaterial 219 is fixed by the fixingroller 213 and thepressure roller 215 when the receivingmaterial 219 passes through the nip between the tworollers Numerals roller 213, and a discharging roller for discharging the receivingmaterial 219 bearing thereon the fixed toner image from the fixing device. - The oil application roller preferably has a porous outermost layer made of a polytetrafluoroethylene resin. Suitable oils to be applied to the fixing roller include oils having high heat resistance Among the heat resistant oils, silicone oils are preferably used. Specific examples of the silicone oils include polydimethylsilicones, polyphenylmethylsilicones, etc. Among the silicone oils, amino-modified silicone oils are preferably used because of having a good wettability to fixing roller. The viscosity of the oils is preferably from 1 Pa · s (1,000 cps) to 100 Pa · s (100,000 cps) When the viscosity is too low, a large amount of oil is exuded from the application roller at a time In order
- The amount of'oil applied to the fixing member is preferably from 0.1 to 10 µg/cm2 and more preferably from 0.2 to 7 µg/cm2. When the amount is too small, the releasability of the fixing member is deteriorated when the fixing speed is high. When the amount is too large, problems such that receiving papers become transparent due to penetration of the oil into the papers, and thereby formation of additional images using a pencil or ball point pen or inkjet printing cannot be well performed on such oil-penetrated receiving papers occur.
- In the cleaning process, toner particles remaining on the surface of the image bearing member without being transferred are removed therefrom by a cleaning device.
- It is possible to use a developing device, which not only develops electrostatic latent images on the image bearing member to form toner images but also collects such residual toner particles instead of a cleaning device. Namely, this is a cleaning-less developing method.
- The cleaning device is not particularly limited, and known cleaning devices can be used. Specific examples thereof include magnetic brush cleaners, electrostatic brush cleaners, magnetic roller cleaners, blade cleaners, brush cleaners, and web cleaners, etc. Among these cleaners, blade cleaners are preferably used because of having a good cleanability, low costs and small size.
- Suitable materials for use in the cleaning blades include urethane rubbers, silicone rubbers, fluorine-containing rubbers, chloroprene rubbers, butadiene rubbers. Among these materials, methane rubbers are preferable.
-
FIG. 14 illustrate a cleaning blade. Referring toFIG. 14 , acleaning blade 613 is contacted with thephotoreceptor 1 serving as an image bearing member at acontact point 615 Thecleaning blade 613 is set so as to counter thephotoreceptor 1, and a surface 617 (i.e., toner blocking surface) of thecleaning blade 613 and the surface of the photoreceptor form a space SP, which is preferably an acute angle. - The
surface 617 has anoutermost layer 618 thereon, which has a higher friction coefficient than thecleaning blade 613. Specific examples of the materials having a high friction coefficient for use in theoutermost layer 618 include diamond-like carbon (DLC), but are not limited thereto. It is preferable that theoutermost layer 618 is formed on a portion of thesurface 617 so as not to contact the surface of thephotoreceptor 1. - The cleaning device including the
cleaning blade 613 also includes a toner collection blade for collecting toner particles scraped off by theblade 613, a toner collection coil for feeding the collected toner particles to a residual toner collector, etc., which are not shown inFIG. 14 -
FIG. 15 illustrates a cleaning-less image forming apparatus including a developing device having a cleaning function. - Referring to
FIG. 15 , the image forming apparatus includes thephotoreceptor 1 serving as the image hearing member, abrush charger 620 serving as a contact charger for charging thephotoreceptor 1, alight irradiating device 603 for irradiating thephotoreceptor 1 with light L to form an electrostatic latent image on thephotoreceptor 1, a developingdevice 604 for developing the electrostatic latent image with a developer including a toner to form a toner image on thephotoreceptor 1, a receivingmaterial feeding device 640 for feeding a receiving material sheet P, atransfer device 650 for transferring the toner image onto the receiving material sheet, and afeeder 680 for feeding the receiving material sheet. - In the image forming apparatus, toner particles remaining on the surface of the
photoreceptor 1 without being transferred to the receiving material sheet P are transported to thebrush charger 620. The residual toner particles are temporarily collected by a magnetic bmsh of a chargingmember 621 of thebrush charger 620 The thus collected toner particles are discharged from the magnetic brush to the surface of thephotoreceptor 1, and the discharged toner particles are collected by adeveloper bearing member 631 together with the developer on the developer bearing member Thus, the toner particles are returned to the developingdevice 604 to be reused for developingNumerals - In the developing
device 604 having a cleaning function, toner particles remaining on thephotoreceptor 1 are collected due to a development bias (i.e., the potential difference between the DC voltage applied to thedeveloper bearing member 631 and the surface potential of the photoreceptor 1). Thus, residual toner particles are collected by the developing device to be reused, i.e., the image forming apparatus is free from maintenance In addition, the apparatus is a cleaner-less system, and therefore the size of the image forming apparatus can be reduced. - The image forming apparatus optionally performs a discharging process. In the discharging process, charges remaining on the image bearing member (photoreceptor) are discharged using a discharging device. The discharging device is not particularly limited, and any known dischargers can be used. For example, discharging lamps are used for the discharging device.
- A toner recycle process can be optionally performed. The toner recycle process is such that toner particles collected by the cleaning device are fed to the developing device by a recycling device to be recycled. Any known powder feeding devices can be used for the recycling device
- Further, a controlling process is performed by a controller to control the above-mentioned processes. Specific examples of the controller include sequencers, and computers.
- The image forming processes and image forming apparatus suitable for the present invention will be explained in detail referring to drawings.
-
FIG. 16 is a schematic view illustrating an embodiment of the image forming apparatus of'the present invention - In
FIG 16 , animage forming apparatus 100 includes a photoreceptor drum 10 (hereinafter referred to as a photoreceptor 10) serving as the image bearing member; a chargingroller 20 serving as the charging device; alight irradiator 30 serving as the latent image forming device; a developingdevice 40 serving as the image developing device; anintermediate transfer medium 50; a cleaner 60 serving as the cleaning device and including a cleaning blade; and a discharginglamp 70 serving as the discharging device. - The
intermediate transfer medium 50 is an endless belt which is rotated in a direction indicated by an arrow by threerollers 51 arranged therein while tightly stretched by the rollers. At least one of the threerollers 51 applies a transfer bias (first transfer bias) to the intermediate transfer medium 50 A cleaner 90 is provided to clean the surface of theintermediate transfer medium 50. - On the upper side of the
intermediate transfer medium 50, atransfer roller 80 is provided which applies a transfer bias (a second transfer bias) to a receivingmaterial 95 on which a toner image is to be transferred In addition, acorona charger 58 is provided to charge the toner image on theintermediate transfer medium 50 before the toner image is transferred to the receivingmaterial 95. - A developing
device 40 includes a developingbelt 41; a black developingunit 45K; a yellow developingunit 45Y; amagenta developing unit 45M; and acyan developing unit 45C. Each of'the developing units includes a developer containing portion 42 (42K, 42Y, 42M or 42C), a developer supplying roller 43 (43K, 43Y, 43M or 43C), and a developing roller 44 (44K, 44Y, 44M or 44C). The developingbelt 41 is rotatably supported by plural rollers and is contacted with thephotoreceptor 10 - In the
image forming apparatus 100, the surface of thephotoreceptor 10 is uniformly charged with the chargingroller 20. Thelight irradiator 30 irradiates the charged surface of thephotoreceptor 10 with imagewise light to form an electrostatic latent image on thephotoreceptor 10. The developingdevice 40 develops the latent image with color toners to sequentially form color toner images on thephotoreceptor 10. The color toner images are transferred to the intermediate transfer medium 50 (first transfer) to form a toner image (e.g., a full color toner image) thereon while at least one of therollers 51 applies a transfer bias thereto. The toner image formed on theintermediate transfer medium 50 is then transferred to the receiving material 95 (second transfer). Particles of the toner remaining on thephotoreceptor 10 are removed with the cleaner 60 and charges remaining on thephotoreceptor 10 are removed by irradiating thephotoreceptor 10 with light using the discharginglamp 70. - Another image forming apparatus is illustrated in
FIG 17 . InFIG. 17 , an image forming apparatus 101' has the same configuration as that of the image forming apparatus illustrated inFIG 16 except that the black, yellow, magenta andcyan developing units photoreceptor 10 without using the developingbelt 41. The action of the image forming apparatus is also the same as that of the image forming apparatus illustrated inFIG 16 -
FIG. 18 is the overview of another embodiment of the image forming apparatus suitable for the present invention, which is a tandem-type color image forming apparatus - In
FIG 18 , a tandem-type colorimage forming apparatus 500 includes animage forming section 150, apaper feeding section 200, ascanner 300 and anautomatic document feeder 400 - The
image forming section 150 includes an endlessintermediate transfer medium 50 which is provided in the center of theimage forming section 150. Theintermediate transfer medium 50 is rotated in the clockwise direction byrollers roller 15 to remove particles of the toner remaining on the surface of the intermediate transfer medium. - Four
image forming units 18 for forming yellow, magenta, cyan and black toner images are arranged side by side on theintermediate transfer medium 50. Theimage forming units 18 includerespective photoreceptors Numeral 120 denotes a tandem type developing device. The developingdevice 120 includes four developing devices arranged in the respective fourimage forming units 18. Alight irradiator 21 is arranged at a location over theimage forming units 18. - A
second transfer device 22 is provided below theintermediate transfer medium 50 Thesecond transfer device 22 includes anendless belt 24 which is rotatably stretched a pair ofrollers 23. Theendless belt 24 feeds a receiving material so that the toner images on theintermediate transfer medium 50 are transferred to the receiving material while sandwiched by theintermediate transfer medium 50 and theendless belt 24 - A fixing
device 25 is arranged at a position near thesecond transfer device 22. The fixingdevice 25 includes anendless fixing belt 26 and apressure roller 27 which presses the fixingbelt 26. - In addition, a
sheet reversing device 28 configured to reverse the receiving material is provided at a position near the fixingdevice 25, to produce double-sided copies. - Then the full color image forming operation of the tandem-type color
image forming apparatus 500 will be explained. - An original to be copied is set on an original table 130 of the
automatic document feeder 400 Alternatively, the original is directly set on aglass plate 32 of thescanner 300 after theautomatic document feeder 400 is opened, followed by closing of'theautomatic document feeder 400. When a start button (not shown) is pushed, the color image on the original on theglass plate 32 is scanned with afirst traveler 33 and asecond traveler 34 which move in the right direction. In the case where the original is set on the table 130 of'theautomatic document feeder 400, at first the original is fed to theglass plate 32, and then the color image thereon is scanned with the first andsecond travelers first traveler 33 irradiates the color image on the original with light and thesecond traveler 34 reflects the light reflected from the color image to send the color image light to asensor 36 via a focusinglens 35 Thus, color image information (i.e., black, yellow, magenta and cyan color image data) is provided. - The black, yellow, magenta and cyan color image data are sent to the respective black, yellow, magenta and cyan color
image forming units 18, and black, yellow, magenta and cyan color toner images are formed on therespective photoreceptors FIG. 16 . -
FIG. 19 is a schematic view illustrating a part of'theimage forming units 18. -
Numeral - The developing
device 61 includesagitators 68, a developingroller 72, and aregulating blade 73 configured to form adeveloper layer 65 on the surface of'the developing roller.Numeral 71 denotes a toner sensor configured to determine the toner concentration. Character L denotes imagewise light. - The cleaner 63 includes
cleaning blade 75, a cleaningbrush 76, aroller 77, ablade 78 and atoner recycling device 79 configured to feed the collected toner particles to the developingdevice 61. - Referring back to
FIG 18 , the thus prepared black, yellow, magenta and cyan color toner images are transferred one by one to theintermediate transfer medium 50 which is rotated by therollers intermediate transfer medium 50.Numeral 62 denotes a transfer charger. - On the other hand, one of
paper feeding rollers 142 is selectively rotated to feed the top paper sheet of paper sheets stacked in apaper cassette 144 in apaper bank 143 while the paper sheet is separated one by one by aseparation roller 145 when plural paper sheets are continuously fed. The paper sheet is fed to apassage 148 in theimage forming section 150 through apassage 146 in thepaper feeding section 200, and is stopped once by aregistration roller 49.Numeral 14 denotes feed rollers. A paper sheet can also be fed from amanual paper tray 54 to apassage 53 by aseparation roller 52 The thus fed paper sheet is also stopped once by theregistration roller 49. Theregistration roller 49 is generally grounded, but a bias can be applied thereto to remove paper dust therefrom. - The thus prepared full color toner image on the
intermediate transfer medium 50 is transferred to the paper sheet, which is timely fed by theregistration roller 49, at the contact point of thesecond transfer device 22 with theintermediate transfer medium 50. Particles of the toner remaining on the surface of theintermediate transfer medium 50 even after the second image transfer operation are removed therefrom by the cleaner 17. - The paper sheet having the full color toner image thereon is then fed by the
second transfer device 22 to the fixingdevice 25, and the toner image is fixed on the paper sheet upon application of heat and pressure Then the paper sheet is discharged from theimage forming section 150 by adischarge roller 56 while the path is properly selected by a paperpath changing pick 55. Thus, a copy is stacked on atray 57 When a double sided copy is produced, the paper sheet having a toner image on one side thereof is fed to thesheet reversing device 28 to be reversed. Then the paper sheet is fed to thesecond transfer device 24 so that an image is transferred to the other side of the paper sheet. The image is also fixed by the fixingdevice 25 and then the copy is discharged to thetray 57 by thedischarge roller 56. - The image forming apparatus can include a toner container containing a toner or a developer therein, which is to be fed to the developing device.
- The container is not particularly limited, and known containers can be used For example, containers having a main body (bottle) and a cap The main body (bottle) is not particularly limited with respect to the size, shape, structure and constitutional material For example, a cylindrical bottle is used Preferably, the bottle has a spiral groove inside surface thereof so that the toner or developer therein is fed to the exit of the bottle when rotated. It is preferable that the body of the bottle having a spiral groove is shrunk like an accordion.
- Suitable materials for constituting the bottle include materials with a high dimensional accuracy. Specific examples of such materials include resins such as polyester resins, polyethylene resins, polypropylene resins, polystyrene resins, polyvinyl chloride resins, polyacrylic resins, polycarbonate resins, ABS resins, polyacetal resins, etc.
- The toner container is detachably attached to the image forming apparatus to supply a toner or a developer to the image forming apparatus. The container has good combination of preservability, feedability and handleability.
- The process cartridge for use in the present invention includes at least an image bearing member configured to bear an electrostatic latent image, and a developing device configured to develop the electrostatic latent image with a developer including a toner to form a toner image on the image bearing member, and optionally includes one or more of' a charging device for charging the image bearing member, a light irradiating device for irradiating the charged image bearing member to form the electrostatic latent image, a transfer device for transferring the toner image onto a receiving material, a cleaning device for cleaning the surface of the image bearing member, and a discharging device for discharging residual charges on the image beating member.
- The developing device included in the process cartridge includes at least a developer containing section for containing the developer, and a developer bearing member for bearing and feeding the developer to the photoreceptor to develop an electrostatic latent image, and optionally includes a developer layer controlling member for forming a uniform developer layer on the developer bearing member. The developer is a one-component developer or a two-component developer
- In addition, the above-mentioned devices for use in the image forming apparatus of the present invention can be used for the charging device, light irradiating device, transfer device, cleaning device, and discharging device of the process cartridge.
- The process cartridge of the present invention is detachably attached to electrophotographic image forming apparatus such as copiers, printers and facsimiles, and preferably to the image forming apparatus of'the present invention.
-
FIG. 20 illustrates a process cartridge for use in the present invention. Referring toFIG 20 , the process cartridge includes animage bearing member 101 bearing an electrostatic latent image, acharging device 102, a developingdevice 104, atransfer device 108 and acleaning device 107. The process cartridge can optionally include other devices if necessary InFIG. 20 ,numerals - The image forming operations of the process cartridge is the same as those mentioned above in the image forming apparatus of the present invention. Specifically, the
image bearing member 101 is rotated in the direction indicated by an arrow, and is charged by the chargingdevice 102, followed bylight irradiation 103 by the light irradiating device (not shown) to form an electrostatic latent image thereon. The developingdevice 104 develops the electrostatic latent image to form a toner image on the image bearing member, and thetransfer device 108 transfers the toner image onto the receivingmaterial 105 Thus, an image is printed out The surface of theimage bearing member 101 is cleaned by thecleaning device 107, and residual charges on the image bearing member are removed by the discharging device (not shown) These image forming operations are repeated to produce the next image - Having generally described this invention, further understanding can be obtained by reference to certain specific examples which are provided herein for the purpose of illustration only and are not intended to be limiting. In the descriptions in the following examples, the numbers represent weight ratios in parts, unless otherwise specified.
- In the following examples and comparative examples, the methods for evaluating the properties of the resins and waxes used for the toners and the content of CaCO3 in a receiving material are as follows
- A flow tester CFT-500D from Shimadzu Corp. The conditions of the flow tester are as follows:
- (1) diameter and length of the die: 1 mm, and 1 mm, respectively
- (2) pressure applied to the sample (resin) using plunger: 0 98 MPa
- (3) temperature rising speed: 3 °C/minute
- (4) weight of sample: 1 g
- The glass transition temperature (Tg) of a resin can be measured with a differential scanning colorimeter DSC210 from Seiko Instruments, Inc. The method is as follows.
- (1) about 5 mg of a sample is contained in an aluminum pan;
- (2) the sample is heated from room temperature to 200 °C at a heating speed of' 10 °C/min, followed by cooling to 0 °C at a cooling speed of 10 °C/min; and
- (3) the sample is heated again to 200 °C at a heating speed of 10 °C/min to obtain a DSC curve.
- The acid value of' a resin is determined by the method described in JIS K0070 except that a mixture solvent of acetone and toluene (mixing ratio of 1:1) is used as the solvent instead of'the mixture solvent of ethanol and ether.
- The melting point of' a resin can be measured with a differential scanning colorimeter DSC210 from Seiko Instruments, Inc. The method is as follows.
- (1) about 5 mg of a sample is contained in an aluminum pan;
- (2) the sample is heated from room temperature to 200 °C at a heating speed of 10 °C/min, followed by cooling to 0 °C at a cooling speed of 10 °C/min; and
- (3) the sample is heated again to 200 °C at a heating speed of 10 °C/min to obtain a DSC curve.
- The volume average particle diameter is determined by an instrument COULTER MULIISIZER II from Beckman Coulter Inc. The measurement method is mentioned above
- The amount of calcium carbonate included in a receiving material is determined by analyzing the surface of a receiving material with a Fourier transform infrared spectrometer (F T-IR) AVANIOR 370 from Thermo Electron Co., and making calculation using the equation (2) mentioned above
- The alcohol component, carboxylic acid component (other than trimellitic anhydride), and esterification catalyst listed in Table 1 were fed into a 5-litter four-necked flask equipped with a nitrogen feed pipe, a dewatering pipe, an agitator and a thermocouple. The mixture was subjected to condensation polymerization for 10 hours at 230 °C under a nitrogen gas flow, followed by a reaction for 1 hour at 230 °C under a pressure of 80 kPa. After the reaction product was cooled to 220 °C, trimellitic anhydride was added to the reaction product, and the mixture was reacted for 1 hour under a normal pressure. The reaction product was further reacted at 220 °C under a pressure of 20 kPa so that the reaction product has the predetermined softening point. Thus, a polyester resin 1 (Synthesis Example 1) and a polyester resin 2 (Synthesis Example 2) were prepared.
Table 1 Synthesis Example 1 Synthesis Example 2 Polyester 1Polyester 2Alcohol component BPA-PO*2 2800g(80*) 2450g(70*) BPA-EO*3 650g(20*) 975g(30*) Carboxyl acid
componentTerephthalic acid
Trimellitic
anhydride1494g(90*)
192g(10*)1162g(70*)
384g(20*)Esterification catalyst Tin (II) dioctanate 0.5g 0.5g Properties of polyester resin Softening point (°C) 98.2 148.1 Tg (°C) 63.5 61.3 Acid value (mgKOH/g) 24.5 25.3 Note
*: Molar ratio provided that the total of the alcohol components is 100 moles
*2: polyoxypropylene(2.2)-2,2-bis(4-hydroxyphenyl)propane
*3: polyoxyethylene(2 .2)-2,2-bis(4-hydroxyphenyl)propane - The following components were fed into a 5-litter four-necked flask equipped with a nitrogen feed pipe, a dewatering pipe, an agitator and a thermocouple.
1,4-Butanediol 23.75 mol Ethylene glycol 1.25 mol Fumaric acid 22.75 mol Trimellitic anhydride 1.65 mol Hydroquinone 4.8g - The mixture was reacted for 5 hours at 160 °C under a nitrogen gas flow, followed by a reaction for 1 hour at 200 °C The reaction product was further reacted for 1 hour under a pressure of 8 3 kPa. Thus, a
crystalline polyester resin 3 having a softening point of 118 °C and a glass transition temperature (Tg) of 115 °C was synthesized. - The following components were mixed.
Polyester resin 1 (R1) 50 parts Polyester resin 2 (R2) 50 parts Carbon black (CB) 10 parts Carnauba wax (CW) 2 parts N-steatylsteaiamide (SA) 2 parts Zinc salicylate (ZS) 1 part - The mixture was fully mixed with a HENSCHEL MIXER mixer MF20C/I from Mitsui Miike Machinery Co., Ltd. under the following mixing conditions.
Revolution: 1,500 rpm
Agitation: A cycle of agitation for 60 seconds followed by pause for 60 seconds is repeated 5 times - The mixture was kneaded with a double-axis extruder from Toshiba Machine Co , Ltd., followed by cooling on a steel belt In this regard, the kneading operation was performed so that the temperature of the kneaded mixture at the exit of the extruder is 120 °C.
- The kneaded mixture was then pulverized with a jet mill so that the resultant powder has a volume average particle diameter of 8.0 µm ± 0.5 µm. The powder was then subjected to air classification to prepare toner particles. One hundred (100) parts of'the thus prepared toner particles were mixed with 1.0 part of a silica (R-972 from Nippon Aerosil Co.) serving as an external additive using a HENSCHEL MIXER mixer. Thus, a
toner 1 was prepared. - The procedure for preparation of the
toner 1 was repeated except that the formulation of the toner was changed as illustrated in Tables 2 to 4. Thustoners 2 to 13 were prepared. In Tables 2 to 4, the numerals in parentheses represent the added amounts (parts by weight). In addition, the melting points of the waxes used are illustrated in Table 5.Table 2 Toner Prep. Ex. 1 Toner Prep. Ex. 2 Toner Prep. Ex. 3 Toner Prep. Ex. 4 Toner Prep. Ex. 5 Toner 1Tone 2Toner 3Toner 4 Toner 5 Resin R1 (50) R1 (50) R1 (40) R1 (50) R1 (50) R2 (50) R2 (50) R2 (40) R2 (50) R2 (50) - - R3 (20) - - colorant CB (10) CB (10) CB (10) CB (10) CB (10) Wax CW (2) CW (2) CW (2) CW (2) CW (2) SA (2) SA (0.5) SA (2) ESA* (2) ESA* (5) Charge controlling agent ZS (1) ZS (1) ZS (1) ZS (1) ZS (1) ESA*: ethylenebisstearamide Table 3 Toner Prep Ex. 6 Toner Prep. Ex. 7 Toner Prep. Ex. 8 Toner Prep. Ex. 9 Toner Prep. Ex. 10 Toner 6 Toner 7 Toner 8Toner 9 Toner 10Resin R1 (50) R1 (50) R1 (50) R1 (50) R1 (50) R2 (50) R2 (50) R2 (50) R2 (50) R2 (50) - - - - - colorant CB (10) CB (10) CB (10) CB (10) CB (10) Wax CW (5) CW (2) CW (2) CW (2) CW (2) ESA (5) MSA*2 (2) ECA*3 (2) ESA (6) - Charge controlling agent ZS (1) ZS (1) ZS (1) ZS (1) ZS (1) MSA*2: Methylenebisstearamide
ECA*3: EthylenebiscapramideTable 4 Toner Prep. Ex. 11 Toner Prep. Ex. 12 Toner Prep. Ex. 13 Toner 11 Toner 12 Toner 13 Resin R1 (40) R1 (40) R1 (50) R2 (40) R2 (40) R2 (50) R3 (20) R3 (20) - colorant CB (10) CB (10) CB(10) Wax CW (2) CW (2) PW*4 (0.5) - MSA (2) SA (0.5) Charge controlling agent ZS (1) ZS (1) ZS (1) PW*4: Paraffin wax Table 5 Wax Melting point (°C) Carnauba wax (CW) 81 Paraffin wax (PW) 77 N-stearylstearamide (SA) 95 Methylenebisstearamide (MSA) 141 Ethylenebisstearamide (ESA) 146 Ethylenebiscapramide (ECA) 161 - Thirty (30) milligrams of each toner was pressed under a pressure of 100 kg/cm2 using a pelletizing machine to prepare pellets of the toners each having a diameter of 5 mm The pellets were set on an aluminum foil set on a hot plate (PC-400D from Coining) to be heated for 5 minutes at 180 °C under an environmental conditions of' 23 °C and 55%RH After heating, the pellets were allowed to settle on a flat place together with the aluminum foil to be cooled to room temperature. The amount of nitrogen atoms present in a surface portion of the pellet was determined by X-ray photoelectron spectroscopy (XPS). The measurement conditions are as follows.
Instrument: AXIS-ULTRA from Kratos
X-ray source: A1 (monochromator)
Measurement power: 45W (15kV and 3 mA)
Measurement area: 900 x 600 µm2
Pass energy: 160 eV (wide scan), 20 eV (narrow scan)
Energy step: 1 eV (wide scan), 0 1 eV (narrow scan)
Neutralization condition - Filament current: 1.6 A, Charge valance: 1.7 V
- In this regard, the amount of nitrogen atoms is classified into the following categories
- ⊚ : The amount is not less than 2 0% and not greater than 3 0%.
- ○ : The amount is not less than 1.0% and less than 2.0%
- Δ : The amount is not less than 0.5% and less than 1.0%
- × : The amount is less than 0.5%
- The results are shown in Tables 6-10.
- The following components were mixed for 10 minutes using a HOMOMIXER mixer from Tokushu Kika Kogyo Co., Ltd. to prepare a carrier coating liquid including a particulate alumina.
Acrylic resin solution 21.0 parts (solid content of 50% by weight) Guanamine solution 6.4 parts (solid content of 70% by weight) Particulate alumina 7.6 parts (average particle diameter of 0.3 µm, and resistivity of 1014 Ω · cm) Silicone resin solution 65.0 parts (SR2410 from Dow Corning Toray Silicone Co., Ltd., solid content of 23% by weight) Aminosilane 0.3 parts (SH6020 from Dow Corning Toray Silicone Co., Ltd., solid content of 100% by weight) Toluene 60 parts Butylcellosolve 60 parts - A calcined ferrite powder which serves as a core material of the carrier and which has a formula of (MgO)18(MnO)49 5(Fe2O3)48 0 and an average particle diameter of 35 µm was coated with the coating liquid prepared above using a coating machine SPIRA COTA from Okada Seiko Co, Ltd. The thickness of the cover layer was 0.15 µm The coated carrier was calcined at 150 °C for 1 hour using an electric furnace After cooling, the coated carrier, was sieved using a screen with openings of 106 µm Thus, a coated carrier was prepared
- Five parts of each of the
toners 1 to 14 was mixed with 95 parts of the coated cattier, and each of the mixtures was agitated for 5 minutes using a TURBULA MIXER mixer T2F From Willy A. Bachofen AG Maschinenfabrik Thus, developers 1-14 were prepared. - Each of the developers was set in a color laser printer (IPSIO CX8200 from Ricoh Co , Ltd.), and images were produced under the conditions mentioned below in Tables 6-10 The color printer can freely change the linear speed thereof, and has an oil applicator, which can freely change the coating amount of oil
- The toners and developers were evaluated as follows.
- Two grams of each toner was pressed under a pressure of 100 kg/cm2 using a pelletizing machine to prepare pellets of the toners each having a diameter of 40 mm and a thickness of 2 mm. The pellets were set on an aluminum foil set on a hot plate (PC-400D from Corning) to be heated for 300 seconds at 180 °C under an environmental conditions of 23 °C and 55%RH After heating, the pellets were allowed to settle on a flat place together with the aluminum foil to be cooled to room temperature Next, 9 mg of the oil used for the oil applicator was dropped by a micro syringe on the surface of each pellet from a
point 1 cm above the pellet Soon after the oil is dropped, the area (A1) of'the oil on the surface of'the pellet was measured (the drop was photographed). Further, the area (A2) of the oil was also measured at atime 24 hours after dropping the oil to determine how the drop spread. In this regard, the oils used for this test are described in Tables 6-10 below In addition, the oil spread property (OSP) of the toner is graded as follows. - ⊚ : The ratio (W2/W1)x100 is less than 125.
- ○ : The ratio (W2/W1)x100 is not less than 125 and less than 150
- Δ : The ratio (W2/W1)x100 is not less than 150 and less than 200.
- × : The ratio (W2/W1)x100 is not less than 200.
- An image with a size of 20 cm x 20 cm which consists of plural character string images and has an image area proportion of 25% was output. In this regard, the image density of the solid image was controlled so as to be 1.3 (measured by a densitometer X-RITE 938 from X-Rite Inc.), and the oil applicator was activated. The oils used for the oil applicator are described in Tables 6-10 below.
- The produced image was rubbed with a smear cloth (defined in JIS L0849) set on a clock meter (
Model 1 from Atlas Electric Device Co.) The optical density of the portion of the smear cloth rubbing the image was measured with the densitometer X-RITE 938. The fixability of the toner is graded as follows. - ⊚ : The optical density is less than 0.08.
- ○ : The optical density is not less than 0.08 and less than 0.10.
- Δ : The optical density is not less than 0.10 and not greater than 0.15.
- × : The optical density is greater than 0.15.
- The evaluation results are shown in Tables 6-10.
Table 6 Ex. 1 Ex. 2 Ex. 3 Ex. 4 Ex. 5 Ex. 6 Number of toner (developer) 1 1 1 1 1 1 Amount of amide wax ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Oil used** A B A A A A Oil spread property ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ RC* Linear speed (mm/sec) 1950 1950 1950 1950 1950 1950 Coating amount of oil (µg/cm2) 0.3 0.3 6 11 0.3 0.3 Content of CaCO3 in receiving material 0.49 0.49 049 0.49 0.02 0.62 Fixability ○ ○ ○ ○ ⊚ △ RC*: Image recording conditions
Oil**
A: Silicone oil type SS from Ricoh Co., Ltd.
B: Silicone oil FUSER OIL HA from IBM, which is partially modified by an amino group.Table 7 Ex. 7 Ex. 8* Ex. 9 Ex.10 Ex.11 Ex.12 Number of toner (developer) 1 1 2 3 4 5 Amount of amide wax ○ ○ △ ○ ○ ⊚ Oil used A A A A A A Oil spread property ○ ○ △ ○ ○ ⊚ RC Linear speed (mm/sec) 500 450 1950 1950 1950 1950 Coating amount of oil (µg/cm2) 0.3 0.3 03 0.3 0.3 0.3 Content of CaCO3 in receiving material 0.49 0.49 0.49 049 0.49 0.62 Fixability ○ ○ △ ○ ○ ⊚ * not according to the invention Table 8 Ex.13 Ex.14 Ex.15 Ex.16 Ex.17 Number of toner (developer) 6 7 8 9 12 Amount of amide wax ⊚ ○ ○ ⊚ ○ Oil used A A A A A Oil spread properly ⊚ ○ ○ ⊚ ○ RC Linear speed (mm/sec) 1950 1950 1950 1950 1950 Coating amount of oil (µg/cm2) 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 Content of CaCO3 in receiving material 0.62 0.49 0.49 0.49 0.49 Fixability ⊚ ○ ○ ⊚ ○ Table 9 Comp Ex. 1 Comp. Ex. 2 Comp Ex. 3 Comp. Ex. 4 Number of toner (developer) 10 10 10 10 Amount of amide wax × × × × Oil used A B A A Oil spread property × × × × RC Linear speed (mm/sec) 1950 1950 1950 1950 Coating amount of oil (µg/cm2) 0.3 0.3 6 0.3 Content of CaCO3 in receiving material 0.49 0.49 0.49 0.02 Fixability × × × × Table 10 Comp. Ex. 5 Comp. Ex. 6 Comp. Ex. 7 Comp. Ex. 8 Number of toner (developer) 10 10 11 13 Amount of amide wax × × × × Oil used A A A A Oil spread property × × × × RC Linear speed (mm/sec) 500 500 1950 1950 Coating amount of oil (µg/cm2) 0.3 11 0.3 0.3 Content of CaCO3 in receiving material 0.49 062 0.49 049 Fixability × × × × - It is clear from Tables 6-10 that the images produced in Examples 1-17 are superior to the images produced in Comparative Examples 1-8 with respect to fixability even when the images are produced at a high linear speed
- By fixing toner images, which are formed of a toner having a specific oil spreading property, with a fixing member on which an oil such as silicone oils is applied, high quality images having good fixing properties can be produced at a high speed.
wherein the toner includes an amide wax such that an amount of nitrogen atoms of the amide wax determined by X-ray photoelectron spectroscopy is from 0.5 to 3.0 atomic percent based on total atoms, wherein the X-ray photoelectron spectroscopic method includes:
Claims (10)
- An image forming method comprising:forming an electrostatic image on an image bearing member (321; 1; 10; 101);developing the electrostatic image with a developer including a toner to form a toner image on the image bearing member;transferring the toner image onto a receiving material (326; S; P; 95; 105) optionally via an intermediate transfer medium (50);fixing the toner image to the receiving material with a fixing member (513; 520; 567; 540; 213); andapplying an oil to the fixing member,wherein the toner comprises a binder resin, a colorant and a wax, and satisfies relationship (A):
wherein OSP represents an oil spreading property of the toner, A1 represents an area of the oil dropped on a pellet of the toner measured 30 seconds after dropping the oil, and A2 represents an area of the dropped oil measured 24 hours after dropping the oil, wherein the oil spreading property (OSP) is determined by a method including:pressing about 2 g of the toner at a pressure of 100 kg/cm2 to form the pellet of the toner having a cylindrical form with a diameter of about 40 mm and a thickness of about 2 mm;heating the pellet for 5 minutes on a hot plate heated to 180 °C under an environmental condition of 23 °C and 55%RH;setting the pellet on a horizontal plane so that a flat surface of the pellet faces upward to cool the pellet under the environmental condition;dropping 9 mg of the oil on the flat surface of the pellet from a point 1 cm above the flat surface of the pellet; andmeasuring the areas A1 and A2 of the oil dropped on the flat surface of the pellet 30 seconds after dropping the oil and 24 hours after dropping the oil to determine the oil spreading property (OSP),wherein an image forming apparatus is used for the image forming method and the image forming apparatus feeds the receiving material (326; S; P; 95; 105) at a speed of from 500 mm/sec to 2000 mm/sec;wherein the toner includes an amide wax such that an amount of nitrogen atoms of the amide wax determined by X-ray photoelectron spectroscopy is from 0.5 to 3.0 atomic percent based on total atoms, wherein the X-ray photoelectron spectroscopic method includes:pressing about 30 mg of the toner for 1 minute at a pressure of 100 kg/cm2 to form a pellet of the toner having a cylindrical form with a diameter of about 5 mm;heating the pellet for 5 minutes on a hot plate heated to 180 °C under an environmental condition of 23 °C and 55% RH;cooling the pellet; andsubjecting a flat surface of the pellet to an X-ray photoelectron spectroscopy to determine the amount of nitrogen atoms of the amide wax in the pellet of the toner. - The image forming method according to Claim 1, wherein the toner includes a wax in an amount of from 1.5 to 9.0 parts by weight per 100 parts by weight of the binder resin
- The image forming method according to Claim 1 or 2, wherein the toner includes an amide wax in an amount of from 0.5 to 50 parts by weight per 100 parts by weight of the binder resin.
- The image forming method according to Claim 3, wherein the amide wax has a melting point of from 70 to 165 °C.
- The image forming method according to any one of Claims 1 to 4, wherein the oil applied to the fixing member includes a silicone oil.
- The image forming method according to Claim 5, wherein the oil applied to the fixing member includes an amino-modified silicone oil.
- The image forming method according to any one of Claims 1 to 6, wherein an amount of the oil applied to the fixing member is from 0.1 to 10 µg/cm2.
- The image forming method according to any one of Claims 1 to 7, wherein the binder resin of the toner includes a polyester resin having a glass transition temperature of from 55 to 70 °C and a softening point of from 115 to 150 °C.
- The image forming method according to any one of Claims 1 to 8, wherein the receiving material (326; S; P; 95; 105) is a paper including calcium carbonate in an amount of not greater than 0.6, wherein the amount is determined by a FTIR-ATR method and is defined by the following equation:
wherein H(peak 1421cm-1) represents a height of a peak which is specific to calcium carbonate and which is observed at 1421cm-1 and H(pealc 1036cm-1) represent a height of a peak which is specific to cellulose included in the paper and which is observed at 1036cm-1. - The image forming method according to any one of Claims 1 to 9, wherein the image forming apparatus comprises:an image bearing member (321; 1; 10; 101);a latent image forming device (310, 323; 620, 603; 20, 30; 160, 21; 102, 103) configured to form an electrostatic latent image on the image bearing member;a developing device (324; 402; 424; 604; 40; 45; 61; 104) configured to develop the electrostatic latent image with a developer to form a toner image on the image bearing member;a transfer device (325; 2; 5; 650; 80; 62; 24; 108) configured to transfer the toner image onto a receiving material optionally via an intermediate transfer medium (50);a fixing device (510; 518; 570; 535; 25; 213, 215) configured to fix the toner image on the receiving material; andan oil applicator (211) configured to apply an oil to a fixing member (513; 520; 567; 540; 213) of the fixing device
Priority Applications (1)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
EP20070121966 EP2065757B1 (en) | 2007-11-30 | 2007-11-30 | Electrophotographic image forming method |
Applications Claiming Priority (1)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
EP20070121966 EP2065757B1 (en) | 2007-11-30 | 2007-11-30 | Electrophotographic image forming method |
Publications (2)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
EP2065757A1 EP2065757A1 (en) | 2009-06-03 |
EP2065757B1 true EP2065757B1 (en) | 2014-04-30 |
Family
ID=39277359
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
EP20070121966 Ceased EP2065757B1 (en) | 2007-11-30 | 2007-11-30 | Electrophotographic image forming method |
Country Status (1)
Country | Link |
---|---|
EP (1) | EP2065757B1 (en) |
Families Citing this family (4)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US8304155B2 (en) | 2008-05-29 | 2012-11-06 | Eastman Kodak Company | Toner composition for preventing image blocking |
US8431306B2 (en) | 2010-03-09 | 2013-04-30 | Xerox Corporation | Polyester resin containing toner |
WO2018062013A1 (en) * | 2016-09-29 | 2018-04-05 | バンドー化学株式会社 | Blade |
JP7138431B2 (en) * | 2017-12-20 | 2022-09-16 | ブラザー工業株式会社 | Image forming method and image forming apparatus |
Family Cites Families (19)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JPH0713752B2 (en) | 1983-10-25 | 1995-02-15 | キヤノン株式会社 | Toner for electrophotography |
JPS6263940A (en) | 1985-09-14 | 1987-03-20 | Konishiroku Photo Ind Co Ltd | Toner for developing electrostatic image |
JPH0812471B2 (en) | 1987-07-09 | 1996-02-07 | 三菱レイヨン株式会社 | Toner resin and method for producing the same |
JPH0282267A (en) | 1988-09-19 | 1990-03-22 | Arakawa Chem Ind Co Ltd | Electrophotographic toner composition superior in low temperature fixability |
JP2574209B2 (en) | 1989-07-07 | 1997-01-22 | 日本合成化学工業株式会社 | Toner for electrostatic images |
JP2769898B2 (en) | 1990-02-02 | 1998-06-25 | キヤノン株式会社 | Heat fixing magnetic toner |
US5747213A (en) * | 1995-05-31 | 1998-05-05 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Image forming method and heat fixing method using a toner including a wax |
JP2931899B1 (en) | 1998-02-27 | 1999-08-09 | 三洋化成工業株式会社 | Electrophotographic toner binder |
JPH11305486A (en) | 1998-04-27 | 1999-11-05 | Konica Corp | Toner for developing electrostatic charge image |
US6300024B1 (en) * | 1999-06-30 | 2001-10-09 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Toner, two-component type developer, heat fixing method, image forming method and apparatus unit |
JP3310253B2 (en) | 2000-02-10 | 2002-08-05 | 花王株式会社 | Electrophotographic toner |
JP4416965B2 (en) * | 2000-06-26 | 2010-02-17 | 株式会社リコー | Color toner for developing electrostatic image, fixing method, toner container, and image forming apparatus |
US6586147B2 (en) * | 2000-07-10 | 2003-07-01 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Toner and full-color image forming method |
JP2002214833A (en) | 2001-01-16 | 2002-07-31 | Ricoh Co Ltd | Electrostatic charge image developing toner |
US6808852B2 (en) * | 2001-09-06 | 2004-10-26 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Toner and heat-fixing method |
JP2004184925A (en) * | 2002-12-06 | 2004-07-02 | Hitachi Printing Solutions Ltd | Fixing device of electrophotographic printing apparatus |
US20060110543A1 (en) * | 2004-11-22 | 2006-05-25 | Xerox Corporation | Method for optimizing fuser release agent composition |
JP2006330320A (en) * | 2005-05-26 | 2006-12-07 | Ricoh Co Ltd | Fixing method, fixing device, and image forming apparatus |
JP2007047738A (en) * | 2005-07-15 | 2007-02-22 | Ricoh Co Ltd | Image forming apparatus and image forming method |
-
2007
- 2007-11-30 EP EP20070121966 patent/EP2065757B1/en not_active Ceased
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
EP2065757A1 (en) | 2009-06-03 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
US7901861B2 (en) | Electrophotographic image forming method | |
JP4749939B2 (en) | Image forming apparatus, image forming method, and process cartridge | |
US7862973B2 (en) | Toner and developer, and image forming apparatus, image forming method and process cartridge | |
JP5054443B2 (en) | Image forming apparatus, image forming method, and process cartridge | |
JP4749937B2 (en) | Image forming apparatus, image forming method, and process cartridge | |
JP4749925B2 (en) | Image forming apparatus, image forming method, and process cartridge | |
JP4808695B2 (en) | Toner, image forming apparatus using the same, image forming method, and process cartridge | |
JP5392450B2 (en) | White toner for electrophotography, image forming apparatus using the same, and image forming method | |
JP2008129411A (en) | Toner, image forming apparatus and image forming method using the same, and process cartridge | |
JP4749938B2 (en) | Image forming apparatus, image forming method, and process cartridge | |
JP5245421B2 (en) | Toner production method | |
JP4749929B2 (en) | Image forming apparatus, image forming method, and process cartridge | |
JP4874878B2 (en) | Two-component developer, image forming apparatus using the same, image forming method, and process cartridge | |
JP4749940B2 (en) | Image forming apparatus, image forming method, and process cartridge | |
JP4971756B2 (en) | Toner, image forming apparatus using the same, image forming method, and process cartridge | |
EP2065757B1 (en) | Electrophotographic image forming method | |
JP4749928B2 (en) | Image forming apparatus, image forming method, and process cartridge | |
JP4909233B2 (en) | Image forming apparatus, image forming method, and process cartridge | |
JP4728935B2 (en) | Method for producing developer | |
JP4749924B2 (en) | Image forming apparatus, image forming method, and process cartridge | |
JP4749927B2 (en) | Image forming apparatus, image forming method, and process cartridge | |
JP4749926B2 (en) | Image forming apparatus, image forming method, and process cartridge | |
CN101458469A (en) | Electrophotography image forming method and apparatus | |
JP5439796B2 (en) | Toner, two-component developer, image forming method, image forming apparatus, and process cartridge | |
JP2010066322A (en) | Toner for color image formation, toner kit using the same, full-color toner image forming apparatus, process cartridge, and full-color image forming method |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
PUAI | Public reference made under article 153(3) epc to a published international application that has entered the european phase |
Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: 0009012 |
|
AK | Designated contracting states |
Kind code of ref document: A1 Designated state(s): AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE ES FI FR GB GR HU IE IS IT LI LT LU LV MC MT NL PL PT RO SE SI SK TR |
|
AX | Request for extension of the european patent |
Extension state: AL BA HR MK RS |
|
17P | Request for examination filed |
Effective date: 20090706 |
|
17Q | First examination report despatched |
Effective date: 20090827 |
|
AKX | Designation fees paid |
Designated state(s): DE FR GB |
|
GRAP | Despatch of communication of intention to grant a patent |
Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: EPIDOSNIGR1 |
|
INTG | Intention to grant announced |
Effective date: 20140106 |
|
GRAS | Grant fee paid |
Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: EPIDOSNIGR3 |
|
GRAA | (expected) grant |
Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: 0009210 |
|
AK | Designated contracting states |
Kind code of ref document: B1 Designated state(s): DE FR GB |
|
REG | Reference to a national code |
Ref country code: GB Ref legal event code: FG4D |
|
REG | Reference to a national code |
Ref country code: DE Ref legal event code: R096 Ref document number: 602007036338 Country of ref document: DE Effective date: 20140612 |
|
REG | Reference to a national code |
Ref country code: DE Ref legal event code: R097 Ref document number: 602007036338 Country of ref document: DE |
|
PLBE | No opposition filed within time limit |
Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: 0009261 |
|
STAA | Information on the status of an ep patent application or granted ep patent |
Free format text: STATUS: NO OPPOSITION FILED WITHIN TIME LIMIT |
|
26N | No opposition filed |
Effective date: 20150202 |
|
REG | Reference to a national code |
Ref country code: DE Ref legal event code: R097 Ref document number: 602007036338 Country of ref document: DE Effective date: 20150202 |
|
REG | Reference to a national code |
Ref country code: FR Ref legal event code: PLFP Year of fee payment: 9 |
|
REG | Reference to a national code |
Ref country code: FR Ref legal event code: PLFP Year of fee payment: 10 |
|
REG | Reference to a national code |
Ref country code: FR Ref legal event code: PLFP Year of fee payment: 11 |
|
PGFP | Annual fee paid to national office [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo] |
Ref country code: FR Payment date: 20181123 Year of fee payment: 12 Ref country code: GB Payment date: 20181120 Year of fee payment: 12 |
|
GBPC | Gb: european patent ceased through non-payment of renewal fee |
Effective date: 20191130 |
|
PG25 | Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo] |
Ref country code: GB Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF NON-PAYMENT OF DUE FEES Effective date: 20191130 Ref country code: FR Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF NON-PAYMENT OF DUE FEES Effective date: 20191130 |
|
PGFP | Annual fee paid to national office [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo] |
Ref country code: DE Payment date: 20201119 Year of fee payment: 14 |
|
REG | Reference to a national code |
Ref country code: DE Ref legal event code: R119 Ref document number: 602007036338 Country of ref document: DE |
|
PG25 | Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo] |
Ref country code: DE Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF NON-PAYMENT OF DUE FEES Effective date: 20220601 |